Skip to main content

Full text of "Science and hypothesis"

See other formats


:CO 


•CD 


CO 


HANDBOUND 
AT  THE 


UNIVERSITY  OF 
TORONTO  PRESS 


SCIENCE  AND  HYPOTHESIS 


SCIENCE 
AND    HYPOTHESIS 


BY 

H.  POINCARE, 

MEMBER   OF   THE    INSTITUTE   OF   FRANCE. 


WITH  A  PREFACE  BY 
J.  LARMOR,   D.Sc.,   SEC.  R.S., 

Liicasian  Professor  of  Mathematics  in  the  University  of  Cambridge, 


Condon  and  Hewcastlc-on-Cyne: 
THE  WALTER  SCOTT  PUBLISHING  CO.,  LTD 

NEW    YORK  :     3    EAST    J4TH    STREET.  ~\ 

1905. 


Q 

I7ST 
P7S- 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  III. 

NON-EUCLIDEAN    GEOMETRIES 


PAGE 

TRANSLATOR'S  NOTE ix 

INTRODUCTION 

AUTHOR'S  PREFACE 


PART  I. 

NUMBER  AND  MAGNITUDE. 

CHAPTER  I. 
ON  THE  NATURE  OF  MATHEMATICAL  REASONING         i 

CHAPTER  II. 

MATHEMATICAL  MAGNITUDE  AND  EXPERIMENT  .        17 

PART  II. 
SPACE. 


35 


VI  CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER  IV. 

PAGE 

SPACE  AND  GEOMETRY         .         .         .         .  5  r 

CHAPTER  V. 

EXPERIMENT  AND  GEOMETRY       .         .         .         -72 

PART  III. 

FORCE. 

CHAPTER  VI. 
THE  CLASSICAL  MECHANICS          ....        89 

CHAPTER  VII. 
RELATIVE  AND  ABSOLUTE  MOTION       .         .  i  j  i 

CHAPTER  VIII. 
ENERGY  AND  THERMO-DYNAMICS          .  .      123 


PART  IV. 

NA  TUKE. 

CHAPTER  IX. 

HYPOTHESES  IN  PHYSICS     ....  140 


CONTENTS.  vii 

CHAPTER  X. 

PAGE 

j     THE  THEORIES  OF  MODERN  PHYSICS  .         .     160 

CHAPTER  XL 

THE  CALCULUS  OF  PROBABILITIES        .         .         .183 

CHAPTER  XII. 
OPTICS  AND  ELECTRICITY     .  .         .         .211 

CHAPTER  XIII. 

ELECTRO-DYNAMICS       .  .  •     ^2 


TRANSLATOR'S  NOTE 


THE  translator  wishes  to  express  his  indebted 
ness  to  Professor  Larmor,  for  kindly  consenting 
to  introduce  the  author  of  Science  and  Hypothesis 
to  English  readers;  to  Dr.  F.  S.  Macaulay  and 
Mr.  C.  S.  Jackson,  M.A.,  who  have  read  the  whole 
of  the  proofs  and  have  greatly  helped  by  sugges 
tions;  also  to  Professor  G.  H.  Bryan,  F.R.S.,  who 
has  read  the  proofs  of  Chapter  VIII.,  and  whose 
criticisms  have  been  most  valuable. 

\V.  J.  G. 

February  1905. 


INTRODUCTION. 


IT  is  to  be  hoped  that,  as  a  consequence  of  the 
present  active  scrutiny  of  our  educational  aims 
and  methods,  and  of  the  resulting  encouragement 
of  the  study  of  modern  languages,  we  shall  not 
remain,  as  a  nation,  so  much  isolated  from 
ideas  and  tendencies  in  continental  thought  and 
literature  as  we  have  been  in  the  past.  As  things 
are,  however,  the  translation  of  this  book  is 
doubtless  required;  at  any  rate,  it  brings  vividly 
before  us  an  instructive  point  of  view.  Though 
some  of  M.  Poincare's  chapters  have  been  collected 
from  well-known  treatises  written  several  years 
ago,  and  indeed  are  sometimes  in  detail  not  quite 
up  to  date,  besides  occasionally  suggesting  the 
suspicion  that  his  views  may  possibly  have  been 
modified  in  the  interval,  yet  their  publication  in 
a  compact  form  has  excited  a  warm  welcome  in 
this  country. 

It  must  be  confessed  that  the  English  language 


Xll  .      INTRODUCTION. 

hardly  lends  itself  as  a  perfect  medium  for  the 
rendering  of  the  delicate  shades  of  suggestion 
and  allusion  characteristic  of  M.  Poincare's  play 
around  his  subject ;  notwithstanding  the  excel 
lence  of  the  translation,  loss  in  this  respect  is 
inevitable. 

There  has  been  of  late  a  growing  trend  of 
opinion,  prompted  in  part  by  general  philosophical 
views,  in  the  direction  that  the  theoretical  con 
structions  of  physical  science  are  largely  factitious, 
that  instead  of  presenting  a  valid  image  of  the 
relations  of  things  on  which  further  progress  can 
be  based,  they  are  still  little  better  than  a  mirage. 
The  best  method  of  abating  this  scepticism  is  to 
become  acquainted  with  the  real  scope  and  modes 
of  application  of  conceptions  which,  in  the  popular 
language  of  superficial  exposition — and  even  in 
the  unguarded  and  playful  paradox  of  their 
authors,  intended  only  for  the  instructed  eye — 
often  look  bizarre  enough.  But  much  advantage 
will  accrue  if  men  of  science  become  their  own 
epistemologists,  and  show  to  the  world  by  critical 
exposition  in  non-technical  terms  of  the  results 
and  methods  of  their  constructive  work,  that  more 
than  mere  instinct  is  involved  in  it:  the  com 
munity  has  indeed  a  right  to  expect  as  much  as 
this. 


INTRODUCTION.  Xlll 

It  would  be  hard  to  find  any  one  better 
qualified  for  this  kind  of  exposition,  either 
from  the  profundity  of  his  own  mathematical 
achievements,  or  from  the  extent  and  freshness 
of  his  interest  in  the  theories  of  physical  science, 
than  the  author  of  this  book.  If  an  appreciation 
might  be  ventured  on  as  regards  the  later  chapters, 
they  are,  perhaps,  intended  to  present  the  stern 
logical  analyst  quizzing  the  cultivator  of  physical 
ideas  as  to  what  he  is  driving  at,  and  wrhither  he 
expects  to  go,  rather  than  any  responsible  attempt 
towards  a  settled  confession  of  faith.  Thus,  when 
M.  Poincare  allows  himself  for  a  moment  to 
indulge  in  a  process  of  evaporation  of  the 
Principle  of  Energy,  he  is  content  to  sum  up: 
"  Eh  bien,  quelles  que  soient  les  notions  nouvelles 
que  les  experiences  futures  nous  donneront  sur  le 
monde,  nous  sommes  surs  d'avance  qu'il  y  aura 
quelque  chose  qui  demeurera  constant  et  que  nous 
pourrons  appeler  cncrgic"  (p.  166),  and  to  leave 
the  matter  there  for  his  readers  to  think  it  out. 
Though  hardly  necessary  in  the  original  French,  it 
may  not  now  be  superfluous  to  point  out  that 
independent  reflection  and  criticism  on  the  part 
of  the  reader  are  tacitly  implied  here  as  else 
where. 

An  interesting  passage  is  the  one  devoted  to 


XIV  INTRODUCTION. 

Maxwell's  theory  of  the  functions  of  the  sether, 
and  the  comparison  of  the  close-knit  theories  of 
the  classical  French  mathematical  physicists  with 
the  somewhat  loosely-connected  corpus  of  ideas  by 
which  Maxwell,  the  interpreter  and  successor  of 
Faraday,  has  (posthumously)  recast  the  whole 
face  of  physical  science.  How  many  times  has 
that  theory  been  re-written  since  Maxwell's  day  ? 
and  yet  how  little  has  it  been  altered  in  essence, 
except  by  further  developments  in  the  problem  of 
moving  bodies,  from  the  form  in  which  he  left  it! 
If.  as  M.  Poincare  remarks,  the  French  instinct 
for  precision  and  lucid  demonstration  sometimes 
finds  itself  ill  at  ease  with  physical  theories  of 
the  British  school,  he  as  readily  admits  (pp.  223, 
224),  and  indeed  fully  appreciates,  the  advantages 
on  the  other  side.  Our  owrn  mental  philosophers 
have  been  shocked  at  the  point  of  view  indicated 
by  the  proposition  hazarded  by  Laplace,  that  a 
sufficiently  developed  intelligence,  if  it  were  made 
acquainted  with  the  positions  and  motions  of  the 
atoms  at  any  instant,  could  predict  all  future 
history:  no  amount  of  demur  suffices  sometimes 
to  persuade  them  that  this  is  not  a  conception 
universally  entertained  in  physical  science.  It 
was  not  so  even  in  Laplace's  own  day.  From 
the  point  of  view  of  the  study  of  the  evolution 


INTRODUCTION.  XV 

of  the  sciences,  there  are  few  episodes  more 
instructive  than  the  collision  between  Laplace 
and  Young  with  regard  to  the  theory  of  capil 
larity.  The  precise  and  intricate  mathematical 
analysis  of  Laplace,  starting  from  fixed  pre 
conceptions  regarding  atomic  forces  which  were 
to  remain  intact  throughout  the  logical  develop 
ment  of  the  argument,  came  into  contrast  with  the 
tentative,  mobile  intuitions  of  Young ;  yet  the 
latter  was  able  to  grasp,  by  sheer  direct  mental 
force,  the  fruitful  though  partial  analogies  of  this 
recondite  class  of  phenomena  with  more  familiar 
operations  of  nature,  and  to  form  a  direct  picture 
of  the  way  things  interacted,  such  as  could  only 
have  been  illustrated,  quite  possibly  damaged  or 
obliterated,  by  premature  effort  to  translate  it 
into  elaborate  analytical  formulas.  The  apcrgus 
of  Young  were  apparently  devoid  of  all  cogency 
to  Laplace;  while  Young  expressed,  doubtless  in 
too  extreme  a  way,  his  sense  of  the  inanity  of  the 
array  of  mathematical  logic  of  his  rival.  The 
subsequent  history  involved  the  Nemesis  that  the 
fabric  of  Laplace  was  taken  down  and  recon 
structed  in  the  next  generation  by  Poisson;  while 
the  modern  cultivator  of  the  subject  turns,  at  any 
rate  in  England,  to  neither  of  those  expositions 
for  illumination,  but  rather  finds  in  the  partial 


XVI  INTRODUCTION. 

and  succinct  indications  of  Young  the  best  start 
ing-point  for  further  effort. 

It  seems,  however,  hard  to  accept  entirely 
the  distinction  suggested  (p.  213)  between  the 
methods  of  cultivating  theoretical  physics  in 
the  two  countries.  To  mention  only  two 
transcendent  names  which  stand  at  the  very 
front  of  two  of  the  greatest  developments  of 
physical  science  of  the  last  century,  Carnot  and 
Fresnel,  their  procedure  was  certainly  not  on  the 
lines  thus  described.  Possibly  it  is  not  devoid  of 
significance  that  each  of  them  attained  his  first 
effective  recognition  from  the  British  school. 

It  may,  in  fact,  be  maintained  that  the  part 
played  by  mechanical  and  such-like  theories — 
analogies  if  you  will — is  an  essential  one.  The 
reader  of  this  book  will  appreciate  that  the  human 
mind -has  need  of  many  instruments  of  comparison 
and  discovery  besides  the  unrelenting  logic  of  the 
infinitesimal  calculus.  The  dynamical  basis  which 
underlies  the  objects  of  our  most  frequent  ex 
perience  has  now  been  systematised  into  a  great 
calculus  of  exact  thought,  and  traces  of  new  real 
relationships  may  come  out  more  vividly  when 
considered  in  terms  of  our  familiar  acquaintance 
with  dynamical  systems  than  when  formulated 
under  the  paler  shadow  of  more  analytical  abstrac- 


INTRODUCTION.  XV11 

tions.  It  is  even  possible  for  a  constructive 
physicist  to  conduct  his  mental  operations  entirely 
by  dynamical  images,  though  Helmholtz,  as  well 
as  our  author,  seems  to  class  a  predilection  in  this 
direction  as  a  British  trait.  A  time  arrives  when, 
as  in  other  subjects,  ideas  have  crystallised  out 
into  distinctness ;  their  exact  verification  and 
development  then  becomes  a  problem  in  mathe 
matical  physics.  But  whether  the  mechanical 
analogies  still  survive,  or  new  terms  are  now 
introduced  devoid  of  all  naive  mechanical  bias, 
it  matters  essentially  little.  The  precise  de 
termination  of  the  relations  of  things  in  the 
rational  scheme  of  nature  in  which  we  find 
ourselves  is  the  fundamental  task,  and  for  its 
fulfilment  in  any  direction  advantage  has  to  be 
taken  of  our  knowledge,  even  when  only  partial, 
of  new  aspects  and  types  of  relationship  which 
may  have  become  familiar  perhaps  in  quite 
different  fields.  Nor  can  it  be  forgotten  that  the 
most  fruitful  and  fundamental  conceptions  of 
abstract  pure  mathematics  itself  have  often  been 
suggested  from  these  mechanical  ideas  of  flux 
and  force,  where  the  play  of  intuition  is  our 
most  powerful  guide.  The  study  of  the  historical 
evolution  of  physical  theories  is  essential  to  the 
complete  understanding  of  their  import.  It  is  in 

b 


XV111  INTRODUCTION. 

the  mental  workshop  of  a  Fresnel,  a  Kelvin,  or 
a  Helmholtz,  that  profound  ideas  of  the  deep 
things  of  Nature  are  struck  out  and  assume 
form;  when  pondered  over  and  paraphrased  by 
philosophers  we  see  them  react  on  the  conduct 
of  life :  it  is  the  business  of  criticism  to  polish 
them  gradually  to  the  common  measure  of  human 
understanding.  Oppressed  though  we  are  writh 
the  necessity  of  being  specialists,  if  we  are 
to  know  anything  thoroughly  in  these  days  of 
accumulated  details,  we  may  at  any  rate  pro 
fitably  study  the  historical  evolution  of  knowledge 
over  a  field  wider  than  our  own. 

The  aspect  of  the  subject  which  has  here  been 
dwrelt  on  is  that  scientific  progress,  considered 
historically,  is  not  a  strictly  logical  process,  and 
does  not  proceed  by  syllogisms.  New  ideas 
emerge  dimly  into  intuition,  come  into  con 
sciousness  from  nobody  knows  where,  and  become 
the  material  on  which  the  mind  operates,  forging 
them  gradually  into  consistent  doctrine,  which 
can  be  welded  on  to  existing  domains  of  know 
ledge.  But  this  process  is  never  complete :  a 
crude  connection  can  always  be  pointed  to  by  a 
logician  as  an  indication  of  the  imperfection  of 
human  constructions. 

If  intuition  plays  a  part  which  is  so  important, 


INTRODUCTION.  XIX 

it  is  surely  necessary  that  we  should  possess  a  firm 
grasp  of  its  limitations.  In  M.  Poincare's  earlier 
chapters  the  reader  can  gain  very  pleasantly  a 
vivid  idea  of  the  various  and  highly  complicated 
ways  of  docketing  our  perceptions  of  the  relations 
of  external  things,  all  equally  valid,  that  were 
open  to  the  human  race  to  develop.  Strange  to 
say,  they  never  tried  any  of  them ;  and,  satisfied 
with  the  very  remarkable  practical  fitness  of  the 
scheme  of  geometry  and  dynamics  that  came 
naturally  to  hand,  did  not  consciously  trouble 
themselves  about  the  possible  existence  of  others 
until  recently.  Still  more  recently  has  it  been 
found  that  the  good  Bishop  Berkeley's  logical 
jibes  against  the  Newtonian  ideas  of  fluxions  and 
limiting  ratios  cannot  be  adequately  appeased  in 
the  rigorous  mathematical  conscience,  until  our 
apparent  continuities  are  resolved  mentally  into 
discrete  aggregates  which  we  only  partially 
apprehend.  The  irresistible  impulse  to  atomize 
everything  thus  proves  to  be  not  merely  a  disease 
of  the  physicist ;  a  deeper  origin,  in  the  nature 
of  knowledge  itself,  is  suggested. 

Everywhere  want  of  absolute,  exact  adaptation 
can  be  detected,  if  pains  are  taken,  between  the 
various  constructions  that  result  from  our  mental 
activity  and  the  impressions  which  give  rise  to 


XX  INTRODUCTION. 

them.  The  bluntness  of  our  unaided  sensual 
perceptions,  which  are  the  source  in  part  of  the 
intuitions  of  the  race,  is  well  brought  out  in  this 
connection  by  M.  Poincare.  Is  there  real  con 
tradiction  ?  Harmony  usually  proves  to  be  re 
covered  by  shifting  our  attitude  to  the  phenomena. 
All  experience  leads  us  to  interpret  the  totality  of 
things  as  a  consistent  cosmos — undergoing  evolu 
tion,  the  naturalists  will  say — in  the  large-scale 
workings  of  which  we  are  interested  spectators 
and  explorers,  while  of  the  inner  relations  and 
ramifications  we  only  apprehend  dim  glimpses. 
When  our  formulation  of  experience  is  imperfect 
or  even  paradoxical,  we  learn  to  attribute  the 
fault  to  our  point  of  view,  and  to  expect  that 
future  adaptation  will  put  it  right.  But  Truth 
resides  in  a  deep  well,  and  we  shall  never  get 
to  the  bottom.  Only,  while  deriving  enjoyment 
and  insight  from  M.  Poincare's  Socratic  exposi 
tion  of  the  limitations  of  the  human  outlook  on 
the  universe,  let  us  beware  of  counting  limitation 
as  imperfection,  and  drifting  into  an  inadequate 
conception  of  the  wonderful  fabric  of  human 
knowledge. 

J.  LARMOR. 


AUTHOR'S  PREFACE. 


To  the  superficial  observer  scientific  truth  is  un 
assailable,  the  logic  of  science  is  infallible ;  and  if 
scientific  men  sometimes  make  mistakes,  it  is 
because  they  have  not  understood  the  rules  of 
the  game.  Mathematical  truths  are  derived  from 
a  few  self-evident  propositions,  by  a  chain  of 
flawless  reasonings ;  they  are  imposed  not  only  on 
us,  but  on  Nature  itself.  By  them  the  Creator  is 
fettered,  as  it  were,  and  His  choice  is  limited  to 
a  relatively  small  number  of  solutions.  A  few 
experiments,  therefore,  will  be  sufficient  to  enable 
us  to  determine  what  choice  He  has  made.  From 
each  experiment  a  number  of  consequences  will 
follow  by  a  series  of  mathematical  deductions, 
and  in  this  way  each  of  them  will  reveal  to  us  a 
corner  of  the  universe.  This,  to  the  minds  of  most 
people,  and  to  students  who  are  getting  their  first 
ideas  of  physics,  is  the  origin  of  certainty  in 
science.  This  is  what  they  take  to  be  the  role  of 


xxii  AUTHOR'S  PREFACE. 

experiment  and  mathematics.  And  thus,  too,  it 
was  understood  a  hundred  years  ago  by  many 
men  of  science  who  dreamed  of  constructing  the 
world  with  the  aid  of  the  smallest  possible  amount 
of  material  borrowed  from  experiment. 

But  upon  more  mature  reflection  the  position 
held  by  hypothesis  was  seen ;  it  was  recognised  that 
it  is  as  necessary  to  the  experimenter  as  it  is  to  the 
mathematician.  And  then  the  doubt  arose  if  all 
these  constructions  are  built  on  solid  foundations. 
The  conclusion  was  drawn  that  a  breath  would 
bring  them  to  the  ground.  This  sceptical  attitude 
does  not  escape  the  charge  of  superficiality.  To 
doubt  everything  or  to  believe  everything  are  two 
equally  convenient  solutions ;  both  dispense  with 
the  necessity  of  reflection. 

Instead  of  a  summary  condemnation  we  should 
.  examine  with  the  utmost  care  the  role  of  hypo 
thesis  ;  we  shall  then  recognise  not  only  that  it  is 
necessary,  but  that  in  most  cases  it  is  legitimate. 
We  shall  also  see  that  there  are  several  kinds  of 
hypotheses;  that  some  are  verifiable,  and  when 
once  confirmed  by  experiment  become  truths  of 
great  fertility;  that  others  may  be  useful  to  us  in 
fixing  our  ideas;  and  finally,  that  others  are 
hypotheses  only  in  appearance,  and  reduce  to 
definitions  or  to  conventions  in  disguise.  The 


AUTHOR'S  PREFACE.  xxiii 

latter  are  to  be  met  with  especially  in  mathematics  , 
and  in  the  sciences  to  which  it  is  applied.  From 
them,  indeed,  the  sciences  derive  their  rigour ; 
such  conventions  are  the  result  of  the  unrestricted 
activity  of  the  mind,  which  in  this  domain  recog-/ 
nises  no  obstacle.  For  here  the  mind  may  affirms 
because  it  lays  down  its  own  la\vs ;  but  let  us  • 
clearly  understand  that  while  these  laws  are 
imposed  on  our  science,  which  otherwise  could 
not  exist,  they  are  not  imposed  on  Nature.  Are^; 
they  then  arbitrary?  No;  for  if  they  were,  they 
would  not  be  fertile.  Experience  leaves  us  our 
freedom  of  choice,  but  it  guides  us  by  helping  us  to 
discern  the  most  convenient  path  to  follow.  Our 
laws  are  therefore  like  those  of  an  absolute 
monarch,  who  is  wise  and  consults  his  council  of 
state.  Some  people  have  been  struck  by  this 
characteristic  of  free  convention  w^hich  may  be 
recognised  in  certain  fundamental  principles  of 
the  sciences.  Some  have  set  no  limits  to  their 
generalisations,  and  at  the  same  time  they  have 
forgotten  that  there  is  a  difference  between  liberty 
and  the  purely  arbitrary.  So  that  they  are  com 
pelled  to  end  in  what  is  called  nominalism;  they 
have  asked  if  the  savant  is  not  the  dupe  of  his 
own  definitions,  and  if  the  world  he  thinks  he  has 
discovered  is  not  simply  the  creation  of  his  own 


xxiv  AUTHOR'S  PREFACE. 

caprice.1  Under  these  conditions  science  would 
retain  its  certainty,  but  would  not  attain  its  object, 
and  would  become  powerless.  Now,  we  daily  see 
what  science  is  doing  for  us.  This  could  not  be 
unless  it  taught  us  something  about  reality;  the 
aim  of  science  is  not  things  themselves,  as  the 
dogmatists  in  their  simplicity  imagine,  but  the 
relations  between  things;  outside  those  relations 
there  is  no  reality  knowable. 

Such  is  the  conclusion  to  which  we  are  led;  but 
to  reach  that  conclusion  we  must  pass  in  review 
the  series  of  sciences  from  arithmetic  and 
geometry  to  mechanics  and  experimental  physics. 
What  is  the  nature  of  mathematical  reasoning  ? 
Is  it  really  deductive,  as  is  commonly  supposed  ? 
Careful  analysis  shows  us  that  it  is  nothing  of  the 
kind ;  that  it  participates  to  some  extent  in  the 
nature  of  inductive  reasoning,  and  for  that  reason 
it  is  fruitful.  But  none  the  less  does  it  retain  its 
character  of  absolute  rigour ;  and  this  is  what 
must  first  be  shown. 

When  we  know  more  of  this  instrument  which 
is  placed  in  the  hands  of  the  investigator  by 
mathematics,  we  have  then  to  analyse  another 
fundamental  idea,  that  of  mathematical  magni- 

1  Cf.   M.   le  Roy:    "Science   et  Philosophic,"   Revue  de   Afe/a- 
pkysique  et  de  Morale ',  1901. 


AUTHOR'S    PREFACE. 

tude.  Do  we  find  it  in  nature,  or  have  we  our 
selves  introduced  it  ?  And  if  the  latter  be  the 
case,  are  we  not  running  a  risk  of  coming  to 
incorrect  conclusions  all  round  ?  Comparing  the 
rough  data  of  our  senses  with  that  extremely  com 
plex  and  subtle  conception  \vhich  mathematicians 
call  magnitude,  we  are  compelled  to  recognise  a 
divergence.  The  framework  into  which  \ve  wish 
to  make  everything  fit  is  one  of  our  own  construc 
tion  ;  but  wre  did  not  construct  it  at  random,  we 
constructed  it  by  measurement  so  to  speak;  and 
that  is  \vhy  wre  can  fit  the  facts  into  it  without 
altering  their  essential  qualities. 

Space  is  another  framework  which  we  impose 
on  the  world.  Whence  are  the  first  principles  of 
geometry  derived  ?  Are  they  imposed  on  us  by 
logic  ?  Lobatschewsky,  by  inventing  non-Euclid 
ean  geometries,  has  shown  that  this  is  not  the  case. 
Is  space  revealed  to  us  by  our  senses  ?  No ;  for 
the  space  revealed  to  us  by  our  senses  is  absolutely 
different  from  the  space  of  geometry.  Is  geometry 
derived  from  experience  ?  Careful  discussion  will 
give  the  answer — no  !  We  therefore  conclude  that 
the  principles  of  geometry  are  only  conventions ; 
but  these  conventions  are  not  arbitrary,  and  if 
transported  into  another  w;orld  (w7hich  I  shall 
call  the  non-Euclidean  world,  and  which  I  shall 


xxvi  AUTHOR'S  PREFACE. 

endeavour   to   describe),   we   shall    find   ourselves 
compelled  to  adopt  more  of  them. 

In  mechanics  we  shall  be  led  to  analogous  con 
clusions,  and  we  shall  see  that  the  principles  of 
this  science,  although  more  directly  based  on 
experience,  still  share  the  conventional  character 
of  the  geometrical  postulates.  So  far,  nominalism 
triumphs ;  but  we  now  come  to  the  physical 
sciences,  properly  so  called,  and  here  the  scene 
changes.  We  meet  with  hypotheses  of  another 
kind,  and  we  fully  grasp  ho\v  fruitful  they  are. 
No  doubt  at  the  outset  theories  seem  unsound, 
and  the  history  of  science  show's  us  how  ephemeral 
they  are ;  but  they  do  not  entirely  perish,  and  of 
each  of  them  some  traces  still  remain.  It  is  these 
traces  which  we  must  try  to  discover,  because  in 
them  and  in  them  alone  is  the  true  reality. 
»  '  The  method  of  the  physical  sciences  is  based 
\upon  the  induction  which  leads  us  to  expect  the 
recurrence  of  a  phenomenon  when  the  circum 
stances  which  give  rise  to  it  are  repeated.  If  all 
the  circumstances  could  be  simultaneously  re 
produced,  this  principle  could  be  fearlessly  applied ; 
but  this  never  happens;  some  of  the  circumstances 
will  always  be  missing.  Are  we  absolutely  certain 
that  they  are  unimportant  ?  Evidently  not !  It 
may  be  probable,  but  it  cannot  be  rigorously 


AUTHORS    PREFACE.  XXV11 

certain.  Hence  the  importance  of  the  role  that  is 
played  in  the  physical  sciences  by  the  law  of 
probability.  The  calculus  of  probabilities  is  there 
fore  not  merely  a  recreation,  or  a  guide  to  the 
baccarat  player;  and  we  must  thoroughly  examine 
the  principles  on  which  it  is  based.  In  this  con 
nection  I  have  but  very  incomplete  results  to  lay 
before  the  reader,  for  the  vague  instinct  wrhich 
enables  us  to  determine  probability  almost  defies 
analysis.  After  a  study  of  the  conditions  under 
which  the  work  of  the  physicist  is  carried  on,  I 
have  thought  it  best  to  show  him  at  work.  For 
this  purpose  I  have  taken  instances  from  the 
history  of  optics  and  of  electricity.  We  shall  thus 
see  how  the  ideas  of  Fresnel  and  Maxwell  took 
their  rise,  and  what  unconscious  hypotheses  were 
made  by  Ampere  and  the  other  founders  of 
electro-dynamics. 


SCIENCE  AND  HYPOTHESIS. 


PART  I. 

NUMBER  AND  MAGNITUDE, 
CHAPTER  I. 

ON  THE  NATURE  OF  MATHEMATICAL  REASONING, 
I. 

THE  very  possibility  of  mathematical  science  seems 
an  insoluble  contradiction.  If  this  science  is  only 
deductive  in  appearance,  from  whence  is  derived 
that  perfect  rigour  which  is  challenged  by  none? 
If,  on  the  contrary,  all  the  propositions  which  it 
enunciates  may  be  derived  in  order  by  the  rules 
of  formal  logic,  how  is  it  that  mathematics  is 
not  reduced  to  a  gigantic  tautology?  The  syllo 
gism  can  teach  us  nothing  essentially  new,  and 
if  everything  must  spring  from  the  principle  of 
identity,  then  everything  should  be  capable  of 
being  reduced  to  that  principle.  Are  we  then  to 
admit  that  the  enunciations  of  all  the  theorems 


2  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

with  which  so  many  volumes  are  filled,  are  only 
indirect  ways  of  saying  that  A  is  A  ? 

No  doubt  we  may  refer  back  to  axioms  which 
are  at  the  source  of  all  these  reasonings.  If  it  is 
felt  that  they  cannot  be  reduced  to  the  principle  of 
contradiction,  if  we  decline  to  see  in  them  any 
more  than  experimental  facts  which  have  no  part 
or  lot  in  mathematical  necessity,  there  is  still  one 
resource  left  to  us:  we  may  class  them  among 
a  priori  synthetic  views.  But  this  is  no  solution 
of  the  difficulty — it  is  merely  giving  it  a  name;  and 
even  if  the  nature  of  the  synthetic  views  had  no 
longer  for  us  any  mystery,  the  contradiction  would 
not  have  disappeared ;  it  would  have  only  been 
shirked.  Syllogistic  reasoning  remains  incapable 
of  adding  anything  to  the  data  that  are  given  it ; 
the  data  are  reduced  to  axioms,  and  that  is  all  we 
should  find  in  the  conclusions. 

No  theorem  can  be  new  unless  a  new  axiom 
intervenes  in  its  demonstration ;  reasoning  can 
only  give  us  immediately  evident  truths  borrowed 
from  direct  intuition;  it  would  only  be  an  inter 
mediary  parasite.  Should  we  not  therefore  have 
reason  for  asking  if  the  syllogistic  apparatus  serves 
only  to  disguise  what  we  have  borrowed  ? 

The  contradiction  will  strike  us  the  more  if  we 
open  any  book  on  mathematics;  on  every  page  the 
author  announces  his  intention  of  generalising  some 
proposition  already  known.  Does  the  mathematical 
method  proceed  from  the  particular  to  the  general, 
and,  if  so,  how  can  it  be  called  deductive  ? 


NATURE    OF    MATHEMATICAL    REASONING.          3 

Finally,  if  the  science  of  number  were  merely 
analytical,  or  could  be  analytically  derived  from  a  / 
few  synthetic  intuitions,  it  seems  that  a  sufficiently  / 
powerful  mind  could  with  a  single  glance  perceive 
all  its  truths ;  nay,  one  might  even  hope  that  some 
day  a  language  would  be  invented  simple  enough 
for  these  truths  to  be  made  evident  to  any  person 
of  ordinary  intelligence. 

Even  if  these  consequences  are  challenged,  it 
must  be  granted  that  mathematical  reasoning  has 
of  itself  a  kind  of  creative  virtue,  and  is  therefore  to 
be  distinguished  from  the  syllogism.  The  difference 
must  be  profound.  We  shall  not,  for  instance, 
find  the  key  to  the  mystery  in  the  frequent  use  of 
the  rule  by  which  the  same  uniform  operation 
applied  to  two  equal  numbers  will  give  identical 
results.  All  these  modes  of  reasoning,  whether  or 
not  reducible  to  the  syllogism,  properly  so  called, 
retain  the  analytical  character,  and  ipso  facto,  lose 
their  power. 

II. 

The  argument  is  an  old  one.  Let  us  see  how 
Leibnitz  tried  to  show  that  two  and  two  make 
four.  I  assume  the  number  one  to  be  defined,  and 
also  the  operation  A'+I — i.e.,  the  adding  of  unity 
to  a  given  number  x.  These  definitions,  whatever 
they  may  be,  do  not  enter  into  the  subsequent 
reasoning.  I  next  define  the  numbers  2,  3,  4  by 
the  equalities  :— 

(i)   1  +  1  =  2;   (2)  2  +  1  =  3;  (3)  a  +  1^4'  and  in 


4  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

the  same  way  I  define  the  operation  x  +  2  by  the 
relation;  (4)  ,t+2  =  (*+i)+ I. 
Given  this,  we  have  : — 

2+2  =  (2+i)  +  i;  (def.  4). 
(2+0  +  1=3+1  (def.  2). 

3  +  1=4  (def.  3). 

whence  2  +  2  =  4  Q.E.D. 

It  cannot  be  denied  that  this  reasoning  is  purely 
analytical.  But  if  we  ask  a  mathematician,  he  will 
reply:  "This  is  not  a  demonstration  properly  so 
called;  it  is  a  verification."  We  have  confined 
ourselves  to  bringing  together  one  or  other  of  two 
purely  conventional  definitions,  and  we  have  verified 
their  identity ;  nothing  new  has  been  learned. 
\Verification  differs  from  proof  precisely  because  it 
Is  analytical,  and  because  it  leads  to  nothing.  It 
leads  to  nothing  because  the  conclusion  is  nothing 
but  the  premisses  translated  into  another  language. 
A  real  proof,  on  the  other  hand,  is  fruitful,  because 
the  conclusion  is  in  a  sense  more  general  than  the 
premisses.  The  equality  2  +  2  =  4  can  be  verified 
because  it  is  particular.  Each  individual  enuncia 
tion  in  mathematics  may  be  always  verified  in 
the  same  way.  But  if  mathematics  could  be 
reduced  to  a  series  of  such  verifications  it 
would  not  be  a  science.  A  chess-player,  for 
instance,  does  not  create  a  science  by  winning  a 
piece.  There  is  no  science  but  the  science  of  the 
general.  It  may  even  be  said  that  the  object  of 
the  exact  sciences  is  to  dispense  with  these  direct 
verifications. 


NATURE    OF    MATHEMATICAL    REASONING.  5 

III. 

Let  us  now  see  the  geometer  at  work,  and  try 
to  surprise  some  of  his  methods.  The  task  is 
not  without  difficulty;  it  is  not  enough  to  open  a 
book  at  random  and  to  analyse  any  proof  we  may 
come  across.  First  of  all,  geometry  must  be  ex 
cluded,  or  the  question  becomes  complicated  by 
difficult  problems  relating  to  the  role  of  the 
postulates,  the  nature  and  the  origin  of  the  idea 
of  space.  For  analogous  reasons  we  cannot 
avail  ourselves  of  the  infinitesimal  calculus.  We 
must  seek  mathematical  thought  where  it  has 
remained  pure — i.e.,  in  Arithmetic.  But  we 
still  have  to  choose ;  in  the  higher  parts  of 
the  theory  of  numbers  the  primitive  mathemati 
cal  ideas  have  already  undergone  so  profound 
an  elaboration  that  it  becomes  difficult  to  analyse 
them. 

It  is  therefore  at  the  beginning  of  Arithmetic 
that  we  must  expect  to  find  the  explanation  we 
seek ;  but  it  happens  that  it  is  precisely  in  the 
proofs  of  the  most  elementary  theorems  that  the 
authors  of  classic  treatises  have  displayed  the  least 
precision  and  rigour.  We  may  not  impute  this  to 
them  as  a  crime ;  they  have  obeyed  a  necessity. 
Beginners  are  not  prepared  for  real  mathematical 
rigour  ;  they  would  see  in  it  nothing  but  empty, 
tedious  subtleties.  It  would  be  waste  of  time  to 
try  to  make  them  more  exacting ;  they  have  to 
pass  rapidly  and  without  stopping  over  the  road 


6  SCIENCE   AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

which  was  trodden  slowly  by  the  founders  of  the 
science. 

Why  is  so  long  a  preparation  necessary  to 
habituate  oneself  to  this  perfect  rigour,  which 
it  would  seem  should  naturally  be  imposed  on 
all  minds  ?  This  is  a  logical  and  psychological 
problem  which  is  well  worthy  of  study.  But  we 
shall  not  dwell  on  it ;  it  is  foreign  to  our  subject. 
All  I  wish  to  insist  on  is,  that  we  shall  fail  in  our 
purpose  unless  we  reconstruct  the  proofs  of  the 
elementary  theorems,  and  give  them,  not  the  rough 
form  in  which  they  are  left  so  as  not  to  weary  the 
beginner,  but  the  form  which  will  satisfy  the  skilled 
geometer. 

DEFINITION    OF    ADDITION. 

I  assume  that  the  operation  x+i  has  been 
denned;  it  consists  in  adding  the  number  I  to  a 
given  number  x.  Whatever  may  be  said  of  this 
definition,  it  does  not  enter  into  the  subsequent 
reasoning. 

We  now  have  to  define  the  operation  x  +  a,  which 
consists  in  adding  the  number  a  to  any  given 
number  x.  Suppose  that  we  have  defined  the 
operation  x+(a-i);  the  operation  x  +  a  will  be 
defined  by  the  equality  :  (i)  x  +  a  =  [x  +  (a  -  i)]  +  i. 
We  shall  know  what  x  +  a  is  when  we  know  what 
x+(a-i)  is,  and  as  I  have  assumed  that  to  start 
with  we  know  what  x+i  is,  we  can  define 
successively  and  "  by  recurrence  "  the  operations 
x  +  2,  x  +  3,  etc.  This  definition  deserves  a  moment's 


NATURE   OF   MATHEMATICAL   REASONING.          7 

it  is  of  a  particular  nature  which 
distinguishes  it  even  at  this  stage  from  the  purely 
logical  definition;  the  equality  (i),  in  fact,  contains 
an  infinite  number  of  distinct  definitions,  each 
having  only  one  meaning  when  we  know  the 
meaning  of  its  predecessor. 

PROPERTIES    OF    ADDITION. 

Associative. — I  say  that  a-\-(b-\-c)  =  (a-\-b)-\-c;  in 
fact,  the  theorem  is  true  for  c  =  i.  It  may  then  be 
written  a-\-(b-\-i)  =  (a-{-b}-\-i;  which,  remembering 
the  difference  of  notation,  is  nothing  but  the  equality 
(i)  by  which  I  have  just  defined  addition.  Assume 
the  theorem  true  for  c=y,  I  say  that  it  will  be  true  for 
c  =  y+i.  Let  (a+b)+y=a+(b+y),  it  follows  that 
i=[>+(&  +  y)]+i;  or  by  def.  (i)- 
(y  +  I)=a+(b  +  y  +  i)=a  +  [b+  (y  +  i)J , 
which  shows  by  a  series  of  purely  analytical  deduc 
tions  that  the  theorem  is  true  for  y  +  i.  Being 
true  for  c  =  i,  we  see  that  it  is  successively  true  for 
c  =  2,  c  =  3,  etc. 

Commutative. — (i)  I  say  that  a  +  i  =  i  +  a.  The 
theorem  is  evidently  true  for  a  =  i ;  we  can  verify 
by  purely  analytical  reasoning  that  if  it  is  true  for 
a --=  y  it  will  be  true  for  a  =  y  +  i.1  Now,  it  is  true  for 
a=i,  and  therefore  is  true  for  a  — 2,  a  =  3,  and  so 
on.  This  is  what  is  meant  by  saying  that  the 
proof  is  demonstrated  "  by  recurrence." 

(2)  I  say  that  a  +  b^b  +  a.    The  theorem  has  just 

1  For  (7+  i)  | -  i-(i  +7)+  i  =  i  -I- (7-1- 1}.— [TR.] 


8  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

been  shown  to  hold  good  for  b=i,  and  it  may  be 
verified  analytically  that  if  it  is  true  for  b=ft}  it 
will  be  true  for  b=fi+i.  The  proposition  is  thus 
established  by  recurrence. 

DEFINITION    OF    MULTIPLICATION. 

We  shall  define  multiplication  by  the  equalities: 
(i)  aXi=a.  (2)  axb=[ax(b-i)]+a.  Both  of 
these  include  an  infinite  number  of  definitions; 
having  defined  aXi,  it  enables  us  to  define  in 
succession  aX2,  aX3,  and  so  on. 

PROPERTIES    OF    MULTIPLICATION. 

Distributive.  —  I  say  that  (a-\-b)Xc  =  (aXc)  + 
(bXc).  We  can  verify  analytically  that  the  theorem 
is  true  for  c  =  i;  then  if  it  is  true  for  c  =  y,  it  will  be 
true  for  c  =  y-\-i.  The  proposition  is  then  proved 
by  recurrence. 

Commutative. — (i)  I  say  that  aXi  =  iXa.  The 
theorem  is  obvious  for  a  =  i.  We  can  verify 
analytically  that  if  it  is  true  for  a  —  a,  it  will  be 
true  for  <?  — «-|- 1. 

(2)  I  say  that  aXb  =  bXa.  The  theorem  has 
just  been  proved  for  b=i.  We  can  verify  analy 
tically  that  if  it  be  true  for  &=/?  it  will  be  true  for 
b=P+l. 

IV. 

This  monotonous  series  of  reasonings  may  now 
be  laid  aside;  but  their  very  monotony  brings 
vividly  to  light  the  process,  which  is  uniform, 


NATURE    OF   MATHEMATICAL    REASONING.          Q 

and   is  met  again  at  every  step.     The  process  is 
proof    by    recurrence.     We     first    show    that    a 
theorem  is   true   for  ;z  =  i;   we  then  show  that  if 
it  is  true  for  n—  I  it  is  true  for  n,  and  we  conclude 
that  it  is  true  for  all  integers.     We  have  no\v  seen 
how  it  may  be  used  for  the  proof  of  the  rules  of 
addition  and  multiplication — that  is  to  say,  for  the 
rules  of  the   algebraical  calculus.     This   calculus 
is  an  instrument  of  transformation    which    lends 
itself  to  many  more  different   combinations  than 
the  simple  syllogism ;  but  it  is  still  a  purely  analy 
tical  instrument,  and  is  incapable  of  teaching  us 
anything  new.     If  mathematics  had  no  other  in 
strument,  it  would  immediately  be  arrested  in  its 
development;    but    it  has    recourse    anew    to    the 
same  process — i.e.,  to  reasoning  by  recurrence,  and 
it  can  continue  its  forward   march.     Then   if  we 
look  carefully,  \ve  find  this  mode  of  reasoning  at 
every  step,  either  under  the  simple  form  which  we 
have  just  given  to  it,  or  under  a  more  or  less  modi 
fied  form.     It  is  therefore  mathematical  reasoning 
par  excellence,  and  we  must  examine  it  closer. 

V. 

The  essential  characteristic  of  reasoning  by  re 
currence  is  that  it  contains,  condensed,  so  to 
speak,  in  a  single  formula,  an  infinite  number  of 
syllogisms.  We  shall  see  this  more  clearly  if  we 
enunciate  the  syllogisms  one  after  another.  They 
follow  one  another,  if  one  may  use  the  expression, 
in  a  cascade.  The  following  are  the  hypothetical 


10  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

syllogisms: — The  theorem  is  true  of  the  number  I. 
Now,  if  it  is  true  of  i,  it  is  true  of  2;  therefore  it  is 
true  of  2.  Now,  if  it  is  true  of  2,  it  is  true  of  3; 
hence  it  is  true  of  3,  and  so  on.  We  see  that  the 
conclusion  of  each  syllogism  serves  as  the  minor 
of  its  successor.  Further,  the  majors  of  all  our 
syllogisms  may  be  reduced  to  a  single  form.  If 
the  theorem  is  true  of  n  -  i,  it  is  true  of  n. 

We  see,  then,  that  in  reasoning  by  recurrence 
we  confine  ourselves  to  the  enunciation  of  the 
minor  of  the  first  syllogism,  and  the  general 
formula  which  contains  as  particular  cases  all  the 
majors.  This  unending  series  of  syllogisms  is  thus 
reduced  to  a  phrase  of  a  few  lines. 

It  is  now  easy  to  understand  why  every  par 
ticular  consequence  of  a  theorem  may,  as  I  have 
above  explained,  be  verified  by  purely  analytical 
processes.  If,  instead  of  proving  that  our  theorem 
is  true  for  all  numbers,  we  only  wish  to  show  that 
it  is  true  for  the  number  6  for  instance,  it  will  be 
enough  to  establish  the  first  five  syllogisms  in  our 
cascade.  We  shall  require  9  if  we  wish  to  prove 
it  for  the  number  10;  for  a  greater  number  we 
shall  require  more  still;  but  however  great  the 
number  may  be  we  shall  always  reach  it,  and  the 
analytical  verification  will  always  be  possible. 
But  however  far  we  went  we  should  never  reach 
the  general  theorem  applicable  to  all  numbers, 
which  alone  is  the  object  of  science.  To  reach 
it  we  should  require  an  infinite  number  of  syllo 
gisms,  and  we  should  have  to  cross  an  abyss 


NATURE    OF   MATHEMATICAL    REASONING.       II 

which  the  patience  of  the  analyst,  restricted  to  the 
resources  of  formal  logic,  will  never  succeed  in 
crossing. 

I  asked  at  the  outset  why  we  cannot  conceive  of 
a  mind  powerful  enough  to  see  at  a  glance  the 
whole  body  of  mathematical  truth.  The  answer  is 
now  easy.  A  chess-player  can  combine  for  four  or 
five  moves  ahead;  but,  however  extraordinary  a 
player  he  may  be,  he  cannot  prepare  for  more  than 
a  finite  number  of  moves.  If  he  applies  his  facul 
ties  to  Arithmetic,  he  cannot  conceive  its  general 
truths  by  direct  intuition  alone;  to  prove  even  the 
smallest  theorem  he  must  use  reasoning  by  re 
currence,  for  that  is  the  only  instrument  which 
enables  us  to  pass  from  the  finite  to  the  infinite. 
This  instrument  is  always  useful,  for  it  enables  us 
to  leap  over  as  many  stages  as  we  wish;  it  frees 
us  from  the  necessity  of  long,  tedious,  and 
monotonous  verifications  which  would  rapidly 
become  impracticable.  Then  when  we  take  in 
hand  the  general  theorem  it  becomes  indispens 
able,  for  otherwise  we  should  ever  be  approaching 
the  analytical  verification  without  ever  actually 
reaching  it.  In  this  domain  of  Arithmetic  we  may 
think  ourselves  very  far  from  the  infinitesimal 
analysis,  but  the  idea  of  mathematical  infinity  is 
already  playing  a  preponderating  part,  and  without 
it  there  would  be  no  science  at  all,  because  there 
would  be  nothing  general. 


12  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

VI. 

The  views  upon  which  reasoning  by  recurrence 
is  based  may  be  exhibited  in  other  forms;  we  may 
say,  for  instance,  that  in  any  finite  collection  of 
different    integers   there    is   always   one  which   is 
smaller  than  any  other.    We  may  readily  pass  from 
one    enunciation    to    another,  and  thus  give   our 
selves  the  illusion  of  having  proved  that  reason 
ing    by   recurrence   is    legitimate.     But    we    shall 
always  be  brought  to  a  full  stop — we  shall  always 
come  to  an  indemonstrable  axiom,  which  will  at 
bottom  be  but  the   proposition  we  had  to  prove 
translated  into  another  language.    We  cannot  there- 
(fore  escape  the  conclusion  that  the  rule  of  reason 
ing  by  recurrence  is  irreducible  to  the  principle  of 
contradiction.     Nor  can  the  rule  come  to  us  from 
i  experiment.     Experiment  may  teach   us  that  the 
I  rule  is  true  for  the  first  ten  or  the  first  hundred 
,    numbers,  for  instance;   it  will  not  bring  us  to  the 
indefinite  series  of  numbers,  but  only  to  a  more  or 
less  long,  but'always  limited,  portion  of  the  series. 
Now,  if  that  were  all  that  is  in   question,  the 
principle  of  contradiction   would  be  sufficient,   it 
would   always    enable    us    to    develop   as    many 
syllogisms  as  we  wished.     It  is  only  when  it  is  a 
question  of  a  single  formula  to  embrace  an  infinite 
number  of  syllogisms   that    this  principle   breaks 
down,  and  there,  too,  experiment  is  powerless  to 
rLfaid.      This  rule,  inaccessible  to  analytical   proof 
and  to  experiment,  is  the  exact  type  of  the  a  priori 


NATURE    OF    MATHEMATICAL    REASONING.       13 

synthetic  intuition.  On  the  other  hand,  we 
cannot  see  in  it  a  convention  as  in  the  case  of  the 
postulates  of  geometry. 

Why  then  is  this  view  imposed  upon  us  with 
such  an  irresistible  weight  of  evidence  ?  It  is 
because  it  is  only  the  affirmation  of  the  power  of 
the  mind  which  knows  it  can  conceive  of  the 
indefinite  repetition  of  the  same  act,  when  the  act 
is  once  possible.  The  mind  has  a  direct  intuition 
of  this  power,  and  experiment  can  only  be  for  it  an 
opportunity  of  using  it,  and  thereby  of  becoming 
conscious  of  it. 

But  it  will  be  said,  if  the  legitimacy  of  reasoning 
by  recurrence  cannot  be  established  by  experiment 
alone,  is  it  so  with  experiment  aided  by  induction  ? 
We  see  successively  that  a  theorem  is  true  of  the 
number  I,  of  the  number  2,  of  the  number  3,  and 
so  on — the  law  is  manifest,  we  say,  and  it  is  so  on 
the  same  ground  that  every  physical  law  is  true 
which  is  based  on  a  very  large  but  limited  number 
of  observations. 

It  cannot  escape  our  notice  that  here  is  a 
striking  analogy  with  the  usual  processes  of 
induction.  But  an  essential  difference  exists. 
Induction  applied  to  the  physical  sciences  is 
always  uncertain,  because  it  is  based  on  the  be 
lief  in  a  general  order  of  the  universe,  an  order 
which  is  external  to  us.  Mathematical  induction 
— i.e.,  proof  by  recurrence — is,  on  the  contrary, 
necessarily  imposed  on  us,  because  it  is  only  the 
affirmation  of  a  property  of  the  mind  itself. 


14  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

VII. 

Mathematicians,  as  I  have  said  before,  always 
endeavour  to  generalise  the  propositions  they  have 
obtained.  To  seek  no  further  example,  we  have 
just  shown  the  equality,  a+i  =  i  +  a,  and  we  then 
used  it  to  establish  the  equality,  a  +  b^b  +  a,  which 
is  obviously  more  general.  Mathematics  may, 
therefore,  like  the  other  sciences,  proceed  from  the 
particular  to  the  general.  This  is  a  fact  which 
might  otherwise  have  appeared  incomprehensible 
to  us  at  the  beginning  of  this  study,  but  wrhich  has 
no  longer  anything  mysterious  about  it,  since  we 
have  ascertained  the  analogies  between  proof  by 
recurrence  and  ordinary  induction. 

No  doubt  mathematical  recurrent  reasoning  and 
physical  inductive  reasoning  are  based  on  different 
foundations,  but  they  move  in  parallel  lines  and  in 
the  same  direction — namely,  from  the  particular 
to  the  general. 

Let  us  examine  the  case  a  little  more  closely. 

To  prove  the  equality  a  +  2  =  2  +  a (i),  we  need 

only  apply  the  rule  a  +  i  =-- 1  +  a,  twice,  and  write 
a  +  2  =  a+  I  +  1  =  1  +  0  +  1  =  1  +  i  +  a  =  2  +  a (2). 

The  equality  thus  deduced  by  purely  analytical 
means  is  not,  however,  a  simple  particular  case.  It 
is  something  quite  different.  We  may  not  therefore 
even  say  in  the  really  analytical  and  deductive 
part  of  mathematical  reasoning  that  we  proceed 
from  the  general  to  the  particular  in  the 
ordinary  sense  of  the  words.  The  two  sides  of 


NATURE    OF    MATHEMATICAL    REASONING.       15 

the  equality  (2)  are  merely  more  complicated 
combinations  than  the  two  sides  of  the  equality 
(i),  and  analysis  only  serves  to  separate  the  ele 
ments  which  enter  into  these  combinations  and  to 
study  their  relations. 

Mathematicians  therefore  proceed  "by  construc 
tion,"  they  "  construct "  more  complicated  combina 
tions.  When  they  analyse  these  combinations, 
these  aggregates,  so  to  speak,  into  their  primitive 
elements,  they  see  the  relations  of  the  elements 
and  deduce  the  relations  of  the  aggregates  them 
selves.  The  process  is  purely  analytical,  but  it  is 
not  a  passing  from  the  general  to  the  particular, 
for  the  aggregates  obviously  cannot  be  regarded  as 
more  particular  than  their  elements. 

Great  importance  has  been  rightly  attached  to 
this  process  of  "  construction,"  and  some  claim 
to  see  in  it  the  necessary  and  sufficient  condi 
tion  of  the  progress  of  the  exact  sciences. 
Necessary,  no  doubt,  but  not  sufficient !  For  a 
construction  to  be  useful  and  not  mere  waste  of 
mental  effort,  for  it  to  serve  as  a  stepping-stone  to 
higher  things,  it  must  first  of  all  possess  a  kind  of 
unity  enabling  us  to  see  something  more  than  the 
juxtaposition  of  its  elements.  Or  more  accurately, 
there  must  be  some  advantage  in  considering  the 
construction  rather  than  the  elements  themselves. 
What  can  this  advantage  be  ?  Why  reason  on  a 
polygon,  for  instance,  which  is  always  decom 
posable  into  triangles,  and  not  on  elementary 
triangles  ?  It  is  because  there  are  properties  of 


l6  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

pol}7gons  of  any  number  of  sides,  and  they  can  be 
immediately  applied  to  any  particular  kind  of 
polygon.  In  most  cases  it  is  only  after  long  efforts 
that  those  properties  can  be  discovered,  by  directly 
studying  the  relations  of  elementary  triangles.  If 
the  quadrilateral  is  anything  more  than  the  juxta 
position  of  two  triangles,  it  is  because  it  is  of  the 
polygon  type. 

A  construction  only  becomes  interesting  when 
it  can  be  placed  side  by  side  with  other  analogous 
constructions  for  forming  species  of  the  same 
genus.  To  do  this  we  must  necessarily  go  back 
from  the  particular  to  the  general,  ascending  one 
or  more  steps.  The  analytical  process  "  by 
construction"  does  not  compel  us  to  descend,  but 
it  leaves  us  at  the  same  level.  We  can  only 
ascend  by  mathematical  induction,  for  from  it 
alone  can  we  learn  something  new.  Without  the 
aid  of  this  induction,  which  in  certain  respects 
differs  from,  but  is  as  fruitful  as,  physical  in 
duction,  construction  would  be  powerless  to  create 
science. 

Let  me  observe,  in  conclusion,  that  this  in 
duction  is  only  possible  if  the  same  operation  can 
be  repeated  indefinitely.  That  is  why  the  theory 
of  chess  can  never  become  a  science,  for  the 
different  moves  of  the  same  piece  are  limited  and 
do  not  resemble  each  other. 


CHAPTER    II. 

MATHEMATICAL    MAGNITUDE    AND    EXPERIMENT. 

IF  we  want  to  know  what  the  mathematicians 
mean  by  a  continuum,  it  is  useless  to  appeal  to 
geometry.  The  geometer  is  always  seeking,  more 
or  less,  to  represent  to  himself  the  figures  he  is 
studying,  but  his  representations  are  only  instru 
ments  to  him  ;  he  uses  space  in  his  geometry  just 
as  he  uses  chalk ;  and  further,  too  much  import 
ance  must  not  be  attached  to  accidents  which  are 
often  nothing  more  than  the  whiteness  of  the 
chalk. 

The  pure  analyst  has  not  to  dread  this  pitfall. 
He  has  disengaged  mathematics  from  all  extra 
neous  elements,  and  he  is  in  a  position  to  answer 
our  question : — "  Tell  me  exactly  what  this  con 
tinuum  is,  about  which  mathematicians  reason." 
Many  analysts  who  reflect  on  their  art  have 
already  done  so — -M.  Tannery,  for  instance,  in 
his  Introduction  a  la  theorie  des  Fonctiom  d'une 
variable. 

Let  us  start  with  the  integers.  Between  any 
two  consecutive  sets,  intercalate  one  or  more  inter 
mediary  sets,  and  then  between  these  sets  others 


l8  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

again,  and  so  on  indefinitely.  We  thus  get  an 
unlimited  number  of  terms,  and  these  will  be  the 
numbers  which  we  call  fractional,  rational,  or 
commensurable.  But  this  is  not  yet  all ;  between 
these  terms,  which,  be  it  marked,  are  already 
infinite  in  number,  other  terms  are  intercalated, 
and  these  are  called  irrational  or  incommensurable. 

Before  going  any  further,  let  me  make  a  pre 
liminary  remark.  The  continuum  thus  conceived 
is  no  longer  a  collection  of  individuals  arranged  in 
a  certain  order,  infinite  in  number,  it  is  true,  but 
external  the  one  to  the  other.  This  is  not  the 
ordinary  conception  in  which  it  is  supposed  that 
between  the  elements  of  the  continuum  exists  an 
intimate  connection  making  of  it  one  whole,  in 
which  the  point  has  no  existence  previous  to  the 
line,  but  the  line  does  exist  previous  to  the  point. 
Multiplicity  alone  subsists,  unity  has  disappeared 
—"the  continuum  is  unity  in  multiplicity/'  accord 
ing  to  the  celebrated  formula.  The  analysts  have 
even  less  reason  to  define  their  continuum  as  they 
do,  since  it  is  always  on  this  that  they  reason  wrhen 
they  are  particularly  proud  of  their  rigour.  It 
is  enough  to  warn  the  reader  that  the  real 
mathematical  continuum  is  quite  different  from 
that  of  the  physicists  and  from  that  of  the 
metaphysicians. 

It  may  also  be  said,  perhaps,  that  mathematicians 
who  are  contented  with  this  definition  are  the 
dupes  of  words,  that  the  nature  of  each  of  these 
sets  should  be  precisely  indicated,  that  it  should 


MATHEMATICAL    MAGNITUDE.  IQ 

be  explained  how  they  are  to  be  intercalated,  and 
that  it  should  be  shown  how  it  is  possible  to  do  it. 
This,  however,  would  be  wrong;  the  only  property 
of  the  sets  which  comes  into  the  reasoning  is  that  of 
preceding  or  succeeding  these  or  those  other  sets; 
this  alone  should  therefore  intervene  in  the  defini 
tion.  So  we  need  not  concern  ourselves  with  the 
manner  in  which  the  sets  are  intercalated,  and 
no  one  will  doubt  the  possibility  of  the  operation 
if  he  only  remembers  that  "  possible "  in  the 
language  of  geometers  simply  means  exempt  from 
contradiction.  But  our  definition  is  not  yet  com 
plete,  and  we  come  back  to  it  after  this  rather  long 
digression. 

Definition  of  Incommensurable^. — The  mathe 
maticians  of  the  Berlin  school,  and  Kronecker 
in  particular,  have  devoted  themselves  to  con 
structing  this  continuous  scale  of  irrational  and 
fractional  numbers  without  using  any  other 
materials  than  the  integer.  The  mathematical 
continuum  from  this  point  of  view  would  be  a 
pure  creation  of  the  mind  in  .which  experiment 
would  have  no  part. 

The  idea  of  rational  number  not  seeming  to 
present  to  them  any  difficulty,  they  have  confined 
their  attention  mainly  to  defining  incommensurable 
numbers.  But  before  reproducing  their  definition 
here,  I  must  make  an  observation  that  will  allay 
the  astonishment  which  this  will  not  fail  to  provoke 
in  readers  who  are  but  little  familiar  with  the 
habits  of  geometers. 


2O  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

Mathematicians  do  not  study  objects,  but  the 
relations  between  objects;  to  them  it  is  a  matter 
of  indifference  if  these  objects  are  replaced  by 
others,  provided  that  the  relations  do  not  change. 
Matter  does  not  engage  their  attention,  they  are 
interested  by  form  alone. 

If  we  did  not  remember  it,  we  could  hardly 
understand  that  Kronecker  gives  the  name  of 
incommensurable  number  to  a  simple  symbol — 
that  is  to  say,  something  very  different  from  the 
idea  we  think  we  ought  to  have  of  a  quantity 
which  should  be  measurable  and  almost  tangible. 

Let  us  see  no\v  what  is  Kronecker's  definition. 
Commensurable  numbers  may  be  divided  into 
classes  in  an  infinite  number  of  ways,  subject 
to  the  condition  that  any  number  whatever 
of  the  first  class  is  greater  than  any  number 
of  the  second.  It  may  happen  that  among  the 
numbers  of  the  first  class  there  is  one  which  is 
smaller  than  all  the  rest ;  if,  for  instance,  we 
arrange  in  the  first  class  all  the  numbers  greater 
than  2,  and  2  itself,  and  in  the  second  class  all  the 
numbers  smaller  than  2,  it  is  clear  that  2  will  be 
the  smallest  of  all  the  numbers  of  the  first  class. 
The  number  2  may  therefore  be  chosen  as  the 
symbol  of  this  division. 

It  may  happen,  on  the  contrary,  that  in  the 
second  class  there  is  one  which  is  greater  than  all 
the  rest.  This  is  what  takes  place,  for  example, 
if  the  first  class  comprises  all  the  numbers  greater 
than  2,  and  if,  in  the  second,  are  all  the  numbers 


MATHEMATICAL    MAGNITUDE.  21 

less  than  2,  and  2  itself.  Here  again  the 
number  2  might  be  chosen  as  the  symbol  of  this 
division. 

But  it  may  equally  well  happen  that  we  can  find 
neither  in  the  first  class  a  number  smaller  than  all 
the  rest,  nor  in  the  second  class  a  number  greater 
than  all  the  rest.  Suppose,  for  instance,  we 
place  in  the  first  class  all  the  numbers  whose 
squares  are  greater  than  2,  and  in  the  second  all 
the  numbers  whose  squares  are  smaller  than  2. 
We  know  that  in  neither  of  them  is  a  number  whose 
square  is  equal  to  2.  Evidently  there  will  be  in 
the  first  class  no  number  which  is  smaller  than  all 
the  rest,  for  however  near  the  square  of  a  number 
may  be  to  2,  we  can  always  find  a  commensur 
able  whose  square  is  still  nearer  to  2.  From 
Kronecker's  point  of  view,  the  incommensurable 
number  v/2  is  nothing  but  the  symbol  of  this 
particular  method  of  division  of  commensurable 
numbers ;  and  to  each  mode  of  repartition  corre 
sponds  in  this  way  a  number,  commensurable  or 
not,  which  serves  as  a  symbol.  But  to  be  satisfied 
with  this  would  be  to  forget  the  origin  of  these 
symbols;  it  remains  to  explain  how  we  have  been 
led  to  attribute  to  them  a  kind  of  concrete 
existence,  and  on  the  other  hand,  does  not  the 
difficulty  begin  with  fractions  ?  Should  we  have 
the  notion  of  these  numbers  if  we  did  not  previously 
know  a  matter  which  we  conceive  as  infinitely 
divisible — i.e.,  as  a  continuum  ? 

The  Physical  Continuum. — We  are  next  led  to  ask 


22  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

if  the  idea  of  the  mathematical  continuum  is  not 
simply  drawn  from  experiment.  If  that  be  so,  the 
rough  data  of  experiment,  which  are  our  sensations, 
could  be  measured.  We  might,  indeed,  be  tempted 
to  believe  that  this  is  so,  for  in  recent  times  there 
has  been  an  attempt  to  measure  them,  and  a  law 
has  even  been  formulated,  known  as  Fechner's 
law,  according  to  which  sensation  is  proportional 
to  the  logarithm  of  the  stimulus.  But  if  we 
examine  the  experiments  by  which  the  endeavour 
has  been  made  to  establish  this  law,  we  shall  be 
led  to  a  diametrically  opposite  conclusion.  It  has, 
for  instance,  been  observed  that  a  weight  A  of  10 
grammes  and  a  weight  B  of  n  grammes  produced 
identical  sensations,  that  the  weight  B  could  no 
longer  be  distinguished  from  a  weight  C  of  12 
grammes,  but  that  the  weight  A  was  readily 
distinguished  from  the  weight  C.  Thus  the  rough 
results  of  the  experiments  may  be  expressed '  by 
the  following  relations:  A  =  B,  B  — C,  A  <  C,  which 
may  be  regarded  as  the  formula  of  the  physical 
continuum.  But  here  is  an  intolerable  disagree 
ment  with  the  law  of  contradiction,  and  the 
necessity  of  banishing  this  disagreement  has  com 
pelled  us  to  invent  the  mathematical  continuum. 
We  are  therefore  forced  to  conclude  that  this 
notion  has  been  created  entirely  by  the  mind,  but 
it  is  experiment  that  has  provided  the  opportunity. 
We  cannot  believe  that  two  quantities  which  are 
equal  to  a  third  are  not  equal  to  one  another,  and 
we  are  thus  led  to  suppose  that  A  is  different  from 


MATHEMATICAL    MAGNITUDE.  23 

B,  and  B  from  C,  and  that  if  we  have  not  been 
aware  of  this,  it  is  due  to  the  imperfections  of  our 
senses. 

The  Creation  of  the  Mathematical  Continuum:  First 
Stage. — So  far  it  would  suffice,  in  order  to  account 
for  facts,  to  intercalate  between  A  and  B  a  small 
number  of  terms  which  would  remain  discrete. 
What  happens  now  if  we  have  recourse  to  some 
instrument  to  make  up  for  the  weakness  of  our 
senses  ?  If,  for  example,  we  use  a  microscope  ? 
Such  terms  as  A  and  B,  which  before  were 
indistinguishable  from  one  another,  appear  now 
to  be  distinct :  but  between  A  and  B,  which  are 
distinct,  is  intercalated  another  new  term  D, 
which  we  can  distinguish  neither  from  A  nor  from 
B.  Although  we  may  use  the  most  delicate 
methods,  the  rough  results  of  our  experiments 
will  always  present  the  characters  of  the  physical 
continuum  with  the  contradiction  which  is  inherent 
in  it.  We  only  escape  from  it  by  incessantly 
intercalating  newT  terms  between  the  terms  already 
distinguished,  and  this  operation  must  be  pursued 
indefinitely.  We  might  conceive  that  it  would  be 
possible  to  stop  if  we  could  imagine  an  instrument 
powerful  enough  to  decompose  the  physical  con 
tinuum  into  discrete  elements,  just  as  the  telescope 
resolves  the  Milky  Way  into  stars.  But  this  we 
cannot  imagine ;  it  is  always  with  our  senses  that 
we  use  our  instruments ;  it  is  with  the  eye  that  we 
observe  the  image  magnified  by  the  microscope, 
and  this  image  must  therefore  always  retain  the 


24  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

characters  of  visual  sensation,  and  therefore  those 
of  the  physical  continuum. 

Nothing  distinguishes  a  length  directly  observed 
from  half  that  length  doubled  by  the  microscope. 
The  whole  is  homogeneous  to  the  part ;  and  there 
is  a  fresh  contradiction — or  rather  there  would  be 
one  if  the  number  of  the  terms  were  supposed 
to  be  finite ;  it  is  clear  that  the  part  containing 
less  terms  than  the  whole  cannot  be  similar  to  the 
whole.  The  contradiction  ceases  as  soon  as  the 
number  of  terms  is  regarded  as  infinite.  There  is 
nothing,  for  example,  to  prevent  us  from  regarding 
the  aggregate  of  integers  as  similar  to  the  aggregate 
of  even  numbers,  which  is  however  only  a  part 
of  it;  in  fact,  to  each  integer  corresponds  another 
even  number  which  is  its  double.  But  it  is  not 
only  to  escape  this  contradiction  contained  in  the 
empiric  data  that  the  mind  is  led  to  create  the 
concept  of  a  continuum  formed  of  an  indefinite 
number  of  terms. 

Here  everything  takes  place  just  as  in  the  series 
of  the  integers.  We  have  the  faculty  of  conceiving 
that  a  unit  may  be  added  to  a  collection  of  units. 
Thanks  to  experiment,  we  have  had  the  opportunity 
of  exercising  this  faculty  and  are  conscious  of 
it ;  but  from  this  fact  we  feel  that  our  power  is 
unlimited,  and  that  we  can  count  indefinitely, 
although  we  have  never  had  to  count  more  than 
a  finite  number  of  objects.  In  the  same  way,  as 
soon  as  we  have  intercalated  terms  between  two 
consecutive  terms  of  a  series,  we  feel  that  this 


MATHEMATICAL    MAGNITUDE.  25 

operation  may  be  continued  without  limit,  and 
that,  so  to  speak,  there  is  no  intrinsic  reason  for 
stopping.  As  an  abbreviation,  I  may  give  the 
name  of  a  mathematical  continuum  of  the  first 
order  to  every  aggregate  of  terms  formed  after  the 
same  law  as  the  scale  of  commensurable  numbers. 
If.  then,  we  intercalate  new  sets  according  to  tru: 
laws  of  incommensurable  numbers,  we  obtain 
what  may  be  called  a  continuum  of  the  second 
order. 

Second  Stage. — We  have  only  taken  our  first 
step.  We  have  explained  the  origin  of  con 
tinuums  of  the  first  order ;  we  must  now  see  why 
this  is  not  sufficient,  and  why  the  incommensurable 
numbers  had  to  be  invented. 

If  we  try  to  imagine  a  line,  it  must  have  the 
characters  of  the  physical  continuum — that  is  to 
say,  our  representation  must  have  a  certain 
breadth.  Two  lines  will  therefore  appear  to  us 
under  the  form  of  two  narrow  bands,  and  if  we 
are  content  with  this  rough  image,  it  is  clear 
that  where  two  lines  cross  they  must  have  so  mo 
common  part.  But  the  pure  geometer  makes  one 
further  effort ;  without  entirely  renouncing  the 
aid  of  his  senses,  he  tries  to  imagine  a  line  without 
breadth  and  a  point  without  size.  This  he  can 
do  only  by  imagining  a  line  as  the  limit  towards 
which  tends  a  band  that  is  growing  thinner  and 
thinner,  and  the  point  as  the  limit  towards  which 
is  tending  an  area  that  is  growing  smaller  and 
smaller.  Our  two  bands,  however  narrow  they 


26  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

may  be,  will  always  have  a  common  area ;  the 
smaller  they  are  the  smaller  it  will  be,  and  its 
limit  is  what  the  geometer  calls  a  point.  This  is 
why  it  is  said  that  the  two  lines  which  cross 
must  have  a  common  point,  and  this  truth  seems 
intuitive. 

But  a  contradiction  would  be  implied  if  we 
conceived  of  lines  as  continuums  of  the  first  order — 
i.e.,  the  lines  traced  by  the  geometer  should  only 
give  us  points,  the  co-ordinates  of  which  are 
rational  numbers.  The  contradiction  would  be 
manifest  if  we  were,  for  instance,  to  assert  the 
existence  of  lines  and  circles.  It  is  clear,  in  fact, 
that  if  the  points  whose  co-ordinates  are  com 
mensurable  were  alone  regarded  as  real,  the 
in-circle  of  a  square  and  the  diagonal  of  the 
square  would  not  intersect,  since  the  co-ordinates 
of  the  point  of  intersection  are  incommensurable. 

Even  then  we  should  have  only  certain  incom 
mensurable  numbers,  and  not  all  these  numbers. 

But  let  us  imagine  a  line  divided  into  two  half- 
rays  (demi-droites).  Each  of  these  half-rays  will 
appear  to  our  minds  as  a  band  of  a  certain  breadth; 
these  bands  will  fit  close  together,  because  there 
must  be  no  interval  between  them.  The  common 
part  will  appear  to  us  to  be  a  point  which  will  still 
remain  as  we  imagine  the  bands  to  become  thinner 
and  thinner,  so  that  we  admit  as  an  intuitive  truth 
that  if  a  line  be  divided  into  two  half-rays  the 
common  frontier  of  these  half-rays  is  a  point. 
Here  we  recognise  the  conception  of  Kronecker, 


MATHEMATICAL    MAGNITUDE.  2J 

in  which  an  incommensurable  number  was  regarded 
as  the  common  frontier  of  two  classes  of  rational 
numbers.  Such  is  the  origin  of  the  continuum  of 
the  second  order,  which  is  the  mathematical  con 
tinuum  properly  so  called. 

Summary. — To  sum  up,  the  mind  has  the  faculty^ 
of  creating  symbols,  and  it  is  thus  that  it  has  con 
structed  the  mathematical  continuum,  which  is 
only  a  particular  system  of  symbols.  The  only 
limit  to  its  power  is  the  necessity  of  avoiding  all 
contradiction ;  but  the  mind  only  makes  use  of  it 
when  experiment  gives  a  reason  for  it. 

In  the  case  with  which  we  are  concerned,  the 
reason  is  given  by  the  idea  of  the  physical  con 
tinuum,  drawn  from  the  rough  data  of  the  senses. 
But  this  idea  leads  to  a  series  of  contradictions 
from  each  of  which  in  turn  we  must  be  freed. 
In  this  way  we  are  forced  to  imagine  a  more 
and  more  complicated  system  of  symbols.  That 
on  which  we  shall  dwell  is  not  merely  exempt 
from  internal  contradiction, — it  was  so  already  at 
all  the  steps  we  have  taken, — but  it  is  no  longer  in 
contradiction  with  the  various  propositions  which 
are  called  intuitive,  and  which  are  derived  from 
more  or  less  elaborate  empirical  notions. 

Measurable  Magnitude. — So  far  we  have  not 
spoken  of  the  measure  of  magnitudes;  we  can  tell 
if  any  one  of  them  is  greater  than  any  other, 
but  we  cannot  say  that  it  is  two  or  three  times 
as  large. 

So  far,  I  have  only  considered  the  order  in  which 


28  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

the  terms  are  arranged ;  but  that  is  not  sufficient 
for  most  applications.  We  must  learn  how  to 
compare  the  interval  which  separates  any  two 
terms.  On  this  condition  alone  will  the  con 
tinuum  become  measurable,  and  the  operations 
of  arithmetic  -be  applicable.  This  can  only  be 
done  by  the  aid  of  a  new  and  special  con 
vention  ;  and  this  convention  is,  that  in  such  a 
case  the  interval  between  the  terms  A  and  B  is 
equal  to  the  interval  which  separates  C  and  D. 
For  instance,  we  started  with  the  integers,  and 
between  two  consecutive  sets  we  intercalated  ;/ 
intermediary  sets ;  by  convention  we  now  assume 
these  new  sets  to  be  equidistant.  This  is  one 
of  the  ways  of  denning  the  addition  of  two 
magnitudes;  for  if  the  interval  AB  is  by  definition 
equal  to  the  interval  CD,  the  interval  AD  will  by 
definition  be  the  sum  of  the  intervals  AB  and  AC. 
This  definition  is  very  largely,  but  not  altogether, 
arbitrary.  It  must  satisfy  certain  conditions — the 
commutative  and  associative  laws  of  addition,  for 
instance ;  but,  provided  the  definition  we  choose 
satisfies  these  laws,  the  choice  is  indifferent,  and 
we  need  not  state  it  precisely. 

Remarks. — We  are  now  in  a  position  to  discuss 
several  important  questions. 

(i)  Is  the  creative  power  of  the  mind  exhausted 
by  the  creation  of  the  mathematical  continuum  ? 
The  answer  is  in  the  negative,  and  this  is  shown 
in  a  very  striking  manner  by  the  work  of  Du  Bois 
Reymond. 


MATHEMATICAL    MAGNITUDE.  2Q 

We  know  that  mathematicians  distinguish 
between  infinitesimals  of  different  orders,  and  that 
infinitesimals  of  the  second  order  are  infinitely 
small,  not  only  absolutely  so,  but  also  in  relation 
to  those  of  the  first  order.  It  is  not  difficult  to 
imagine  infinitesimals  of  fractional  or  even  of 
irrational  order,  and  here  once  more  we  find  the 
mathematical  continuum  which  has  been  dealt 
with  in  the  preceding  pages.  Further,  there  are 
infinitesimals  which  are  infinitely  small  with 
reference  to  those  of  the  first  order,  and  infinitely 
large  with  respect  to  the  order  i  +  e,  however 
small  e  may  be.  Here,  then,  are  new  terms  inter 
calated  in  our  series;  and  if  I  may  be  permitted  to 
revert  to  the  terminology  used  in  the  preceding 
pages,  a  terminology  which  is  very  convenient, 
although  it  has  not  been  consecrated  by  usage,  I 
shall  say  that  we  have  created  a  kind  of  con 
tinuum  of  the  third  order. 

It  is  an  easy  matter  to  go  further,  but  it  is  idle 
to  do  so,  for  we  would  only  be  imagining  symbols 
without  any  possible  application,  and  no  one  will 
dream  of  doing  that.  This  continuum  of  the  third 
order,  to  which  we  are  led  by  the  consideration  of 
the  different  orders  of  infinitesimals,  is  in  itself 
of  but  little  use  and  hardly  worth  quoting. 
Geometers  look  on  it  as  a  mere  curiosity.  The 
mind  only  uses  its  creative  faculty  when  experi- 
ment  requires  it. 

(2)  When  we  are  once  in  possession  of  the 
conception  of  the  mathematical  continuum,  are 


30  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

we  protected  from  contradictions  analogous  to 
those  which  gave  it  birth  ?  No,  and  the  follow 
ing  is  an  instance  :— 

He  is  a  savant  indeed  who  will  not  take  it  as 
evident  that  every  curve  has  a  tangent ;  and,  in 
fact,  if  we  think  of  a  curve  and  a  straight  line  as 
two  narrow  bands,  we  can  always  arrange  them  in 
such  a  way  that  they  have  a  common  part  without 
intersecting.  Suppose  now  that  the  breadth  of 
the  bands  diminishes  indefinitely :  the  common 
part  will  still  remain,  and  in  the  limit,  so  to  speak, 
the  two  lines  will  have  a  common  point,  although 
they  do  not  intersect — i.e.,  they  will  touch.  The 
geometer  who  reasons  in  this  way  is  only  doing 
what  we  have  done  when  we  proved  that  two  lines 
which  intersect  have  a  common  point,  and  his 
intuition  might  also  seem  to  be  quite  legitimate. 
But  this  is  not  the  case.  We  can  show  that  there 
are  curves  which  have  no  tangent,  if  we  define 
such  a  curve  as  an  analytical  continuum  of  the 
second  order.  No  doubt  some  artifice  analogous 
to  those  we  have  discussed  above  would  enable  us 
to  get  rid  of  this  contradiction,  but  as  the  latter  is 
only  met  with  in  very  exceptional  cases,  we  need 
not  trouble  to  do  so.  Instead  of  endeavouring  to 
reconcile  intuition  and  analysis,  we  are  content  to 
sacrifice  one  of  them,  and  as  analysis  must  be 
flawless,  intuition  must  go  to  the  wall. 

The  Physical  Continuum  of  several  Dimensions. — 
We  have  discussed  above  the  physical  continuum 
as  it  is  derived  from  the  immediate  evidence  of  our 


MATHEMATICAL    MAGNITUDE.  31 

senses — or,  if  the  reader  prefers,  from  the  rough 
results  of  Fechner's  experiments ;  I  have  shown 
that  these  results  are  summed  up  in  the  contra 
dictory  formulae  : — A  =  13,  B  =  C,  A  <  C. 

Let  us  now  see  how  this  notion  is  generalised, 
and  how  from  it  may  be  derived  the  concept  of 
continuums  of  several  dimensions.  Consider  any 
two  aggregates  of  sensations.  We  can  either 
distinguish  between  them,  or  we  cannot;  just  as  in 
Fechner's  experiments  the  weight  of  10  grammes 
could  be  distinguished  from  the  weight  of  12 
grammes,  but  not  from  the  weight  of  n  grammes. 
This  is  all  that  is  required  to  construct  the  con 
tinuum  of  several  dimensions. 

Let  us  call  one  of  these  aggregates  of  sensations 
an  element.  It  will  be  in  a  measure  analogous  to 
the  point  of  the  mathematicians,  but  will  not  be, 
however,  the  same  thing.  We  cannot  say  that 
our  element  has  no  size,  for  we  cannot  distinguish 
it  from  its  immediate  neighbours,  and  it  is  thus 
'surrounded  by  a  kind  of  fog.  If  the  astronomical 
comparison  may  be  allowed,  our  "elements" 
would  be  like  nebulae,  whereas  the  mathematical 
points  would  be  like  stars. 

If  this  be  granted,  a  system  of  elements  will 
form  a  continuum,  if  we  can  pass  from  any  one  of 
them  to  any  other  by  a  series  of  consecutive 
elements  such  that  each  cannot  be  distinguished 
from  its  predecessor.  This  linear  series  is  to  the 
line  of  the  mathematician  what  the  isolated  element 
was  to  the  point. 


32  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

Before  going  further,  I  must  explain  what  is 
meant  by  a  cut.  Let  us  consider  a  continuum  C, 
and  remove  from  it  certain  of  its  elements,  which 
for  a  moment  we  shall  regard  as  no  longer  belong 
ing  to  the  continuum.  We  shall  call  the  aggregate 
of  elements  thus  removed  a  cut.  By  means  of  this 
cut,  the  continuum  C  will  be  subdivided  into 
several  distinct  continuums ;  the  aggregate  of 
elements  which  remain  will  cease  to  form  a  single 
continuum.  There  will  then  be  on  C  two  ele 
ments,  A  and  B,  which  we  must  look  upon  as 
belonging  to  two  distinct  continuums;  and  we  see 
that  this  must  be  so,  because  it  will  be  impossible 
to  find  a  linear  series  of  consecutive  elements  of  C 
(each  of  the  elements  indistinguishable  from  the 
preceding,  the  first  being  A  and  the  last  B),  unless 
one  of  the  elements  of  this  series  is  indistinguisliablc 
from  one  of  the  elements  of  the  cut. 

It  may  happen,  on  the  contrary,  that  the  cut 
may  not  be  sufficient  to  subdivide  the  continuum 
C.  To  classify  the  physical  continuums,  we  must 
first  of  all  ascertain  the  nature  of  the  cuts  which 
must  be  made  in  order  to  subdivide  them.  If  a 
physical  continuum,  C,  may  be  subdivided  by  a  cut 
reducing  to  a  finite  number  of  elements,  all  dis 
tinguishable  the  one  from  the  other  (and  therefore 
forming  neither  one  continuum  nor  several  con 
tinuums),  we  shall  call  C  a  continuum  of  one 
dimension.  If,  on  the  contrary,  C  can  only  be  sub 
divided  by  cuts  which  are  themselves  continuums, 
we  shall  say  that  C  is  of  several  dimensions;  if 


MATHEMATICAL    MAGNITUDE.  33 

the  cuts  are  continuums  of  one  dimension,  then 
we  shall  say  that  C  has  two  dimensions ;  if  cuts  of 
two  dimensions  are  sufficient,  we  shall  say  that  C 
is  of  three  dimensions,  and  so  on.  Thus  the 
notion  of  the  physical  continuum  of  several  dimen 
sions  is  defined,  thanks  to  the  very  simple  fact, 
that  two  aggregates  of  sensations  may  be  dis 
tinguishable  or  indistinguishable. 

The  Mathematical  Continuum  of  Several  Dimensions. 
—The  conception  of  the  mathematical  continuum 
of  n  dimensions  may  be  led  up  to  quite  naturally 
by  a  process  similar  to  that  which  we  discussed  at 
the  beginning  of  this  chapter.  A  point  of  such  a 
continuum  is  defined  by  a  system  of  n  distinct 
magnitudes  which  we  call  its  co-ordinates. 

The  magnitudes  need  not  always  be  measurable; 
there  is,  for  instance,  one  branch  of  geometry 
independent  of  the  measure  of  magnitudes,  in 
which  we  are  only  concerned  with  knowing,  for 
example,  if,  on  a  curve  ABC,  the  point  B  is 
between  the  points  A  and  C,  and  in  which  it  is 
immaterial  whether  the  arc  A  B  is  equal  to  or 
twice  the  arc  B  C.  This  branch  is  called  Analysis 
Situs.  It  contains  quite  a  large  body  of  doctrine 
which  has  attracted  the  attention  of  the  greatest 
geometers,  and  from  which  are  derived,  one  from 
another,  a"  whole  series  of  remarkable  theorems. 
What  distinguishes  these  theorems  from  those  of 
ordinary  geometry  is  that  they  are  purely  quali 
tative.  They  are  still  true  if  the  figures  are  copied 
by  an  unskilful  draughtsman,  with  the  result  that 

3 


34  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

the  proportions  are  distorted  and  the  straight  lines 
replaced  by  lines  which  are  more  or  less  curved. 

As  soon  as  measurement  is  introduced  into  the 
continuum  we  have  just  defined,  the  continuum 
becomes  space,  and  geometry  is  born.  But  the 
discussion  of  this  is  reserved  for  Part  II. 


PART    II. 

SPACE. 
CHAPTER    III. 

NON-EUCLIDEAN    GEOMETRIES. 

EVERY  conclusion  presumes  premisses.  These 
premisses  are  either  self-evident  and  need  no 
demonstration,  or  can  be  established  only  if  based 
on  other  propositions ;  and,  as  we  cannot  go  back 
in  this  way  to  infinity,  every  deductive  science, 
and  geometry  in  particular,  must  rest  upon  a 
certain  number  of  indemonstrable  axioms.  All 
treatises  of  geometry  begin  therefore  with  the 
enunciation  of  these  axioms.  But  there  is  a 
distinction  to  be  drawn  between  them.  Some  of 
these,  for  example,  "  Things  which  are  equal  to  ) 
the  same  thing  are  equal  to  one  another,"  are  not 
propositions  in  geometry  but  propositions  in 
analysis.  I  look  upon  them  as  analytical  a  priori 
intuitions,  and  they  concern  me  no  further.  But 
I  must  insist  on  other  axioms  which  are  special 
to  geometry.  Of  these  most  treatises  explicitly^ 
enunciate  three : — (i)  Only  one  line  can  pass  ' 
through  two  points ;  (2)  a  straight  line  is  the 


36  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

shortest  distance  between  two  points ;  (3)  through 
one  point  only  one  parallel  can  be  drawn  to  a 
given  straight  line.  Although  we  generally  dis 
pense  with  proving  the  second  of  these  axioms,  it 
would  be  possible  to  deduce  it  from  the  other  two, 
and  from  those  much  more  numerous  axioms 
which  are  implicitly  admitted  without  enuncia 
tion,  as  I  shall  explain  further  on.  For  a  long 
time  a  proof  of  the  third  axiom  known  as  Euclid's 
postulate  was  sought  in  vain.  It  is  impossible  to 
imagine  the  efforts  that  have  been  spent  in  pursuit 
of  this  chimera.  Finally,  at  the  beginning  of  the 
nineteenth  century,  and  almost^  simultaneously, 
two  scientists,  a  Russian  and  a  Bulgxiria-n,  Lobat- 
schewsky  and  Bolyai,  showred  irrefutably  that  this 
proof  is  impossible.  They  have  nearly  rid  us  of 
inventors  of  geometries  without  a  postulate,  and 
ever  since  the  Academic  des  Sciences  receives  only 
about  one  or  two  new  demonstrations  a  year. 
But  the  question  was  not  exhausted,  and  it  was 
not  long  before  a  great  step  was  taken  by  the 
celebrated  memoir  of  Riemann,  entitled :  Ueber 
die  Hypothesen  welche  der  Geometric  zum  Grunde 
liegen.  This  little  work  has  inspired  most  of  the 
recent  treatises  to  which  I  shall  later  on  refer,  and 
among  which  I  may  mention  those  of  Beltratni 
and  Helmholtz. 

The  Geometry  of  Lobatschewsky.  —  If  it  were 
possible  to  deduce  Euclid's  postulate  from  the 
several  axioms,  it  is  evident  that  by  rejecting 
the  postulate  and  retaining  the  other  axioms  we 


NON-EUCLIDEAN    GEOMETRIES.  37 

should  be  led  to  contradictory  consequences.  It 
would  be,  therefore,  impossible  to  found  on  those 
premisses  a  coherent  geometry.  Now,  this  is 
precisely  what  Lobatschewsky  has  done.  He 
assumes  at  the  outset  that  several  parallels  may 
be  drawn  through  a  point  to  a  given  straight  line, 
and  he  retains  all  the  other  axioms  of  Euclid. 
From  these  hypotheses  he  deduces  a  series  of 
theorems  between  which  it  is  impossible  to  find 
any  contradiction,  and  he  constructs  a  geometry 
as  impeccable  in  its  logic  as  Euclidean  geometry,  N 
The  theorems  are  very  different,  however,  from 
those  to  which  we  are  accustomed,  and  at  first 
will  be  fourud  a  little  disconcerting.  For  instance, 
the  sum  of  the  angles  of  a  triangle  is  always  less 
than  two  right  angles,  and  the  difference  between 
that  sum  and  two  right  angles  is  proportional  to 
the  area  of  the  triangle.  It  is  impossible  to  con 
struct  a  figure  similar  to  a  given  figure  but  of 
different  dimensions.  If  the  circumference  of  a 
circle  be  divided  into  n  equal  parts,  and  tangents 
be  drawn  at  the  points  of  intersection,  the  n 
tangents  will  form  a  polygon  if  the  radius  of 
the  circle  is  small  enough,  but  if  the  radius  is 
large  enough  they  will  never  meet.  We  need  not 
multiply  these  examples.  Lobatschewsky's  pro 
positions  have  no  relation  to  those  of  Euclid,  , 
but  they  are  none  the  less  logically  interconnected. 
Riemann's  Geometry. — Let  us  imagine  to  our 
selves  a  world  only  peopled  with  beings  of  no 
J_nickness,  and  suppose  these  "infinitely  flat" 


38  SCIENCE   AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

animals  are  all  in  one  and  the  same  plane,  from 
which  they  cannot  emerge.  Let  us  further  admit 
that  this  world  is  sufficiently  distant  from  other 
worlds  to  be  withdrawn  from  their  influence,  and 
while  we  are  making  these  hypotheses  it  will  not 
cost  us  much  to  endow  these  beings  with  reason 
ing  power,  and  to  believe  them  capable  of  making 
a  geometry.  In  that  case  they  will  certainly 
attribute  to  space  only  two  dimensions.  But 
now  suppose  that  these  imaginary  animals,  \vhile. 
remaining  without  thickness,  have  the  form  of  a 
spherical,  and  not  of  a  plane  figure,  and  are  all  on 
the  same  sphere,  from  which  they  cannot  escape. 
What  kind  of  a  geometry  will  they  construct  ?  In 
the  first  place,  it  is  clear  that  they  will  attribute  to 
space  only  two  dimensions.  The  straight  line  to 
them  will  be  the  shortest  distance  from  one  point 
on  the  sphere  to  another — that  is  to  say,  an  arc  of 
a  great  circle.  In  a  word,  their  geometry  will  be 
spherical  geometry.  What  they  will  call  space 
will  be  the  sphere  on  which  they  are  confined,  and 
on  which  take  place  all  the  phenomena  with 
which  they  are  acquainted.  Their  space  will 
therefore  be  unbounded,  since  on  a  sphere  one  may 
always  walk  forward  without  ever  being  brought 

•  to  a  stop,  and  yet  it  will  be  finite;  the  end  will 
never  be  found,  but  the  complete  tour  can  be 

'  made.  Well,  Riemann's  geometry  is  spherical 
geometry  extended  to  three  dimensions.  To  con 
struct  it,  the  German  mathematician  had  first  of 
all  to  throw  overboard,  not  only  Euclid's  postulate 


NON-EUCLIDEAN    GEOMETRIES.  3Q 

but  also  the  first  axiom  that  only  one  line  can  pass 
through  two  points.  On  a  sphere,  through  two 
given  points,  we  can  in  general  draw  only  one  great 
circle  which,  as  we  have  just  seen,  would  be  to 
our  imaginary  beings  a  straight  line.  But  there 
was  one  exception.  If  the  two  given  points  are 
at  the  ends  of  a  diameter,  an  infinite  number  of 
great  circles  can  be  drawn  through  them.  In 
the  same  way,  in  Riemann's  geometry — at  least  in 
one  of  its  forms — through  two  points  only  one 
straight  line  can  in  general  be  drawn,  but  there  are  '• 
exceptional  cases  in  which  through  two  points 
an  infinite  number  of  straight  lines  can  be  drawn. 
So  there  is  a  kind  of  opposition  between  the 
geometries  of  Riemann  and  Lobatschewsky.  For 
instance,  the  sum  of  the  angles  of  a  triangle  is 
equal  to  two  right  angles  in  Euclid's  geometry, 
less  than  two  right  angles  in  that  of  Lobat 
schewsky,  and  greater  than  two  right  angles  in  that 
of  Riemann.  The  number  of  parallel  lines  that 
can  be  drawn  through  a  given  point  to  a  given 
line  is  one  in  Euclid's  geometry,  none  in  Riemann's, 
and  an  infinite  number  in  the  geometry  of  Lobat-  \\ 
schewsky.  Let  us  add  that  Riemann's  space  is  \ 
finite,  although  unbounded  in  the  sense  which  we 
have  above  attached  to  these  words. 

Surfaces  with  Constant  Curvature. — One  objection, 
however,  remains  possible.  There  is  no  contradic 
tion  between  the  theorems  of  Lobatschewsky  and 
Riemann;  but  however  numerous  are  the  other 
consequences  that  these  geometers  have  deduced 


40  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

from  their  hypotheses,  they  had  to  arrest  their 
course  before  they  exhausted  them  all,  for  the 
number  would  be  infinite;  and  who  can  say  that 
if  they  had  carried  their  deductions  further  they 
would  not  have  eventually  reached  some  con- 

J  ^/  ttu^tradiction  ?  This  difficulty  does  not  exist  for 
**Riemann's  geometry,  provided  it  is  limited  to 
o  dimensions.  As  we  have  seen,  the  two- 
dimensional  geometry  of  Riemann,  in  fact,  does 

kn,  <ti"1**T  not  differ  from  spherical  geometry,  which  is  only  a 
krancn  of  ordinary  geometry,  and  is  therefore  out- 
side  all  contradiction.  Beltrami,  by  showing  that 
Lobatschewsky's  two-dimensional  geometry  was 
only  a  branch  of  ordinary  geometry,  has  equally 
refuted  the  objection  as  far  as  it  is  concerned. 
This  is  the  course  of  his  argument:  Let  us  con 
sider  any  figure  whatever  on  a  surface.  Imagine 
this  figure  to  be  traced  on  a  flexible  and  in- 
extensible  canvas  applied  to  the  surface,  in  such 
a  way  that  when  the  canvas  is  displaced  and 
deformed  the  different  lines  of  the  figure  change 
their  form  without  changing  their  length.  As  a 
rule,  this  flexible  and  inextensible  figure  cannot  be 
displaced  without  leaving  the  surface.  But  there 
are  certain  surfaces  for  which  such  a  movement 
would  be  possible.  They  are  surfaces  of  constant 
curvature.  If  we  resume  the  comparison  that  we 
made  just  now,  and  imagine  beings  without  thick 
ness  living  on  one  of  these  surfaces,  they  will 
regard  as  possible  the  motion  of  a  figure  all  the 
lines  of  which  remain  of  a  constant  length.  Such 


NON-EUCLIDEAN    GEOMETRIES.  4! 

a  movement  would  appear  absurd,  on  the  other 
hand,  to  animals  without  thickness  living  on  a 
surface  of  variable  curvature.  These  surfaces  of 
constant  curvature  are  of  two  kinds.  The 
curvature  of  some  is  positive,  and  they  may  be 
deformed  so  as  to  be  applied  to  a  sphere.  The 
geometry  of  these  surfaces  is  therefore  reduced  to 
spherical  geometry- — namely,  Riemann's.  The  cur 
vature  of  others  is  negative.  Beltrami  has  shown 
that  the  geometry  of  these  surfaces  is  identical 
with  that  of  Lobatschewsky.  Thus  the  two- 
dimensional  geometries  of  Riemann  and  Lobat-  * 
schewsky  are  connected  with  Euclidean  geometry. 
Interpretation  of  ^on-Euclidean  Geometries. — Thus 
vanishes  the  objection  so  far  as  two-dimensional 
geometries  are  concerned.  It  would  be  easy  to 
extend  Beltrami's  reasoning  to  three-dimensional 
geometries,  and  minds  which  do  not  recoil  before 
space  of  four  dimensions  will  see  no  difficulty  in 
it;  but  such  minds  are  few  in  number.  I  prefer, 
then,  to  proceed  otherwise.  Let  us  consider  a 
certain  plane,  which  I  shall  call  the  fundamental 
plane,  and  let  us  construct  a  kind  of  dictionary  by 
making  a  double  series  of  terms  written  in  two 
columns,  and  corresponding  each  to  each,  just  as 
in  ordinary  dictionaries  the  words  in  two  languages 
which  have  the  same  signification  correspond  to 
one  another:— 
Space The  portion  of  space  situated 

above     the    fundamental 

plane. 


SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 


Plane    ... 

Line      

Sphere 

Circle 

Angle 

Distance    between 
two  points 


Sphere  cutting  orthogonally 
the  fundamental  plane. 

Circle  cutting  orthogonally 
the  fundamental  plane. 

Sphere. 

Circle. 

Angle. 

Logarithm  of  the  anharmonic 


ratio  of  these  two  points 
and  of  the  intersection 
of  the  fundamental  plane 
with  the  circle  passing 
through  these  two  points 
and  cutting  it  orthogon 
ally. 
Etc. 

Let  us  now  take  Lobatschewsky's  theorems  and 
translate  them  by  the  aid  of  this  dictionary,  as  we 
would  translate  a  German  text  with  the  aid  of 
a  German  -  French  dictionary.  We  shall  then 
obtain  the  theorems  of  ordinary  geometry.  For 
instance,  Lobatschewsky's  theorem:  "The  sum  of 
the  angles  of  a  triangle  is  less  than  two  right 
angles,"  may  be  translated  thus:  "If  a  curvilinear 
triangle  has  for  its  sides  arcs  of  circles  which  if 
produced  would  cut  orthogonally  the  fundamental 
plane,  the  sum  of  the  angles  of  this  curvilinear 
triangle  will  be  less  than  two  right  angles."  Thus, 
however  far  the  consequences  of  Lobatschewsky's 
hypotheses  are  carried,  they  will  never  lead  to  a 


NON-EUCLIDEAN    GEOMETRIES.  43 

contradiction;  in  fact,  if  two  of  Lobatschewsky's 
theorems  were  contradictory,  the  translations  of 
these  twTo  theorems  made  by  the  aid  of  our 
dictionary  would  be  contradictory  also.  But 
these  translations  are  theorems  of  ordinary 
geometry,  and  no  one  doubts  that  ordinary 
geometry  is  exempt  from  contradiction.  Whence 
is  the  certainty  derived,  and  how  far  is  it  justified? 
That  is  a  question  upon  which  I  cannot  enter 
here,  but  it  is  a  very  interesting  question,  and  I 
think  not  insoluble.  Nothing,  therefore,  is  left  of 
the  objection  I  formulated  above.  But  this  is  not 
all.  Lobatschewsky's  geometry  being  susceptible 
of  a  concrete  interpretation,  ceases  to  be  a  useless 
logical  exercise,  and  may  be  applied.  I  have  no 
time  here  to  deal  with  these  applications,  nor 
with  what  Herr  Klein  and  myself  have  done  by 
using  them  in  the  integration  of  linear  equations. 
Further,  this  interpretation  is  not  unique,  and 
several  dictionaries  may  be  constructed  analogous 
to  that  above,  which  will  enable  us  by  a  simple 
translation  to  convert  Lobatschewsky's  theorems 
into  the  theorems  of  ordinary  geometry. 

Implicit  Axioms.  —  Are  the  axioms  implicitly 
enunciated  in  our  text-books  the  only  foundation 
of  geometry  ?  We  may  be  assured  of  the  contrary 
when  we  see  that,  when  they  are  abandoned  one 
after  another,  there  are  still  left  standing  some 
propositions  which  are  common  to  the  geometries 
of  Euclid,  Lobatschewsky,  and  Riemann.  These 
propositions  must  be  based  on  premisses  that 


44  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

geometers  admit  without  enunciation.  It  is  in 
teresting  to  try  and  extract  them  from  the  classical 
proofs. 

John  Stuart  Mill  asserted1  that  every  definition 
contains  an  axiom,  because  by  denning  we  im 
plicitly  affirm  the  existence  of  the  object  defined. 
That  is  going  rather  too  far.  It  is  but  rarely  in 
mathematics  that  a  definition  is  given  without 
following  it  up  by  the  proof  of  the  existence  of  the 
object  defined,  and  when  this  is  not  done  it  is 
generally  because  the  reader  can  easily  supply 
it;  and  it  must  not  be  forgotten  that  the  word 
"existence"  has  not  the  same  meaning  when  it 
refers  to  a  mathematical  entity  as  when  it  refers  to 
a  material  object. 

A  mathematical  entity  exists  provided  there  is 
no  contradiction  implied  in  its  definition,  either  in 
itself,  or  with  the  propositions  previously  admitted. 
But  if  the  observation  of  John  Stuart  Mill  cannot 
be  applied  to  all  definitions,  it  is  none  the  less  true 
for  some  of  them.  A  plane  is  sometimes  defined 
in  the  following  manner: — The  plane  is  a  surface 
such  that  the  line  which  joins  any  two  points 
upon  it  lies  wholly  on  that  surface.  Now,  there  is 
obviously  a  new  axiom  concealed  in  this  definition. 
It  is  true  we  might  change  it,  and  that  would  be 
preferable,  but  then  we  should  have  to  enunciate 
the  axiom  explicitly.  Other  definitions  may  give 
rise  to  no  less  important  reflections,  such  as,  for 
example,  that  of  the  equality  of  two  figures.  Two 

1  Logic >  c.  viii.,  cf.  Definitions,  §  5-6.  — TR. 


NON-EUCLIDEAN    GEOMETRIES.  45 

figures  are  equal  when  they  can  be  superposed. 
To  superpose  them,  one  of  them  must  be  displaced 
until  it  coincides  with  the  other.  But  how  must 
it  be  displaced  ?  If  we  asked  that  question,  no 
doubt  we  should  be  told  that  it  ought  to  be  done 
without  deforming  it,  and  as  an  invariable  solid  is 
displaced.  The  vicious  circle  would  then  be  evi 
dent.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  this  definition  defines 
nothing.  It  has  no  meaning  to  a  being  living  in  a 
world  in  which  there  are  only  fluids.  If  it  seems 
clear  to  us,  it  is  because  we  are  accustomed  to  the 
properties  of  natural  solids  which  do  not  much 
differ  from  those  of  the  ideal  solids,  all  of  whose 
dimensions  are  invariable.  However,  imperfect  as 
it  may  be,  this  definition  implies  an  axiom.  The 
possibility  of  the  motion  of  an  invariable  figure  is 
not  a  self-evident  truth.  At  least  it  is  only  so  in 
the  application  to  Euclid's  postulate,  and  not  as  an 
analytical  a  priori  intuition  would  be.  More 
over,  when  we  study  the  definitions  and  the  proofs 
of  geometry,  we  see  that  we  are  compelled  to 
admit  without  proof  not  only  the  possibility  of 
this  motion,  but  also  some  of  its  properties.  This 
first  arises  in  the  definition  of  the  straight  line. 
Many  defective  definitions  have  been  given,  but 
the  true  one  is  that  which  is  understood  in  all  the 
proofs  in  which  the  straight  line  intervenes.  "  It 
may  happen  that  the  motion  of  an  invariable  figure 
may  be  such  that  all  the  points  of  a  line  belonging 
to  the  figure  are  motionless,  while  all  the  points 
situate  outside  that  line  are  in.  motion.  Such  a 


46  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 


line  would  be  called  a  straight  line/'  We  have 
deliberately  in  this  enunciation  separated  the 
definition  from  the  axiom  which  it  implies.  Many 
proofs  such  as  those  of  the  cases  of  the  equality  of 
triangles,  of  the  possibility  of  drawing  a  perpen 
dicular  from  a  point  to  a  straight  line,  assume  pro 
positions  the  enunciations  of  which  are  dispensed 
with,  for  they  necessarily  imply  that  it  is  possible 
to  move  a  figure  in  space  in  a  certain  way. 

The  Fourth  Geometry. — Among  these  explicit 
axioms  there  is  one  which  seems  to  me  to  deserve 
some  attention,  because  when  we  abandon  it  we 
can  construct  a  fourth  geometry  as  coherent  as 
those  of  Euclid,  Lobatschewsky,  and  Riemann. 
To  prove  that  we  can  always  draw  a  perpendicular 
at  a  point  A  to  a  straight  line  A  B,  we  consider  a 
straight  line  A  C  movable  about  the  point  A,  and 
initially  identical  with  the  fixed  straight  line  A  B. 
We  then  can  make  it  turn  about  the  point  A  until 
it  lies  in  A  B  produced.  Thus  we  assume  two 
propositions — first,  that  such  a  rotation  is  possible, 
and  then  that  it  may  continue  until  the  two  lines 
lie  the  one  in  the  other  produced.  If  the  first 
point  is  conceded  and  the  second  rejected,  we  are 
led  to  a  series  of  theorems  even  stranger  than  those 
of  Lobatschewsky  and  Riemann,  but  equally  free 
from  contradiction.  I  shall  give  only  one  of  these 
theorems,  and  I  shall  not  choose  the  least  remark 
able  of  them.  A  real  straight  line  may  be  perpen 
dicular  to  itself. 

Lie's  Theorem. — The  number  of  axioms  implicitly 


NON-EUCLIDEAN    GEOMETRIES.  47 

introduced  into  classical  proofs  is  greater  than 
necessary,  and  it  would  be  interesting  to  reduce 
them  to  a  minimum.  It  may  be  asked,  in  the  first 
place,  if  this  reduction  is  possible — if  the  number  of 
necessary  axioms  and  that  of  imaginable  geometries 
is  not  infinite?  A  theorem  due  to  Sophus  Lie  is  of 
weighty  importance  in  this  discussion.  It  may  be 
enunciated  in  the  following  manner: — Suppose  the 
following  premisses  are  admitted:  (i)  space  has  n 
dimensions;  (2)  the  movement  of  an  invariable 
figure  is  possible;  (3)  p  conditions  are  necessary  to 
determine  the  position  of  this  figure  in  space. 

The  number  of  geometries  compatible  with  these 
premisses  will  be  limited.  I  may  even  add  that  if  n 
is  given,  a  superior  limit  can  be  assigned  to  p.  If, 
therefore,  the  possibility  of  the  movement  is 
granted,  we  can  only  invent  a  finite  and  even 
a  rather  restricted  number  of  three-dimensional 
geometries. 

Riemann's  Geometries.  —  However,  this  result 
ssems  contradicted  by  Riemann,  for  that  scientist 
constructs  an  infinite  number  of  geometries,  and 
that  to  which  his  name  is  usually  attached  is  only 
a  particular  case  of  them.  All  depends,  he  says, 
on  the  manner  in  which  the  length  of  a  curve  is 
defined.  Now,  there  is  an  infinite  number  of  ways 
of  defining  this  length,  and  each  of  them  may  be 
the  starting-point  of  a  new  geometry.  That  is 
perfectly  true,  but  most  of  these  definitions  are  in 
compatible  with  the  movement  of  a  variable  figure 
such  as  we  assume  to  be  possible  in  Lie's  theorem. 


48  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

These  geometries  of  Riemann,  so  interesting  on 
various  grounds,  can  never  be,  therefore,  purely 
analytical,  and  would  not  lend  themselves  to 
proofs  analogous  to  those  of  Euclid. 

"On  the  Nature  of  Axioms. — Most  mathematicians 
regard  Lobatschewsky's  geometry  as  a  mere  logical 
curiosity.  Some  of  them  have,  however,  gone 
further.  If  several  geometries  are  possible,  they 
say,  is  it  certain  that  our  geometry  is  the  one  that 
is  true  ?^  Experiment  no  doubt  teaches  us  that  the 
sum  of  the  angles  of  a  triangle  is  equal  to  two 
right  angles,  but  this  is  because  the  triangles  we 
deal  with  are  too  small.  According  to  Lobat- 
schewsky,  the  difference  is  proportional  to  the  area 
of  the  triangle,  and  will  not  this  become  sensible 
when  we  operate  on  much  larger  triangles,  and 
when  our  measurements  become  more  accurate  ? 
-;  Euclid's  geometry  would  thus  be  a  provisory 
geometry.  Now,  to  discuss  this  view  we  must 
first  of  all  ask  ourselves,  what  is  the  nature  of 
geometrical  axioms  ?  Are  they  synthetic  a  priori 
intuitions,  as  Kant  affirmed  ?  They  would  then 
be  imposed  upon  us  with  such  a  force  that  we 
could  not  conceive  of  the  contrary  proposition,  nor 
could  we  build  upon  it  a  theoretical  edifice.  There 
would  be  no  non-Euclidean  geometry.  To  con 
vince  ourselves  of  this,  let  us  take  a  true  synthetic 
a  priori  intuition — the  following,  for  instance,  which 
played  an  important  part  in  the  first  chapter: — If 
a  theorem  is  true  for  the  number  i,  and  if  it  has 
oeen  proved  that  it  is  true  of  «  +  i,  provided  it  is 


NON-EUCLIDEAN    GEOMETRIES.  49 

true  of  n,  it  will  be  true  for  all  positive  integers. 
Let  us  next  try  to  get  rid  of  this,  and  while  reject 
ing  this  proposition  let  us  construct  a  false 
arithmetic  analogous  to  non-Euclidean  geometry. 
We  shall  not  be  able  to  do  it.  We  shall  be  even 
tempted  at  the  outset  to  look  upon  these  intui 
tions  as  analytical.  Besides,  to  take  up  again 
our  fiction  of  animals  without  thickness,  we  can 
scarcely  admit  that  these  beings,  if  their  minds 
are  like  ours,  would  adopt  the  Euclidean  geometry, 
which  would  be  contradicted  by  all  their  experi 
ence.  Ought  we,  then,  to  conclude  that  the" 
axioms  of  geometry  are  experimental  truths  ? 
But  we  do  not  make  experiments  on  ideal  lines  or 
ideal  circles;  wre  can  only  make  them  on  material 
objects.  On  what,  therefore,  would  experiments 
serving  as  a  foundation  for  geometry  be  based  ? 
The  answer  is  easy.  We  have  seen  above  that  we 
constantly  reason  as  if  the  geometrical  figures 
behaved  like  solids.  What  geometry  would  borrow 
from  experiment  would  be  therefore  the  pro 
perties  of  these  bodies.  The  properties  of  light 
and  its  propagation  in  a  straight  line  have  also 
given  rise  to  some  of  the  propositions  of  geometry, 
and  in  particular  to  those  of  projective  geometry, 
so  that  from  that  point  of  view  one  would  be 
tempted  to  say  that  metrical  geometry  is  the  study 
of  solids,  and  projective  geometry  that  of  light. 
But  a  difficulty  remains,  and  is  unsurmountable. 
If  geometry  were  an  experimental  science,  it  wTo 
not  be  an  exact  science.  It  would  be  subjected  to  ! 

4 


5O  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

continual  revision.     Nay,  it  would  from  that  day 
forth  be  proved  to  be  erroneous,  for  we  know  that 
no   rigorously    invariable    solid   exists/"   The   geo 
metrical  axioms  are  therefore  neither  'synthetic  a  priori 
intuitions  nor  experimental  facts.     They  are  conven- 
\  tions.     Our  choice  among  all  possible  conventions 
/is  guided  by   experimental   facts;    but   it   remains 
free,  and  is  only  limited  by  the  necessity  of  avoid 
ing  every  contradiction,  and  thus  it  is  that  pos 
tulates  may  remain  rigorously  true  even  when  the 
experimental    laws   which   have   determined   their 
adoption  are  only  approximate.     In  other  words, 
the  axioms  of  geometry  (I  do  not  speak  of  those  of 
arithmetic)  are  only  definitions  in  disguise.     What, 
then,    are    we    to    think    of    the    question :      Is 
Euclidean   geometry   true  ?     It    has   no   meaning. 
We  might  as  well  ask  if  the  metric  system  is  true, 
and  if  the  old  weights  and  measures  are  false;  if 
Cartesian    co-ordinates    are    true    and    polar   co 
ordinates   false.   jOne  geometry   cannot   be   more 
true  than  another;  it  can  only  be  more  convenient. 
|       Now,  Euclidean  geometry  is,  and  will  remain,  the 
\      most  convenient:   ist,  because  it   is  the  simplest, 
")      \    and  it  is  not  so  only  because  of  our  mental  habits 
,    .     or  because  of  the  kind  of  direct  intuition  that  we 
have  of   Euclidean  space ;    it   is    the    simplest    in 
\    itself,  just  as  a  polynomial  of  the  first  degree  is 
simpler  than  a  polynomial  of  the  second  degree; 
2nd,   because  it  sufficiently  agrees  with  the  pro- 
(      *    perties  of  natural  solids,  those  bodies  which  we 
\.       can  compare  and  measure  by  means  of  our  senses. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

SPACE    AND    GEOMETRY. 

LET  us  begin  with  a  little  paradox.  Beings  whose 
minds  were  made  as  ours,  and  with  senses  like 
ours,  but  without  any  preliminary  education, 
might  receive  from  a  suitably-chosen  external 
world  impressions  which  would  lead  them  to 
construct  a  geometry  other  than  that  of  Euclid, 
and  to  localise  the  phenomena  of  this  external 
world  in  a  non-Euclidean  space,  or  even  in  space 
of  four  dimensions.  As  for  us,  whose  education 
has  been  made  by  our  actual  world,  if  we  were 
suddenly  transported  into  this  new  world,  we 
should  have  no  difficulty  in  referring  phenomena 
to  our  Euclidean  space.  Perhaps  somebody  may 
appear  on  the  scene  some  day  who  will  devote  his 
life  to  it,  and  be  able  to  represent  to  himself  the 
fourth  dimension. 

Geometrical  Space  and  Representative  Space. — It  is 
often  said  that  the  images  we  form  of  external 
objects  are  localised  in  space,  and  even  that  they 
can  only  be  formed  on  this  condition.  It  is  also 
said  that  this  space,  which  thus  serves  as  a  kind  of 
framework  ready  prepared  for  our  sensations  and 
representations,  is  identical  with  the  space  of  the 


52  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

geometers,  having  all  the  properties  of  that  space. 
To  all  clear-headed  v  men  who  think  in  this  way, 
the  preceding  statement  might  well  appear  extra 
ordinary;  but  it  is  as  well  to  see  if  they  are  not 
the  victims  of  some  illusion  which  closer  analysis 
may  be  able  to  dissipate.  In  the  first  place,  what 
are  the  properties  of  space  properly  so  called  ? 
I  mean  of  that  space  which  is  the  object  of 
geometry,  and  which  I  shall  call  geometrical 
space.  The  following  are  some  of  the  more 
essential:— 

ist,  it  is  continuous;  2nd,  it  is  infinite;  3rd,  it 
is  of  three  dimensions;  4th,  it  is  homogeneous — 
that  is  to  say,  all  its  points  are  identical  one 
with  another;  5th,  it  is  isotropic.  Compare  this 
now  with  the  framework  of  our  representations 
and  sensations,  which  I  may  call  representative 
space. 

Visual  Space. — First  of  all  let  us  consider  a 
purely  visual  impression,  due  to  an  image  formed 
on  the  back  of  the  retina.  A  cursory  analysis  shows 
us  this  image  as  continuous,  but  as  possessing  only 
two  dimensions,  which  already  distinguishes  purely 
visual  from  what  may  be  called  geometrical  space. 
On  the  other  hand,  the  image  is  enclosed  within 
a  limited  framework ;  and  there  is  a  no  less 
important  difference:  this  pure  visual  space  is  not 
homogeneous.  All  the  points  on  the  retina,  apart 
from  the  images  which  may  be  formed,  do  not 
play  the  same  role.  The  yellow  spot  can  in  no 
way  be  regarded  as  identical  with  a  point  on  the 


SPACE    AND    GEOMETRY.  53 

edge  of  the  retina.  Not  only  does  the  same  object 
produce  on  it  much  brighter  impressions,  but  in 
the  whole  of  the  limited  framework  the  point 
which  occupies  the  centre  will  not  appear  identical 
with  a  point  near  one  of  the  edges.  Closer 
analysis  no  doubt  would  show  us  that  this  con 
tinuity  of  visual  space  and  its  two  dimensions  are 
but  an  illusion.  It  would  make  visual  space  even 
more  different  than  before  from  geometrical  space, 
but  we  may  treat  this  remark  as  incidental. 

However,  sight  enables  us  to  appreciate  dis 
tance,  and  therefore  to  perceive  a  third  dimension. 
But  every  one  knows  that  this  perception  of  thei  t  *)'})" 
third  dimension  reduces  to  a  sense  of  the  effort  of 
accommodation  which  must  be  made,  and  to  a 
sense  of  the  convergence  of  the  two  eyes,  that 
must  take  place  in  order  to  perceive  an  object, 
distinctly.  These  are  muscular  sensations  quite 
different  from  the  visual  sensations  which  have 
given  us  the  concept  of  the  two  first  dimensions. 
The  third  dimension  will  therefore  not  appear  to  us 
as  playing  the  same  role  as  the  two  others.  What 
may  be  called  complete  visual  space  is  not  therefore 
an  isotropic  space.  It  has,  it  is  true,  exactly 
three  dimensions;  which  means  that  the  elements 
of  our  visual  sensations  (those  at  least  which 
concur  in  forming  the  concept  of  extension)  will 
be  completely  defined  if  we  know  three  of  them; 
or,  in  mathematical  language,  they  will  be  func 
tions  of  three  independent  variables.  But  let  us 
look  at  the  matter  a  little  closer.  The  third 


54  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

dimension  is  revealed  to  us  in  two  different  ways: 
by  the  effort  of  accommodation,  and  by  the  con 
vergence  of  the  eyes.  No  doubt  these  two  in 
dications  are  always  in  harmony;  there  is  between 
them  a  constant  relation;  or,  in  mathematical 
language,  the  two  variables  which  measure  these 
two  muscular  sensations  do  not  appear  to  us  as 
independent.  Or,  again,  to  avoid  an  appeal  to 
mathematical  ideas  which  are  already  rather  too 
refined,  we  may  go  back  to  the  language  of  the 
preceding  chapter  and  enunciate  the  same  fact  as 
follows:  —  If  two  sensations  of  convergence  A  and 
B  are  indistinguishable,  the  two  sensations  of 
accommodation  A'  and  B'  which  accompany  them 
respectively  will  also  be  indistinguishable.  But 
that  is,  so  to  speak,  an  experimental  fact.  Nothing 
prevents  us  a  priori  from  assuming  the  contrary, 
and  if  the  contrary  takes  place,  if  these  two 
muscular  sensations  both  vary  independently,  we 
must  take  into  account  one  more  independent 
variable,  and  complete  visual  space  will  appear 
to  us  as  a  physical  continuum  of  four  dimensions. 
And  so  in  this  there  is  also  a  fact  of  external 
experiment.  Nothing  prevents  us  from  assuming 
that  a  being  with  a  mind  like  ours,  with  the  same 
sense-organs  as  ourselves,  may  be  placed  in  a  world 
in  which  light  would  only  reach  him  after  being 
passed  through  refracting  media  of  complicated 
form.  The  two  indications  which  enable  us  to 
appreciate  distances  would  cease  to  be  connected 
by  a  constant  relation.  A  being  educating  his 


-   SPACE    AND    GEOMETRY.  55 

senses  in  such  a  world  would  no  doubt  attribute 
four  dimensions  to  complete  visual  space. 

Tactile  and  Motor  Space. — "Tactile  space"  is 
more  complicated  still  than  visual  space,  and  differs 
even  more  widely  from  geometrical  space.  It  is 
useless  to  repeat  for  the  sense  of  touch  my  remarks 
on  the  sense  of  sight.  But  outside  the  data  of 
sight  and  touch  there  are  other  sensations  which 
contribute  as  much  and  more  than  they  do  to  the 
genesis  of  the  concept  of  space.  They  are  those 
which  everybody  knows,  which  accompany  all  our 
movements,  and  which  we  usually  call  muscular 
sensations.  The  corresponding  framework  con 
stitutes  what  may  be  called  motor  space.  Each 
muscle  gives  rise  to  a  special  sensation  which  may 
be  increased  or  diminished  so  that  the  aggregate 
of  our  muscular  sensations  will  depend  upon  as 
many  variables  as  we  have  muscles.  From  this 
point  of  view  motor  space  would  have  as  many  dimen 
sions  as  we  have  muscles.  I  know  that  it  is  said 
that  if  the  muscular  sensations  contribute  to  form 
the  concept  of  space,  it  is  because  we  have  the 
sense  of  the  direction  of  each  movement,  and  that 
this  is  an  integral  part  of  the  sensation.  If  this 
were  so,  and  if  a  muscular  sense  could  not  be 
aroused  unless  it  were  accompanied  by  this  geo 
metrical  sense  of  direction,  geometrical  space 
would  certainly  be  a  form  imposed  upon  our 
sensitiveness.  But  I  do  not  see  this  at  all  when 
I  analyse  my  sensations.  What  I  do  see  is  th-at 
the  sensations  which  correspond  to  movements  in 


56  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

the  same  direction  are  connected  in  my  mind  by  a 
simple  association  of  ideas.  It  is  to  this  association 
that  what  we  call  the  sense  of  direction  is  reduced. 
We  cannot  therefore  discover  this  sense  in  a  single 
sensation.  This  association  is  extremely  complex, 
for  the  contraction  of  the  same  muscle  may  cor 
respond,  according  to  the  position  of  the  limbs, 
to  very  different  movements  of  direction.  More 
over,  it  is  evidently  acquired  ;  it  is  like  all 
associations  of  ideas,  the  result  of  a  habit.  This 
habit  itself  is  the  result  of  a  very  large  number  of 
experiments,  and  no  doubt  if  the  education  of  our 
senses  had  taken  place  in  a  different  medium, 
where  we  would  have  been  subjected  to  different 
impressions,  then  contrary  habits  would  have  been 
acquired,  and  our  muscular  sensations  would  have 
been  associated  according  to  other  laws. 

Characteristics  of  Representative  Space. — Thus  re 
presentative  space  in  its  triple  form  —  visual, 
tactile,  and  motor — differs  essentially  from  geo 
metrical  space.  It  is  neither  homogeneous  nor 
isotropic;  we  cannot  even  say  that  it  is  of  three 
dimensions.  It  is  often  said  that  we  "  project " 
into  geometrical  space  the  objects  of  our  external 
perception;  that  we  "localise"  them.  Now,  has 
that  any  meaning,  and  if  so  what  is  that  meaning  ? 
Does  it  mean  that  we  represent  to  ourselves  ex 
ternal  objects  in  geometrical  space  ?  Our  repre 
sentations  are  only  the  reproduction  of  our  sensa 
tions;  they  canSe*-  tnerefore  be  arranged  in  the 
same  framework — that  is  to  say,  in  representative  ' 


SPACE    AND    GEOMETRY.  57 

space.  It  is  also  just  as  impossible  for  us  to  repre 
sent  to  ourselves  external  objects  in  geometrical^ 
space,  as  it  is  impossible  for  a  painter  to  paint  on 
a  flat  surface  objects  with  their  three  dimensions. 
Representative  space  is  only  an  image  of  geo 
metrical  space,  an  image  deformed  by  a  kind  of 
perspective,  and  we  can  only  represent  to  our 
selves  objects  by  making  them  obey  the  laws  of 
this  perspective.  Thus  we  do  not  represent  to  our 
selves  external  bodies  in  geometrical  space,  but  we 
reason  about  these  bodies  as  if  they  were  situated 
in  geometrical  space.  When  it  is  said,  on  the 
other  hand,  that  we  "localise"  such  an  object  in 
such  a  point  of  space,  what  does  it  mean  ?  // 
simply  means  that  we  represent  to  ourselves  the  move 
ments  that  must  take  place  to  reach  that  object.  And 
it  does  not  mean  that  to  represent  to  ourselves 
these  movements  they  must  be  projected  into 
space,  and  that  the  concept  of  space  must  therefore 
pre-exist.  When  I  say  that  we  represent  to  our 
selves  these  movements,  I  only  mean  that  we 
represent  to  ourselves  the  muscular  sensations 
which  accompany  them,  and  which  have  no 
geometrical  character,  and  which  therefore  in  no 
way  imply  the  pre-existence  of  the  concept  of 
space. 

Changes  of  State  and  Changes  of  Position. — But, 
it  may  be  said,  if  the  concept  of  geometrical  space 
is  not  imposed  upon  our  minds,  and  if,  on  the 
other  hand,  none  of  our  sensations  can  furnish  us 
with  that  concept,  how  then  did  it  ever  come  into 


58  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

existence  ?  This  is  what  we  have  now  to  examine, 
and  it  will  take  some  time;  but  I  can  sum  up  in  a 
few  words  the  attempt  at  explanation  which  I  am 
going  to  develop.  None  of  our  sensations,  if  isolated, 
could  have  brought  us  to  the  concept  of  space ;  we  are 
brought  to  it  solely  by  studying  the  laws  by  which  those 

0  sensations  succeed  one  another.     We  see  at  first  that 
.  .  — r--lta^-^^*-~^^' 

our  impressions  are  subject  to  change;  but  among 

the  changes  that  we  ascertain,  we  are  very  soon 
led  to  make  a  distinction.  Sometimes  we  say  that 
\  thejDbjects,  the  causes  of  these  impressions,  have 
changed  their  state,  sometimes  that  they  have 
changed  their  position,  that  they  have  only  been 
displaced.  Whether  an  object  changes  its  state  or 
only  its  position,  this  is  always  translated  for  us  in 
the  same  manner,  by  a  modification  in  an  aggregate 
of  impressions.  How  then  have  we  been  enabled 
to  distinguish  them  ?  If  there  were  only  change 
of  position,  we  could  restore  the  primitive  aggre 
gate  of  impressions  by  making  movements  which 
would  confront  us  with  the  movable  object  in 
the  same  relative  situation.  WTe  thus  correct  the 
modification  which  was  produced,  and  we  re 
establish  the  initial  state  by  an  inverse  modifica 
tion.  If,  for  example,  it  were  a  question  of  the 
sight,  and  if  an  object  be  displaced  before  our 
eyes,  we  can  "  follow  it  with  the  eye,"  and  retain 
its  image  on  the  same  point  of  the  retina  by 
appropriate  movements  of  the  eyeball.  These 
movements  we  are  conscious  of  because  they  are 
voluntary,  and  because  they  are  accompanied  by 


SPACE    AND    GEOMETRY.  5Q 

muscular  sensations.  But  that  does  not  mean 
that  we  represent  them  to  ourselves  in  geometrical 
space.  So  what  characterises  change  of  position, 
what  distinguishes  it  from  change  of  state,  is  that 
it  can  always  be  corrected  by  this  means.  It  may 
therefore  happen  that  we  pass  from  the  aggregate 
of  impressions  A  to  the  aggregate  B  in  two  differ 
ent  ways.  First,  involuntarily  and  without  ex 
periencing  muscular  sensations — which  happens 
when  it  is  the  object  that  is  displaced;  secondly, 
voluntarily,  and  with  muscular  sensation — which 
happens  when  the  object  is  motionless,  but  when 
we  displace  ourselves  in  such  a  way  that  the 
object  has  relative  motion  with  respect  to  us.  If 
this  be  so,  the  translation  of  the  aggregate  A  to 
the  aggregate  B  is  only  a  change  of  position.  It 
follows  that  sight  and  touch  could  not  have  given 
us  the  idea  of  space  without  the  help  of  the 
"  muscular  sense."  Not  only  could  this  concept 
not  be  derived  from  a  single  sensation,  or  even  from 
a  series  of  sensations;  but  a  motionless  being  could 
never  have  acquired  it,  because,  not  being  able  to 
correct  by  his  movements  the  effects  of  the  change 
of  position  of  external  objects,  he  would  have  had 
no  reason  to  distinguish  them  from  changes  of 
state.  Nor  would  he  have  been  able  to  acquire 
it  if  his  movements  had  not  been  voluntary, 
or  if  they  were  unaccompanied  by  any  sensations 
whatever. 

Conditions    of    Compensation. — How   is    such    a 
compensation    possible    in    such   a  way  that    two 


60  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

changes,  otherwise  mutually  independent,  may  be 
reciprocally  corrected  ?  A  mind  already  familiar 
with  geometry  would  reason  as  follows: — If  there 
is  to  be  compensation,  the  different  parts  of  the 
external  object  on  the  one  hand,  and  the  different 
organs  of  our  senses  on  the  other,  must  be  in  the 
same  relative  position  after  the  double  change. 
And  for  that  to  be  the  case,  the  different  parts  of 
the  external  body  on  the  one  hand,  and  the  differ 
ent  organs  of  our  senses  on  the  other,  must  have 
the  same  relative  position  to  each  other  after  the 
double  change;  and  so  with  the  different  parts  of 
our  body  with  respect  to  each  other.  In  other 
words,  the  external  object  in  the  first  change  must 
be  displaced  as  an  invariable  solid  would  be  dis 
placed,  and  it  must  also  be  so  with  the  whole  of  our 
body  in  the  second  change,  which  is  to  correct  the 
first.  Under  these  conditions  compensation  may 
be  produced.  But  we  who  as  yet  know  nothing  of 
geometry,  whose  ideas  of  space  are  not  yet  formed, 
we  cannot  reason  in  this  way — we  cannot  predict 
a  priori  if  compensation  is  possible.  But  experi 
ment  shows  us  that  it  sometimes  does  take  place, 
and  we  start  from  this  experimental  fact  in  order 
to  distinguish  changes  of  state  from  changes  of 
position. 

Solid  Bodies  and  Geometry. — Among  surrounding 
objects  there  are  some  which  frequently  experience 
displacements  that  may  be  thus  corrected  by  a 
correlative  movement  of  our  own  body — namely, 
solid  bodies.  The  other  objects,  whose  form  is  vari- 


SPACE    AND    GEOMETRY.  6l 

able,  only  in  exceptional  circumstances  undergo 
similar  displacement  (change  of  position  without 
change  of  form).  When  the  displacement  of  a 
body  takes  place  with  deformation,  we  can  no 
longer  by  appropriate  movements  place  the  organs 
of  our  body  in  the  same  relative  situation  with 
respect  to  this  body;  we  can  no  longer,  therefore, 
reconstruct  the  primitive  aggregate  of  impressions. 

It  is  only  later,  and  after  a  series  of  newr  experi 
ments,  that  we  learn  how  to  decompose  a  body  of 
variable  form  into  smaller  elements  such  that  each 
is  displaced  approximately  according  to  the  same 
laws  as  solid  bodies.  We  thus  distinguish  "de 
formations"  from  other  changes  of  state.  In  these 
deformations  each  element  undergoes  a  simple 
change  of  position  which  may  be  corrected;  but  the 
modification  of  the  aggregate  is  more  profound, 
and  can  no  longer  be  corrected  by  a  correlative 
movement.  Such  a  concept  is  very  complex  even 
at  this  stage,  and  has  been  relatively  slow  in 
its  appearance.  It  would  not  have  been  conceived 
at  all  had  not  the  observation  of  solid  bodies  shown 
us  beforehand  how  to  distinguish  changes  of 
position. 

//,  then,  there  were  no  solid  bodies  in  nature  there 
would  be  no  geometry. 

Another  remark  deserves  a  moment's  attention. 
Suppose  a  solid  body  to  occupy  successively  the 
positions  a  and  /?;  in  the  first  position  it  will  give 
us  an  aggregate  of  impressions  A,  and  in  the  second 
position  the  aggregate  of  impressions  B.  Now  let 


62  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

there  be  a  second  solid  body,  of  qualities  entirely 
different  from  the  first — of  different  colour,  for 
instance.  Assume  it  to  pass  from  the  position  u, 
where  it  gives  us  the  aggregate  of  impressions  A'  to 
the  position  /?,  where  it  gives  the  aggregate  of 
impressions  B'.  In  general,  the  aggregate  A  will 
have  nothing  in  common  with  the  aggregate  A', 
nor  will  the  aggregate  B  have  anything  in  common 
with  the  aggregate  B'.  The  transition  from  the 
aggregate  A  to  the  aggregate  B,  and  that  of  the 
aggregate  A'  to  the  aggregate  B',  are  therefore 
two  changes  which  in  themselves  have  in  general 
nothing  in  common.  Yet  \ve  consider  both 
these  changes  as  displacements;  and,  further,  we 
consider  them  the  same  displacement.  How  can 
this  be  ?  It  is  simply  because  they  may  be  both 
corrected  by  the  same  correlative  movement  of  our 
body.  "  Correlative  movement,"  therefore,  con 
stitutes  the  sole  connection  between  two  phenomena 
which  otherwise  we  should  never  have  dreamed  of 
connecting. 

On  the  other  hand,  our  body,  thanks  to  the 
number  of  its  articulations  and  muscles,  may  have 
a  multitude  of  different  movements,  but  all  are  not 
capable  of  "  correcting  "  a  modification  of  external 
objects ;  those  alone  are  capable  of  it  in  which 
our  whole  body,  or  at  least  all  those  in  which 
the  organs  of  our  senses  enter  into  play  are 
displaced  en  bloc — i.e.,  without  any  variation  of 
their  relative  positions,  as  in  the  case  of  a  solid 
body. 


SPACE    AND    GEOMETRY.  63 

To  sum  up : 

1.  In  the  first  place,  we  distinguish  two  categories 
of  phenomena : — The  first  involuntary,  unaccom 
panied  by  muscular  sensations,  and  attributed  to 
external  objects — they  are  external   changes;  the 
second,  of  opposite  character  and  attributed  to  the 
movements  of  our  own  body,  are  internal  changes. 

2.  We  notice  that  certain  changes  of  each   in 
these  categories  may  be  corrected  by  a  correlative 
change  of  the  other  category. 

3.  We  distinguish  among  external  changes  those 
that  have  a  correlative    in   the   other  category— 
which  we  call  displacements;  and  in  the  same  way 
we  distinguish  among  the  internal  changes  those 
which  have  a  correlative  in  the  first  category. 

Thus  by  means  of  this  reciprocity  is  defined  a 
particular  class  of  phenomena  called  displace 
ments.  The  laws  of  these  phenomena  are  the  object  of 
geometry. 

Law  of  Homogeneity. — The  first  of  these  laws 
is  the  law  of  homogeneity.  Suppose  that  by  an 
external  change  we  pass  from  the  aggregate  of 
impressions  A  to  the  aggregate  B,  and  that  then 
this  change  «  is  corrected  by  a  correlative 
voluntary  movement  ft  so  that  we  are  brought 
back  to  the  aggregate  A.  Suppose  nowr  that 
another  external  change  a  brings  us  again  from 
the  aggregate  A  to  the  aggregate  B.  Experiment 
then  shows  us  that  this  change  u',  like  the  change 
u,  may  be  corrected  by  a  voluntary  correlative 
movement  /3',  and  that  this  movement  //  corre- 


64  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

spends  to  the  same  muscular  sensations  as  the 
movement  fi  which  corrected  a. 

This  fact  is  usually  enunciated  as  follows  : — Space 
is  homogeneous  and  isotropic.  We  may  also  say  that  a 
movement  which  is  once  produced  may  be  repeated 
a  second  and  a  third  time,  and  so  on,  without  any 
variation  of  its  properties.  In  the  first  chapter,  in 
which  \ve  discussed  the  nature  of  mathematical 
reasoning,  we  saw  the  importance  that  should  be 
attached  to  the  possibility  of  repeating  the  same 
operation  indefinitely.  The  virtue  of  mathematical 
reasoning  is  due  to  this  repetition;  by  means  of  the 
law  of  homogeneity  geometrical  facts  are  appre 
hended.  To  be  complete,  to  the  law  of  homo 
geneity  must  be  added  a  multitude  of  other  laws, 
into  the  details  of  which  I  do  not  propose  to  enter, 
but  which  mathematicians  sum  up  by  saying  that 
these  displacements  form  a  '"group." 

The  Non-Euclidean  World. — -If  geometrical  space 
were  a  framework  imposed  on  each  of  our  repre 
sentations  considered  individually,  it  would  be 
impossible  to  represent  to  ourselves  an  image 
without  this  framework,  and  we  should  be  quite 
unable  to  change  our  geometry.  But  this  is  not 
the  case ;  geometry  is  only  the  summary  of  the 
laws  by  which  these  images  succeed  each  other. 
There  is  nothing,  therefore,  to  prevent  us  from 
imagining  a  series  of  representations,  similar  in 
every  way  to  our  ordinary  representations,  but 
succeeding  one  another  according  to  laws  which 
differ  from  those  to  which  we  are  accustomed.  We 


SPACE    AND    GEOMETRY.  65 

may  thus  conceive  that  beings  whose  education 
has  taken  place  in  a  medium  in  which  those  laws 
would  be  so  different,  might  have  a  very  different 
geometry  from  ours. 

Suppose,  for  example,  a  world  enclosed  in  a  large 
sphere  and  subject  to  the  following  laws : — The  ^ 
temperature  is  not  uniform;  it  is  greatest  at  the^uir" 
centre,  and  gradually  decreases  as  we  move  towards 
the  circumference  of  the  sphere,  where  it  is  absolute 
zero.  The  law  of  this  temperature  is  as  follows  : — 
If  R  be  the  radius  of  the  sphere,  and  r  the  distance 
of  the  point  considered  from  the  centre,  the  abso 
lute  temperature  will  be  proportional  to  R2 — r2. 
Further,  I  shall  suppose  that  in  this  world  all  bodies 
have  the  same  co-efficient  of  dilatation,  so  that  the 
linear  dilatation  of  any  body  is  proportional  to  its 
absolute  temperature.  Finally,  I  shall  assume  that 
a  body  transported  from  one  point  to  another  of 
different  temperature  is  instantaneously  in  thermal 
equilibrium  with  its  new  environment.  There  is 
nothing  in  these  hypotheses  either  contradictory 
or  unimaginable.  A  moving  object  will  become 
smaller  and  smaller  as  it  approaches  the  circum 
ference  of  the  sphere.  Let  us  observe,  in  the  first 
place,  that  although  from  the  point  of  view  of  our 
ordinary  geometry  this  wTorld  is  finite,  to  its  inhabit 
ants  it  will  appear  infinite.  As  they  approach  the 
surface  of  the  sphere  they  become  colder,  and  at 
the  same  time  smaller  and  smaller.  The  steps 
they  take  are  therefore  also  smaller  and  smaller, 
so  that  they  can  never  reach  the  boundary  of  the 

5 


66  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

//  sphere.  If  to  us  geometry  is  only  the  study  of  the 
;/  laws  according  to  which  invariable  solids  move,  to 
j|  these  imaginary  beings  it  will  be  the  study  of  the 
I  j  laws  of  motion  of  solids  deformed  by  the  differences 
j,  /  of  temperature  alluded  to. 

No  doubt,  in  our  world,  natural  solids  also  ex 
perience  variations  of  form  and  volume  due  to 
differences  of  temperature.  But  in  laying  the 
foundations  of  geometry  we  neglect  these  varia 
tions;  for  besides  being  but  small  they  are  irregular, 
and  consequently  appear  to  us  to  be  accidental. 
In  our  hypothetical  world  this  will  no  longer  be 
the  case,  the  variations  will  obey  very  simple  and 
regular  laws.  On  the  other  hand,  the  different 
solid  parts  of  which  the  bodies  of  these  inhabitants 
are  composed  will  undergo  the  same  variations  of 
form  and  volume. 

Let  me  make  another  hypothesis:  suppose  that 
light  passes  through  media  of  different  refractive 
indices,  such  that  the  index  of  refraction  is  inversely 
proportional  to  R2 — r2.  Under  these  conditions  it 
is  clear  that  the  rays  of  light  will  no  longer  be 
rectilinear  but  circular.  To  justify  what  has  been  • 
said,  we  have  to  prove  that  certain  changes  in  the 
position  of  external  objects  may  be  corrected  by 
correlative  movements  of  the  beings  which  inhabit 
this  imaginary  world;  and  in  such  a  way  as  to 
restore  the  primitive  aggregate  of  the  impressions 
experienced  by  these  sentient  beings.  Suppose, 
for  example,  that  an  object  is  displaced  and 
deformed,  not  like  an  invariable  solid,  but  like  a 


SPACE    AND    GEOMETRY.  67 

solid  subjected  to  unequal  dilatations  in  exact  con 
formity  with  the  law  of  temperature  assumed 
above.  To  use  an  abbreviation,  we  shall  call  such 
a  movement  a  non-Euclidean  displacement. 

If  a  sentient  being  be  in  the  neighbourhood  of 
such  a  displacement  of  the  object,  his  impressions 
will  be  modified;  but  by  moving  in  a  suitable 
manner,  he  may  reconstruct  them.  For  this 
purpose,  all  that  is  required  is  that  the  aggregate 
of  the  sentient  being  and  the  object,  considered  as 
forming  a  single  body,  shall  experience  one  of  those 
special  displacements  which  I  have  just  called  non- 
Euclidean.  This  is  possible  if  we  suppose  that  the 
limbs  of  these  beings  dilate  according  to  the  same 
laws  as  the  other  bodies  of  the  world  they  inhabit. 

Although  from  the  point  of  view  of  our  ordinary 
geometry  there  is  a  deformation  of  the  bodies  in 
this  displacement,  and  although  their  different 
parts  are  no  longer  in  the  same  relative  position, 
nevertheless  we  shall  see  that  the  impressions  of 
the  sentient  being  remain  the  same  as  before ;  in 
fact,  though  the  mutual  distances  of  the  different 
parts  have  varied,  yet  the  parts  which  at  first  were 
in  contact  are  still  in  contact.  It  follows  that 
tactile  impressions  will  be  unchanged.  On  the 
other  hand,  from  the  hypothesis  as  to  refraction 
and  the  curvature  of  the  rays  of  light,  visual  im 
pressions  will  also  be  unchanged.  These  imaginary 
beings  will  therefore  be  led  to  classify  the  pheno 
mena  they  observe,  and  to  distinguish  among  them 
the  "  changes  of  position,"  which  may  be  corrected 


68  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

by  a  voluntary  correlative  movement,  just  as  we 
do. 

If  they  construct  a  geometry,  it  will  not  be  like 
ours,  which  is  the  study  of  the  movements  of  our 
invariable  solids;  it  will  be  the  study  of  the 
changes  of  position  which  they  will  have  thus 
distinguished,  and  will  be  "  non-Euclidean  dis 
placements,"  and  this  will  be  non-Euclidean  geo 
metry.  So  that  beings  like  ourselves,  educated  in 
such  a  world,  will  not  have  the  same  geometry  as 
ours. 

The  World  of  Four  Dimensions. — Just  as  we  have 
pictured  to  ourselves  a  non-Euclidean  world,  so  we 
may  picture  a  world  of  four  dimensions. 

The  sense  of  light,  even  with  one  eye,  together 
with  the  muscular  sensations  relative  to  the  move 
ments  of  the  eyeball,  will  suffice  to  enable  us  to 
conceive  of  space  of  three  dimensions.  The  images 
of  external  objects  are  painted  on  the  retina,  which 
is  a  plane  of  two  dimensions;  these  are  perspectives. 
But  as  eye  and  objects  are  movable,  we  see  in 
succession  different  perspectives  of  the  same  body 
taken  from  different  points  of  view.  We  find  at 
the  same  time  that  the  transition  from  one  per 
spective  to  another  is  often  accompanied  by 
muscular  sensations.  If  the  transition  from  the 
perspective  A  to  the  perspective  B,  and  that  of  the 
perspective  A'  to  the  perspective  B'  are  accom 
panied  by  the  same  muscular  sensations,  we 
connect  them  as  we  do  other  operations  of  the 
same  nature.  Then  when  we  study  the  laws 


SPACE    AND    GEOMETRY.  69 

according  to  which  these  operations  are  com 
bined,  we  see  that  they  form  a  group,  which  has 
the  same  structure  as  that  of  the  movements  of 
invariable  solids.  Now,  we  have  seen  that  it  is 
from  the  properties  of  this  group  that  we  derive 
the  idea  of  geometrical  space  and  that  of  three 
dimensions.  We  thus  understand  how  these 
perspectives  gave  rise  to  the  conception  of  three 
dimensions,  although  each  perspective  is  of  only 
two  dimensions, — because  they  succeed  each  other 
according  to  certain  laws.  Well,  in  the  same  way 
that  we  draw  the  perspective  of  a  three-dimen 
sional  figure  on  a  plane,  so  we  can  draw  that  of  a 
four-dimensional  figure  on  a  canvas  of  three  (or 
two)  dimensions.  To  a  geometer  this  is  but  child's 
play.  We  can  even  draw  several  perspectives  of 
the  same  figure  from  several  different  points  of 
view.  We  can  easily  represent  to  ourselves  these 
perspectives,  since  they  are  of  only  three  dimen 
sions.  Imagine  that  the  different  perspectives  of 
one  and  the  same  object  to  occur  in  succession, 
and  that  the  transition  from  one  to  the  other  is 
accompanied  by  muscular  sensations.  It  is  under 
stood  that  we  shall  consider  two  of  these  transitions 
as  two  operations  of  the  same  nature  when  they 
are  associated  with  the  same  muscular  sensations. 
There  is  nothing,  then,  to  prevent  us  from  imagin 
ing  that  these  operations  are  combined  according 
to  any  law  we  choose — for  instance,  by  forming 
a  group  with  the  same  structure  as  that  of  the 
movements  of  an  invariable  four-dimensional  solid. 


70  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

In  this  there  is  nothing  that  we  cannot  represent 
to  ourselves,  and,  moreover,  these  sensations  are 
those  which  a  being  would  experience  \vho  has  a 
retina  of  two  dimensions,  and  who  may  be  dis 
placed  in  space  of  four  dimensions.  In  this  sense 
we  may  say  that  we  can  represent  to  ourselves  the 
fourth  dimension. 

Conclusions. — It  is  seen  that  experiment  plays  a 
considerable  role  in  the  genesis  of  geometry;  but 
it  would  be  a  mistake  to  conclude  from  that  that 
geometry  is,  even  in  part,  an  experimental  science. 
If  it  were  experimental,  it  would  only  be  ap 
proximative  and  provisory.  And  what  a  rough 
approximation  it  would  be !  Geometry  would  be 
only  the  study  of  the  movements  of  solid  bodies; 
but,  in  reality,  it  is  not  concerned  with  natural 
solids :  its  object  is  certain  ideal  solids,  absolutely 
invariable,  which  are  but  a  greatly  simplified  and 
very  remote  image  of  them.  The  concept  of  these 
ideal  bodies  is  entirely  mental,  and  experiment  is 
but  the  opportunity  which  enables  us  to  reach  the 
idea.  The  object  of  geometry  is  the  study  of  a 
particular  " group";  but  the  general  concept  of 
group  pre-exists  in  our  minds,  at  least  potentially. 
It  is  imposed  on  us  not  as  a  form  of  our  sensitive 
ness,  but  as  a  form  of  our  understanding;  only, 
from  among  all  possible  groups,  we  must  choose 
one  that  will  be  the  standard,  so  to  speak,  to 
which  we  shall  refer  natural  phenomena. 

Experiment  guides  us  in  this  choice,  which  it 
does  not  impose  on  us.  It  tells  us  not  what  is  the 


SPACE   AND    GEOMETRY.  71 

truest,  but  what  is  the  most  convenient  geometry. 
It  will  be  noticed  that  my  description  of  these 
fantastic  worlds  has  required  no  language  other 
than  that  of  ordinary  geometry.  Then,  were  we 
transported  to  those  worlds,  there  would  be  no 
need  to  change  that  language.  Beings  educated 
there  would  no  doubt  find  it  more  convenient  to 
create  a  geometry  different  from  ours,  and  better 
adapted  to  their  impressions;  but  as  for  us,  in  the 
presence  of  the  same  impressions,  it  is  certain  that 
we  should  not  find  it  more  convenient  to  make  a 
change. 


CHAPTER  V. 

EXPERIMENT    AND    GEOMETRY. 

1.  I  have  on  several  occasions  in  the  preceding 
pages  tried  to  show  how  the  principles  of  geometry 
are  not  experimental  facts,  and  that  in  particular 
Euclid's  postulate  cannot  be  proved  by  experiment. 
However   convincing    the    reasons   already    given 
may  appear  to  me,  I  feel  I  must  dwell  upon  them, 
because    there    is   a   profoundly   false   conception 
deeply  rooted  in  many  minds. 

2.  Think  of  a  material  circle,  measure  its  radius 
and  circumference,  and  see  if  the  ratio  of  the  two 
lengths  is  equal  to  ~.     What  have  we  done  ?     We 
have  made  an  experiment  on  the  properties  of  the 
matter  with  which  this  roundness  has  been  realised, 
and  of  which  the  measure  we  used  is  made. 

3.  Geometry  and  Astronomy. — The  same  question 
may  also  be  asked  in  another  way.     If   Lobat- 
schewsky's  geometry  is  true,  the  parallax  of  a  very 
distant  star  will  be  finite.     If  Riemann's  is  true,  it 
will   be  negative.     These   are   the   results   which 
seem  within  the  reach   of  experiment,  and  it  is 
hoped  that  astronomical  observations  may  enable 
us  to  decide  between  the  -twer  geometries.     But 


EXPERIMENT   AND   GEOMETRY.  73 

what  we  call  a  straight  line  in  astronomy  is  simply 
the  path  of  a  ray  of  light.  If,  therefore,  we  were 
to  discover  negative  parallaxes,  or  to  prove  that  all 
parallaxes  are  higher  than  a  certain  limit,  we 
should  have  a  choice  between  two  conclusions: 
we  could  give  up  Euclidean  geometry,  or  modify 
the  laws  of  optics,  and  suppose  that  light  is  not 
rigorously  propagated  in  a  straight  line.  It  is 
needless  to  add  that  every  one  would  look  upon 
this  solution  as  the  more  advantageous.  Euclidean 
geometry,  therefore,  has  nothing  to  fear  from  fresh 
experiments. 

4.  Can  we  maintain  that  certain  phenomena 
which  are  possible  in  Euclidean  space  would  be 
impossible  in  non-Euclidean  space,  so  that  experi 
ment  in  establishing  these  phenomena  would 
directly  contradict  the  non-Euclidean  hypothesis? 
I  think  that  such  a  question  cannot  be  seriously 
asked.  To  me  it  is  exactly  equivalent  to  the  fol 
lowing,  the  absurdity  of  which  is  obvious: — There 
are  lengths  which  can  be  expressed  in  metres  and 
centimetres,  but  cannot  be  measured  in  toises,  feet, 
and  inches;  so  that  experiment,  by  ascertaining  the 
existence  of  these  lengths,  would  directly  contra 
dict  this  hypothesis,  that  there  are  toises  divided 
into  six  feet.  Let  us  look  at  the  question  a  little 
more  closely.  I  assume  that  the  straight  line  in 
Euclidean  space  possesses  any  two  properties, 
which  I  shall  call  A  and  B;  that  in  non-Euclidean 
space  it  still  possesses  the  property  A,  but  no 
longer  possesses  the  property  B;  and,  finally,  I 


74  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

assume  that  in  both  Euclidean  and  non-Euclidean 
space  the  straight  line  is  the  only  line  that  pos 
sesses  the  property  A.  If  this  were  so,  experiment 
would  be  able  to  decide  between  the  hypotheses  of 
Euclid  and  Lobatschewsky.  It  would  be  found 
that  some  concrete  object,  upon  which  wre  can 
experiment — for  example,  a  pencil  of  rays  of  light — 
possesses  the  property  A.  We  should  conclude 
that  it  is  rectilinear,  and  we  should  then  endeavour 
to  find  out  if  it  does,  or  does  not,  possess  the  pro 
perty  B.  But  it  is  not  so.  There  exists  no 
property  which  can,  like  this  property  A,  be  an 
absolute  criterion  enabling  us  to  recognise  the 
straight  line,  and  to  distinguish  it  from  every 
other  line.  Shall  we  say,  for  instance,  "  This  pro 
perty  will  be  the  following:  the  straight  line  is  a 
line  such  that  a  figure  of  which  this  line  is  a  part 
can  move  without  the  mutual  distances  of  its 
points  varying,  and  in  such  a  way  that  all  the 
points  in  this  straight  line  remain  fixed"?  Now, 
this  is  a  property  which  in  either  Euclidean  or 
non-Euclidean  space  belongs  to  the  straight  line, 
and  belongs  to  it  alone.  But  how  can  we  ascer 
tain  by  experiment  if  it  belongs  to  any  particular 
concrete  object  ?  Distances  must  be  measured, 
and  how  shall  we  know  that  any  concrete  magni 
tude  which  I  have  measured  with  my  material 
instrument  really  represents  the  abstract  distance? 
We  have  only  removed  the  difficulty  a  little  farther 
off.  In  reality,  the  property  that  I  have  just 
enunciated  is  not  a  property  of  the  straight  line 


EXPERIMENT   AND    GEOMETRY.  75 

alone;  it  is  a  property  of  the  straight  line  and  of 
distance.  For  it  to  serve  as  an  absolute  criterion, 
we  must  be  able  to  show,  not  only  that  it  does  not 
also  belong  to  any  other  line  than  the  straight  line 
and  to  distance,  but  also  that  it  does  not  belong 
to  any  other  line  than  the  straight  line,  and  to  any 
other  magnitude  than  distance.  NOWT,  that  is  not 
true,  and  if  we  are  not  convinced  by  these  con 
siderations,  I  challenge  any  one  to  give  me  a 
concrete  experiment  which  can  be  interpreted  in 
the  Euclidean  system,  and  which  cannot  be  inter 
preted  in  the  system  of  Lobatschewsky.  As  I 
am  well  aware  that  this  challenge  will  never  be 
accepted,  I  may  conclude  that  no  experiment  will 
ever  be  in  contradiction  with  Euclid's  postulate; 
but,  on  the  other  hand,  no  experiment  will  ever  be 
in  contradiction  with  Lobatschewsky's  postulate. 

5.  But  it  is  not  sufficient  that  the  Euclidean 
(or  non- Euclidean)  geometry  can, 'ever  be  directly 
contradicted  by  experiment.  Nor  could  it  happen 
that  it  can  only  agree  with  experiment  by  a  viola 
tion  of  the  principle  of  sufficient  reason,  and  of 
that  of  the  relativity  of  space.  Let  me  explain 
myself.  Consider  any  material  system  whatever. 
We  have  to  consider  on  the  one  hand  the  "  state  " 
of  the  various  bodies  of  this  system — for  example, 
their  temperature,  their  electric  potential,  etc.; 
and  on  the  other  hand  their  position  in  space. 
And  among  the  data  which  enable  us  to  define 
this  position  we  distinguish  the  mutual  distances 
of  these  bodies  that  define  their  relative  positions, 


76  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

and  the  conditions  which  define  the  absolute  posi 
tion  of  the  system  and  its  absolute  orientation  in 
space.  The  law  of  the  phenomena  which  will  be 
produced  in  this  system  will  depend  on  the  state 
of  these  bodies,  and  on  their  mutual  distances ; 
but  because  of  the  relativity  and  the  inertia  of 
space,  they  will  not  depend  on  the  absolute  posi 
tion  and  orientation  of  the  system.  In  other 
words,  the  state  of  the  bodies  and  their  mutual 
distances  at_any  moment  will  solelyjiepend  on 
the  state  of  the^  same  bodies^  ajod  on  their  mutual 
distances  at  the  initial  moment,  but  wrill  in  no 
way  depend  on  the  absolute  initial  position  of 
the  system  and  of  its  absolute  initial  orientation. 
This  is  what  we  shall  call,  for  the  sake  of 
abbreviation,  the  law  of  relativity, 

So  far  I  have  spoken  as  a  Euclidean  geometer. 
But  I  have  said  that  an  experiment,  whatever  it 
may  be,  requires  an  interpretation  on  the  Euclidean 
hypothesis;  it  equally  requires  one  on  the  non- 
Euclidean  hypothesis.  Well,  we  have  made  a  series 
of  experiments.  We  have  interpreted  them  on  the 
Euclidean  hypothesis,  and  we  have  recognised 
that  these  experiments  thus  interpreted  do  not 
violate  this  "law  of  relativity."  We  now  interpret 
them  on  the  non-Euclidean  hypothesis.  This  is 
always  possible,  only  the  non-Euclidean  distances 
of  our  different  bodies  in  this  new  interpretation 
will  not  generally  be  the  same  as  the  Euclidean 
distances  in  the  primitive  interpretation.  Will 
our  experiment  interpreted  in  this  new  manner 


EXPERIMENT    AND    GEOMETRY.  77 

be  still  in  agreement  with  our  "  law  of  relativity," 
and  if  this  agreement  had  not  taken  place,  would 
we  not  still  have  the  right  to  say  that  experiment 
has  proved  the  falsity  of  non- Euclidean  geometry? 
It  is  easy  to  see  that  this  is  an  idle  fear.  In  fact, 
to  apply  the  law  of  relativity  in  all  its  rigour,  it 
must  be  applied  to  the  entire  universe ;  for  if  we 
were  to  consider  only  a  part  of  the  universe,  and 
if  the  absolute  position  of  this  part  were  to  vary, 
the  distances  of  the  other  bodies  of  the  universe 
would  equally  vary ;  their  influence  on  the  part  of 
the  universe  considered  might  therefore  increase 
or  diminish,  and  this  might  modify  the  laws  of 
the  phenomena  which  take  place  in  it.  But  if 
our  system  is  the  entire  universe,  experiment  is 
powerless  to  give  us  any  opinion  on  its  position 
and  its  absolute  orientation  in  space.  All  that 
our  instruments,  however  perfect  they  may  be, 
can  let  us  know  will  be  the  state  of  the  different 
parts  of  the  universe,  and  their  mutual  distances. 
Hence,  our  law  of  relativity  may  be  enunciated  as 
follows: — The  readings  that  we  can  make  with  our 
instruments  at  any  given  moment  will  depen 
only  on  the  readings  that  we  were  able  to  make 
on  the  same  instruments  at  the  initial  moment, 
Now  such  an  enunciation  is  independent  of  all 
interpretation  by  experiments.  If  the  law  is  true 
in  the  Euclidean  interpretation,  it  will  be  also  true 
in  the  non-Euclidean  interpretation.  Allow  me 
to  make  a  short  digression  on  this  point.  I  have 
spoken  above  of  the  data  which  define  the  position 


78  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

of  the  different  bodies  of  the  system.  I  might  also 
have  spoken  of  those  which  define  their  velocities. 
I  should  then  have  to  distinguish  the  velocity  with 
which  the  mutual  distances  of  the  different  bodies 
are  changing,  and  on  the  other  hand  the  velocities 
of  translation  and  rotation  of  the  system ;  that  is 
to  say,  the  velocities  with  which  its  absolute  posi 
tion  and  orientation  are  changing.  For  the  mind 
to  be  fully  satisfied,  the  law  ^f  relativity  would 
have  to  be  enunciated  as  follows: — The  state  of 
bodies  and  their  mutual  distances  at  any  given 
moment,  as  well  as  the  velocities  with  which 
those  distances  are  changing  at  that  moment, 
will  depend  only  on  the  state  of  those  bodies, 
on  their  mutual  distances  at  the  initial  moment, 
and  on  the  velocities  with  which  those  distances 
were  changing  at  the  initial  moment.  But  they 
will  not  depend  on  the  absolute  initial  position 
of  the  system  nor  on  its  absolute  orientation,  nor 
on  the  velocities  with  which  that  absolute  posi 
tion  and  orientation  were  changing  at  the  initial 
moment.  Unfortunately,  the  law  thus  enunciated 
does  not  agree  with  experiments — at  least,  as  they 
are  ordinarily  interpreted.  Suppose  a  man  were 
translated  to  a  planet,  the  sky  of  which  was  con 
stantly  covered  with  a  thick  curtain  of  clouds,  so 
that  he  could  never  see  the  other  stars.  On  that 
planet  he  wrould  live  as  if  it  \vere  isolated  in  space. 
But  he  w'ould  notice  that  it  revolves,  either  by 
measuring  its  ellipticity  (which  is  ordinarily  done 
by  means  of  astronomical  observations,  but  which 


EXPERIMENT   AND    GEOMETRY.  79 

could  be  done  by  purely  geodesic  means),  or  by 
repeating  the  experiment  of  Foucault's  pendulum. 
The  absolute  rotation  of  this  planet  might  be 
clearly  shown  in  this  way.  Now,  here  is  a  fact 
which  shocks  the  philosopher,  but  which  the 
physicist  is  compelled  to  accept.  We  know  that 
from  this  fact  Newton  concluded  the  existence  of  ' 
absolute  space.  I  myself  cannot  accept  this  way 
of  looking  at  it.  I  shall  explain  why  in  Part  III., 
but  for  the  moment  it  is  not  my  intention  to 
discuss  this  difficulty.  I  must  therefore  resign 
myself,  in  the  enunciation  of  the  law  of  relativity, 
to  including  velocities  of  every  kind  among  the 
data  which  define  the  state  of  the  bodies.  How 
ever  that  may  be,  the  difficulty  is  the  same  for 
both  Euclid's  geometry  and  for  Lobatschewsky's. 
I  need  not  therefore  trouble  about  it  further,  and 
I  have  only  mentioned  it  incidentally.  To  sum 
up,  whichever  way  we  look  at  it,  it  is  impossible 
to  discover  in  geometric  empiricism  a  rational 
meaning. 

6.  Experiments  only  teach  us  the  relations  of 
bodies  to  one  another.     They  do  not  and  cannot     , 
give  us  the  relations  of  bodies  and  space,  nor  the    ; 
mutual  relations  of  the  different  parts  of  space. 
"Yes!"  you  reply,   "a   single   experiment  is  not 
enough,  because  it  only  gives  us  one  equation  with 
several  unknowns ;  but  when  I  have  made  enough 
experiments    I    shall    have   enough    equations    to 
calculate  all  my  unknowns."     If  I  know  the  height 
of  the  main-mast,  that  is  not  sufficient  to  enable 


80  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

me  to  calculate  the  age  of  the  captain.  When 
you  have  measured  every  fragment  of  wood  in  a 
ship  you  will  have  many  equations,  but  you  will 
be  no  nearer  knowing  the  captain's  age.  All  your 
measurements  bearing  on  your  fragments  of  wood 
can  tell  you  only  what  concerns  those  fragments ; 
and  similarly,  your  experiments,  however  numerous 
they  may  be,  referring  only  to  the  relations  of 
bodies  with  one  another,  \vill  tell  you  nothing 
about  the  mutual  relations  of  the  different  parts 
of  space. 

7.  Will  you  say  that  if  the  experiments  have 
reference  to  the  bodies,  they  at  least  have  reference 
to  the  geometrical  properties  of  the  bodies.  First, 
what  do  you  understand  by  the  geometrical  pro- 
Arties  nf  frnHiesJ  I  assume  that  it  is  a  question 
the  relations  of  the  bodies  to  space.  These 
properties  therefore  are  not  reached  by  experi 
ments  which  only  have  reference  to  the  relations 
of  bodies  to  one  another,  and  that  is  enough  to 
show  that  it  is  not  of  those  properties  that  there 
can  be  a  question.  Let  us  therefore  begin  by 
making  ourselves  clear  as  to  the  sense  of  the 
phrase :  geometrical  properties  of  bodies.  When 
I  say  that  a  body  is  composed  of  several  parts,  I 
presume  that  I  am  thus  enunciating  a  geometrical 
property,  and  that  will  be  true  even  if  I  agree  to 
give  the  improper  name  of  points  to  the  very 
small  parts  I  am  considering.  When  I  say  that 
this  or  that  part  of  a  certain  body  is  in  contact 
with  this  or  that  part  of  another  body,  I  am 


EXPERIMENT    AND    GEOMETRY.  8 1 

enunciating  a  proposition  which  concerns  the 
mutual  relations  of  the  two  bodies,  and  not  their 
relations  with  space.  I  assume  that  you  will 
agree  with  me  that  these  are  not  geometrical 
properties.  I  am  sure  that  at  least  you  will 
grant  that  these  properties  are  independent  of 
all  knowledge  of  metrical  geometry.  Admitting 
this,  I  suppose  that  we  have  a  solid  body  formed 
of  eight  thin  iron  rods,  oa,  ob,  oc,  od,  oe,  of,  og,  oh, 
connected  at  one  of  their  extremities,  o.  And  let 
us  take  a  second  solid  body — for  example,  a  piece 
of  wood,  on  which  are  marked  three  little  spots 
of  ink  which  I  shall  call  «  P  y.  I  now  suppose 
that  we  find  that  we  can  bring  into  contact  a  ft  y 
with  ago;  by  that  I  mean  a  with  a,  and  at  the 
same  time  /3  with  g,  and  7  with  o.  Then  we  can 
successively  bring  into  contact  af3y  with  bgo,  ego, 
dgo,  ego,  fgo,  then  with  aho,  bJw,  cho,  dho,  cho,  fho; 
and  then  ay  successively  with  ab,  be,  cd,  de,  ef,  fa. 
Now  these  are  observations  that  can  be  made 
without  having  any  idea  beforehand  as  to  the 
form  or  the  metrical  properties  of  space.  They 
have  no  reference  whatever  to  the  "  geometrical 
properties  of  bodies."  These  observations  will 
not  be  possible  if  the  bodies  on  which  we  experi 
ment  move  in  a  group  having  the  same  structure 
as  the  Lobatschewskian  group  (I  mean  according 
to  the  same  laws  as  solid  bodies  in  Lobatschewsky's 
geometry).  They  therefore  suffice  to  prove  that 
these  bodies  move  according  to  the  Euclidean 
group;  or  at  least  that  they  do  not  move  according 

6 


82  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

to  the  Lobatschewskian  group.  That  they  may 
be  compatible  with  the  Euclidean  group  is  easily 
seen ;  for  we  might  make  them  so  if  the  body 
a/3y  were  an  invariable  solid  of  our  ordinary 
geometry  in  the  shape  of  a  right-angled  triangle, 
and  if  the  points  abcdefgh  \vere  the  vertices  of 
a  polyhedron  formed  of  two  regular  hexagonal 
pyramids  of  our  ordinary  geometry  having  abode/ 
as  their  common  base,  and  having  the  one  g  and 
the  other .  h  as  their  vertices.  Suppose  now, 
instead  of  the  previous  observations,  we  note  that 
we  can  as  before  apply  afiy  successively  to  ago, 
bgo,  ego,  dgo,  ego,  fgo,  aJw,  bho,  cho,  dho,  eho,  fho, 
and  then  that  we  can  apply  a/3  (and  no  longer  ay) 
successively  to  ab,  be,  cd,  dc,  ef,  and  fa.  These  are 
observations  that  could  be  made  if  non-Euclidean 
geometry  were  true.  If  the  bodies  a/3y,  oabcdefgh 
were  invariable  solids,  if  the  former  were  a  right- 
angled  triangle,  and  the  latter  a  double  regular 
hexagonal  pyramid  of  suitable  dimensions.  These 
new  verifications  are  therefore  impossible  if  the 
bodies  move  according  to  the  Euclidean  group; 
but  they  become  possible  if  we  suppose  the  bodies 
to  move  according  to  the  Lobatschewskian  group. 
They  would  therefore  suffice  to  sho\v,  if  we  carried 
them  out,  that  the  bodies  in  question  do  not  move 
according  to  the  Euclidean  group.  And  so,  with 
out  making  any  hypothesis  on  the  form  and  the 
nature  of  space,  on  the  relations  of  the  bodies 
and  space,  and  without  attributing  to  bodies  any 
geometrical  property,  I  have  made  observations 


EXPERIMENT    AND    GEOMETRY.  83 

which  have  enabled  me  to  show  in  one  case  that 
the  bodies  experimented  upon  move  according  to 
a  group,  the  structure  of  which  is  Euclidean,  and 
in  the  other  case,  that  they  move  in  a  group,  the 
structure  of  which  is  Lobatschewskian.  It  can 
not  be  said  that  all  the  first  observations  would 
constitute  an  experiment  proving  that  space  is 
Euclidean,  and  the  second  an  experiment  proving 
that  space  is  non-Euclidean  ;  in  fact,  it  might  be 
imagined  (note  that  I  use  the  word  imagined)  that 
there  are  bodies  moving  in  such  a  manner  as 
to  render  possible  the  second  series  of  observations: 
and  the  proof  is  that  the  first  mechanic  who  came 
our  way  could  construct  it  if  he  would  only  take 
the  trouble.  But  you  must  not  conclude,  however, 
that  space  is  non-Euclidean.  In  the  same  way, 
just  as  ordinary  solid  bodies  would  continue 
to  exist  when  the  mechanic  had  constructed  the 
strange  bodies  I  have  just  mentioned,  he  would 
have  to  conclude  that  space  is  both  Euclidean 
and  non-Euclidean.  Suppose,  for  instance,  that 
we  have  a  large  sphere  of  radius  R,  and  that  its 
temperature  decreases  from  the  centre  to  the 
surface  of  the  sphere  according  to  the  law  of 
which  I  spoke  when  I  was  describing  the  non- 
Euclidean  world.  We  might  have  bodies  whose 
dilatation  is  negligeable,  and  which  would  behave 
as  ordinary  invariable  solids;  and,  on  the  other 
hand,  we  might  have  very  dilatable  bodies,  which 
would  behave  as  non-Euclidean  solids.  We 
might  have  two  double  pyramids  oabcdefgh  and 


84  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

o'db'cd'efg'ti,  and  two  triangles  a  /3  y  and  a'  /3'  y'. 
The  first  double  pyramid  would  be  rectilinear,  and 
the  second  curvilinear.  The  triangle  a/3y  would 
consist  of  undilatable  matter,  and  the  other  of  very 
dilatable  matter.  We  might  therefore  make  our 
first  observations  with  the  double  pyramid  o'a'li 
and  the  triangle  a'  {$'  y'. 

And  then  the  experiment  would  seem  to  show  — 
first,  that  Euclidean  geometry  is  true,  and  then 
that  it  is  false.  Hence,  experiments  have  reference 
not  to  space  but  to  bodies. 

SUPPLEMENT. 

8.  To  round  the  matter  off,  I  ought  to  speak  of 
a  very  delicate  question,  which  will  require  con 
siderable  development ;  but  I  shall  confine  myself 
to  summing  up  what  I  have  written  in  the  Revue 
de  Metaphysique  ct  de  Morale  and  in  the  Monist. 
When  we  say  that  space  has  three  dimensions, 
what  do  we  mean  ?  We  have  seen  the  importance 
of  these  "  internal  changes  "  which  are  revealed  to 
us  by  our  muscular  sensations.  They  may  serve 
to  characterise  the  different  attitudes  of  our  body. 
Let  us  take  arbitrarily  as  our  origin  one  of  these 
attitudes,  A.  When  we  pass  from  this  initial 
attitude  to  another  attitude  B  we  experience  a 
series  of  muscular  sensations,  and  this  series  S  of 
muscular  sensations  will  define  B.  Observe,  how 
ever,  that  we  shall  often  look  upon  two  series  S 
and  S'  as  defining  the  same  attitude  B  (since  the 


EXPERIMENT    AND    GEOMETRY.  85 

initial  and  final  attitudes  A  and  B  remaining  the 
same,  the  intermediary  attitudes  of  the  corre 
sponding  sensations  may  differ).  How  then  can 
we  recognise  the  equivalence  of  these  two  series  ? 
Because  they  may  serve  to  compensate  for  the  same 
external  change,  or  more  generally,  because,  when 
it  is  a  question  of  compensation  for  an  external 
change,  one  of  the  series  may  be  replaced  by  the 
other.  Among  these  series  we  have  distinguished 
those  which  can  alone  compensate  for  an  external 
change,  and  which  we  have  called  "  displacements." 
As  we  cannot  distinguish  two  displacements  which 
are  very  close  together,  the  aggregate  of  these 
displacements  presents  the  characteristics  of  a 
physical  continuum.  Experience  teaches  us  that 
they  are  the  characteristics  of  a  physical  con 
tinuum  of  six  dimensions ;  but  we  do  not  know  as 
yet  how  many  dimensions  space  itself  possesses,  so 
we  must  first  of  all  answer  another  question. 
What  is  a  point  in  space  ?  Every  one  thinks  he 
knows,  but  that  is  an  illusion.  What  we  see  when 
we  try  to  represent  to  ourselves  a  point  in  space  is 
a  black  spot  on  white  paper,  a  spot  of  chalk  on 
a  blackboard,  always  an  object.  The  question 
should  therefore  be  understood  as  follows : — What 
do  I  mean  when  I  say  the  object  B  is  at  the 
point  which  a  moment  before  was  occupied  by  the 
object  A  ?  Again,  what  criterion  will  enable 
me  to  recognise  it  ?  I  mean  that  although  I  have 
not  moved  (my  muscular  sense  tells  me  this),  my 
finger,  which  just  now  touched  the  object  A,  is 


86  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

now  touching  the  object  B.  I  might  have  used 
other  criteria — for  instance,  another  finger  or  the 
sense  of  sight — but  the  first  criterion  is  sufficient. 
I  know  that  if  it  answers  in  the  affirmative  all 
other  criteria  will  give  the  same  answer.  I  know 
it  from  experiment.  I  cannot  know  it  a  priori.  \ 
'•£  I  For  the  same  reason  I  say  that  touch  cannot 
/  be  exercised  at  a  distance ;  that  is  another  way  of 
enunciating  the  same  experimental  fact.  If  I 
say,  on  the  contrary,  that  sight  is  exercised  at  a 
distance,  it  means  that  the  criterion  furnished  by 
sight  may  give  an  affirmative  answer  while  the 
others  reply  in  the  negative. 

To  sum  up.  For  each  attitude  of  my  body  my 
finger  determines  a  point,  and  it  is  that  and  that 
only  which  defines  a  point  in  space.  To  each 
attitude  corresponds  in  this  way  a  point.  But  it 
often  happens  that  the  same  point  corresponds  to 
several  different  attitudes  (in  this  case  we  say  that 
our  finger  has  not  moved,  but  the  rest  of  our  body 
has).  We  distinguish,  therefore,  among  changes 
of  attitude  those  in  which  the  finger  does  not 
move.  How  are  we  led  to  this  ?  It  is  because  we 
often  remark  that  in  these  changes  the  object 
which  is  in  touch  with  the  finger  remains  in  con 
tact  with  it.  Let  us  arrange  then  in  the  same 
class  all  the  attitudes  which  are  deduced  one  from 
the  other  by  one  of  the  changes  that  we  have  thus 
distinguished.  To  all  these  attitudes  of  the  same 
class  will  correspond  the  same  point  in  space. 
Then  to  each  class  will  correspond  a  point,  and  to 


EXPERIMENT    AND    GEOMETRY.  87 

each  point  a  class.  Yet  it  may  be  said  that  what 
we  get  from  this  experiment  is  not  the  point,  but 
the  class  of  changes,  or,  better  still,  the  corre 
sponding  class  of  muscular  sensations.  Thus,  when 
we  say  that  space  has  three  dimensions,  we  merely 
mean  that  the  aggregate  of  these  classes  appears  to 
us  with  the  characteristics  of  a  physical  continuum 
of  three  dimensions.  Then  if,  instead  of  defining 
the  points  in  space  with  the  aid  of  the  first  finger, 
I  use,  for  example,  another  finger,  would  the 
results  be  the  same  ?  That  is  by  no  means  a 
priori  evident.  But,  as  we  have  seen,  experiment 
has  shown  us  that  all  our  criteria  are  in  agree 
ment,  and  this  enables  us  to  answer  in  the 
affirmative.  If  we  recur  to  what  we  have  called 
displacements,  the  aggregate  of  which  forms,  as 
we  have  seen,  a  group,  we  shall  be  brought  to 
distinguish  those  in  which  a  finger  does  not  move; 
and  by  what  has  preceded,  those  are  the  displace 
ments  which  characterise  a  point  in  space,  and 
their  aggregate  will  form  a  sub-group  of  our 
group.  To  each  sub-group  of  this  kind,  then,  will 
correspond  a  point  in  space.  We  might  be 
tempted  to  conclude  that  experiment  has  taught 
us  the  number  of  dimensions  of  space ;  but  in 
reality  our  experiments  have  referred  not  to  space, 
but  to  our  body  and  its  relations  with  neighbour 
ing  objects.  What  is  more,  our  experiments 
are  exceeding  crude.  In  our  mind  the  latent  idea 
of  a  certain  number  of  groups  pre-existed;  these 
are  the  groups  with  which  Lie's  theory  is  con- 


SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

cerned.  Which  shall  we  choose  to  form  a  kind  of 
standard  by  which  to  compare  natural  pheno 
mena  ?  And  when  this  group  is  chosen,  which 
of  the  sub-groups  shall  we  take  to  characterise  a 
point  in  space  ?  Experiment  has  guided  us  by 
showing  us  what  choice  adapts  itself  best  to  the 
properties  of  our  body ;  but  there  its  role  ends. 


PART     III. 

FORCE. 
CHAPTER    VI. 

THE    CLASSICAL    MECHANICS. 

THE  English  teach  mechanics  as  an  experimental 
science;  on  the  Continent  it  is  taught  always  more., 
or  less  as  a  deductive  and  a  priori  science.  The 
English  are  right,  no  doubt.  How  is  it  that  the 
other  method  has  been  persisted  in  for  so  long;  how 
is  it  that  Continental  scientists  who  have  tried  to 
escape  from  the  practice  of  their  predecessors  have 
in  most  cases  been  unsuccessful  ?  On  the  other 
hand,  if  the  principles  of  mechanics  are  only  of 
experimental  origin,  are  they  not  merely  approxi 
mate  and  provisory  ?  May  we  not  be  some  day 
compelled  by  new  experiments  to  modify  or  even 
to  abandon  them  ?  These  are  the  questions  which 
naturally  arise,  and  the  difficulty  of  solution  is 
largely  due  to  the  fact  that  treatises  on  mechanics 
do  not  clearly  distinguish  between  what  is  experi 
ment,  what  is  mathematical  reasoning,  what  is 
convention,  and  what  is  hypothesis.  This  is  not 
all. 


go  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

1.  There   is   no   absolute   space,    and   we   only 
conceive  of  relative  motion  ;  and  yet  in  most  cases 
mechanical  facts  are  enunciated  as  if  there  is  an 
absolute  space  to  which  they  can  be  referred. 

2.  There  is  no  absolute  time.    When  we  say  that 
two    periods    are    equal,    the    statement    has    no 
meaning,   and   can   only   acquire  a  meaning  by  a 
convention. 

3.  Not  only  have  we  no  direct  intuition  of  the 
equality    of  two    periods,   but   we  have   not   even 
direct  intuition  of  the  simultaneity  of  two  events 
occurring    in    two    different    places.       I    have   ex 
plained   this  in    an    article  entitled    "  Mesure   du 
Temps." 

4.  Finally,   is   not   our   Euclidean    geometry   in 
itself   only   a    kind    of   convention    of  language  ? 
Mechanical  facts  might  be  enunciated  with  refer 
ence  to  a  non-Euclidean  space   which   would    be 
less    convenient    but    quite    as    legitimate    as   our 
ordinary  space ;    the   enunciation    would    become 
more  complicated,  but  it  still  would  be  possible. 

Thus,  absolute  space,  absolute  time,  and  even 
geometry  are  not  conditions  which  are  imposed  on 
mechanics.  All  these  things  no  more  existed 
before  mechanics  than  the  French  language  can 
be  logically  said  to  have  existed  before  the  truths 
which  are  expressed  in  French.  We  might 
endeavour  to  enunciate  the  fundamental  law  of 
mechanics  in  a  language  independent  of  all  these 

1  Revue  de  Mtlaphysique  et  de  Morale,  t.  vi.,  pp.  1-13,  January, 


THE    CLASSICAL    MECHANICS.  gi 

conventions;  and  no  doubt  we  should  in  this  way 
get  a  clearer  idea  of  those  laws  in  themselves. 
This  is  what  M.  Andrade  has  tried  to  do,  to 
some  extent  at  any  rate,  in  his  Lecons  de  Mecanique 
physique.  Of  course  the  enunciation  of  these  laws 
would  become  much  more  complicated,  because  all 
these  conventions  have  been  adopted  for  the  very 
purpose  of  abbreviating  and  simplifying  the  enun 
ciation.  As  far  as  we  are  concerned,  I  shall  ignore 
all  these  difficulties;  not  because  I  disregard 
them,  far  from  it;  but  because  they  have  re 
ceived  sufficient  attention  in  the  first  two  parts, 
of  the  book.  Provisionally,  then,  we  shall  admit 
absolute  time  and  Euclidean  geometry. 

The  Principle  of  Inertia.  —  A  body  under  the 
action  of  no  force  can  only  move  uniformly  in  a 
straight  line.  Is  this  a  truth  imposed  on  the  mind 
a  priori  ?  If  this  be  so,  how  is  it  that  the  Greeks 
ignored  it  ?  How  could  they  have  believed  that 
motion  ceases  with  the  cause  of  motion  ?  or,  again, 
that  every  body,  if  there  is  nothing  to  prevent  it, 
will  move  in  a  circle,  the  noblest  of  all  forms  of 
motion  ? 

If  it  be  said  that  the  velocity  of  a  body  cannot 
change,  if  there  is  no  reason  for  it  to  change,  may 
we  not  just  as  legitimately  maintain  that  the 
position  of  a  body  cannot  change,  or  that  the 
curvature  of  its  path  cannot  change,  without  the 
agency  of  an  external  cause?  Is,  then,  the  prin 
ciple  of  inertia,  which  is  not  an  a  priori  truth,  an 
experimental  fact  ?  Have  there  ever  been  experi- 


Q2  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

merits  on  bodies  acted  on  by  no  forces  ?  and,  if  so, 
how  did  we  know  that  no  forces  were  acting  ? 
The  usual  instance  is  that  of  a  ball  rolling  for  a 
very  long  time  on  a  marble  table;  but  why  do 
we  say  it  is  under  the  action  of  no  force  ?  Is  it 
because  it  is  too  remote  from  all  other  bodies  to 
experience  any  sensible  action  ?  It  is  not  further 
from  the  earth  than  if  it  were  thrown  freely  into 
the  air;  and  we  all  know  that  in  that  case  it 
would  be  subject  to  the  attraction  of  the  earth. 
Teachers  of  mechanics  usually  pass  rapidly  over 
the  example  of  the  ball,  but  they  add  that  the 
principle  of  inertia  is  verified  indirectly  by  its  con 
sequences.  This  is  very  badly  expressed;  they 
evidently  mean  that  various  consequences  may  be 
verified  by  a  more  general  principle,  of  which  the 
principle  of  inertia  is  only  a  particular  case.  I 
shall  propose  for  this  general  principle  the 
following  enunciation: — The  acceleration  of  a 
body  depends  only  on  its  position  and  that  of 
neighbouring  bodies,  and  on  their  velocities. 
Mathematicians  would  say  that  the  movements 
of  all  the  material  molecules  of  the  universe 
depend  on  differential  equations  of  the  second 
order.  To  make  it  clear  that  this  is  really  a 
generalisation  of  the  law  of  inertia  we  may  again 
have  recourse  to  our  imagination.  The  law  of 
inertia,  as  I  have  said  above,  is  not  imposed  on  us 
a  priori;  other  laws  would  be  just  as  compatible 
with  the  principle  of  sufficient  reason.  If  a  body 
is  not  acted  upon  by  a  force,  instead  of  supposing 


THE    CLASSICAL    MECHANICS.  Q3 

that  its  velocity  is  unchanged  we  may  suppose 
that  its  position  or  its  acceleration  is  unchanged. 

Let  us  for  a  moment  suppose  that  one  of  these 
two  laws  is  a  law  of  nature,  and  substitute  it  for 
the  law  of  inertia:  what  will  be  the  natural 
generalisation?  A  moment's  reflection  will  show 
us.  In  the  first  case,  we  may  suppose  that  the 
velocity  of  a  body  depends  only  on  its  position  and 
that  of  neighbouring  bodies;  in  the  second  case, 
that  the  variation  of  the  acceleration  of  a  body 
depends  only  on  the  position  of  the  body  and  ,of 
neighbouring  bodies,  on  their  velocities  and 
accelerations;  or,  in  mathematical  terms,  the 
differential  equations  of  the  motion  would  be  of 
the  first  order  in  the  first  case  and  of  the  third 
order  in  the  second. 

Let  us  now  modify  our  supposition  a  little. 
Suppose  a  world  analogous  to  our  solar  system, 
but  one  in  which  by  a  singular  chance  the  orbits 
of  all  the  planets  have  neither  eccentricity  nor 
inclination;  and  further,  I  suppose  that  the 
masses  of  the  planets  are  too  small  for  their 
mutual  perturbations  to  be  sensible.  Astronomers 
living  in  one  of  these  planets  would  not  hesitate  to 
conclude  that  the  orbit  of  a  star  can  only  be 
circular  and  parallel  to  a  certain  plane;  the 
position  of  a  star  at  a  given  moment  would  then 
be  sufficient  to  determine  its  velocity  and  path. 
The  law  of  inertia  which  they  would  adopt  would 
be  the  former  of  the  two  hypothetical  laws  I  have 
mentioned. 


94  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

Now,  imagine  this  system  to  be  some  day 
crossed  by  a  body  of  vast  mass  and  immense 
velocity  coming  from  distant  constellations.  All 
the  orbits  would  be  profoundly  disturbed.  Our 
astronomers  would  not  be  greatly  astonished. 
They  would  guess  that  this  new  star  is  in  itself 
quite  capable  of  doing  all  the  mischief;  but,  they 
would  say,  as  soon  as  it  has  passed  by,  order  will 
again  be  established.  No  doubt  the  distances  of 
the  planets  from  the  sun  will  not  be  the  same  as 
before  the  cataclysm,  but  the  orbits  will  become 
circular  again  as  soon  as  the  disturbing  cause  has 
disappeared.  It  would  be  only  when  the  perturb 
ing  body  is  remote,  and  when  the  orbits,  instead  of 
being  circular  are  found  to  be  elliptical,  that  the 
astronomers  would  find  out  their  mistake,  and 
discover  the  necessity  of  reconstructing  their 
mechanics. 

I  have  dwelt  on  these  hypotheses,  for  it  seems  to 
me  that  we  can  clearly  understand  our  generalised 
law  of  inertia  only  by  opposing  it  to  a  contrary 
hypothesis. 

Has  this  generalised  law  of  inertia  been  veri 
fied  by  experiment,  and  can  it  be  so  verified  ? 
When  Newton  wrote  the  Principia,  he  certainly 
regarded  this  truth  as  experimentally  acquired  and 
demonstrated.  It  was  so  in  his  eyes,  not  only 
from  the  anthropomorphic  conception  to  which  I 
shall  later  refer,  but  also  because  of  the  work  of 
Galileo.  It  was  so  proved  by  the  laws  of  Kepler. 
According  to  those  laws,  in  fact,  the  path  of  a 


THE    CLASSICAL    MECHANICS.  Q5 

planet  is  entirely  determined  by  its  initial  position 
and  initial  velocity;  this,  indeed,  is  what  our 
generalised  law  of  inertia  requires. 

For  this  principle  to  be  only  true  in  appearance 
—lest  we  should  fear  that  some  day  it  must  be  re 
placed  by  one  of  the  analogous  principles  which  I 
opposed  to  it  just  now — we  must  have  been  led 
astray  by  some  amazing  chance  such  as  that  \vhich 
had  led  into  error  our  imaginary  astronomers. 
Such  an  hypothesis  is  so  unlikely  that  it  need  not 
delay  us.  No  one  will  believe  that  there  can  be 
such  chances;  no  doubt  the  probability  that  two 
eccentricities  are  both  exactly  zero  is  not  smaller 
than  the  probability  that  one  is  o.i  and  the  other 
0.2.  The  probability  of  a  simple  event  is  not 
smaller  than  that  of  a  complex  one.  If,  however, 
the  former  does  occur,  we  shall  not  attribute  its 
occurrence  to  chance;  we  shall  not  be  inclined  to 
believe  that  nature  has  done  it  deliberately  to 
deceive  us.  The  hypothesis  of  an  error  of  this 
kind  being  discarded,  we  may  admit  that  so  far  as 
astronomy  is  concerned  our  law  has  been  verified 
by  experiment. 

But  Astronomy  is  not  the  whole  of  Physics. 
May  we  not  fear  that  some  day  a  new  experi 
ment  will  falsify  the  law  in  some  domain  of 
physics  ?  An  experimental  la\v  is  always  subject 
to  revision ;  we  may  always  expect  to  see  it  re 
placed  by  some  other  and  more  exact  law.  But 
no  one  seriously  thinks  that  the  law  of  which  we 
speak  will  ever  be  abandoned  or  amended.  Why  ? 


96  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

Precisely  because  it  will  never  be  submitted  to  a 
decisive  test. 

In  the  first  place,  for  this  test  to  be  complete, 
all  the  bodies  of  the  universe  must  return  with 
their  initial  velocities  to  their  initial  positions  after 
a  certain  time.  We  ought  then  to  find  that  they 
would  resume  their  original  paths.  But  this  test 
is  impossible;  it  can  be  only  partially  applied,  and 
even  when  it  is  applied  there  will  still  be  some 
bodies  which  will  not  return  to  their  original 
positions.  Thus  there  will  be  a  ready  explanation 
of  any  breaking  down  of  the  law. 

Yet  this  is  not  all.  In  Astronomy  we  sec  the 
bodies  whose  motion  we  are  studying,  and  in  most 
cases  we  grant  that  they  are  not  subject  to  the 
action  of  other  invisible  bodies.  Under  these  con 
ditions,  our  law  must  certainly  be  either  verified  or 
not.  But  it  is  not  so  in  Physics.  If  physical 
phenomena  are  due  to  motion,  it  is  to  the  motion 
of  molecules  which  we  cannot  see.  If,  then,  the 
acceleration  of  bodies  wre  cannot  see  depends  on 
something  else  than  the  positions  or  velocities  of 
other  visible  bodies  or  of  invisible  molecules,  the 
existence  of  which  we  have  been  led  previously 
to  admit,  there  is  nothing  to  prevent  us  from 
supposing  that  this  something  else  is  the  position 
or  velocity  of  other  molecules  of  which  we  have 
not  so  far  suspected  the  existence.  The  law 
will  be  safeguarded.  Let  me  express  the  same 
thought  in  another  form  in  mathematical  language. 
Suppose  we  are  observing  n  molecules,  and  find 


THE    CLASSICAL    MECHANICS.  Q7 

that  their  yi  co-ordinates  satisfy  a  system  of  3« 
differential  equations  of  the  fourth  order  (and 
not  of  the  second,  as  required  by  the  law  of 
inertia).  We  know  that  by  introducing  3^  variable 
auxiliaries,  a  system  of  311  equations  of  the  fourth 
order  may  be  reduced  to  a  system  of  6n  equations 
of  the  second  order.  If,  then,  we  suppose  that  the 
3«  auxiliary  variables  represent  the  co-ordinates  of 
n  invisible  molecules,  the  result  is  again  conform 
able  to  the  law  of  inertia.  To  sum  up,  this  law, 
verified  experimentally  in  some  particular  cases, 
may  be  extended  fearlessly  to  the  most  general 
cases;  for  we  know  that  in  these  general  cases 
it  can  neither  be  confirmed  nor  contradicted  by 
experiment. 

The  Law  of  Acceleration. — The  acceleration  of  a 
body  is  equal  to  the  force  which  acts  on  it  divided 
by  its  mass. 

Can  this  law  be  verified  by  experiment  ?  If  so, 
we  have  to  measure  the  three  magnitudes  men 
tioned  in  the  enunciation :  acceleration,  force, 
and  mass.  I  admit  that  acceleration  may  be 
measured,  because  I  pass  over  the  difficulty 
arising  from  the  measurement  of  time.  But  how 
are  we  to  measure  force  and  mass  ?  We  do  not 
even  know  what  they  are.  What  is  mass  ? 
Newton  replies  :  "  The  product  of  the  volume  and 
the  density."  "  It  were  better  to  say,"  answer 
Thomson  and  Tait,  "  that  density  is  the  quotient 
of  the  mass  by  the  volume."  What  is  force  ? 
"  It  is,"  replies  Lagrange,  "  that  which  moves  or 

7 


98  SCIENCE   AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

tends  to  move  a  body."  "  It  is,"  according  to 
Kirchoff,  "the  product  of  the  mass  and  the 
acceleration."  Then  why  not  say  that  mass  is 
the  quotient  of  the  force  by  the  acceleration  ? 
These  difficulties  are  insurmountable. 

When  we  say  force  is  the  cause  of  motion,  we 
are  talking  metaphysics ;  and  this  definition,  if  we 
had  to  be  content  with  it,  would  be  absolutely 
fruitless,  would  lead  to  absolutely  nothing.  For  a 
definition  to  be  of  any  use  it  must  tell  us  how  to 
measure  force ;  and  that  is  quite  sufficient,  for  it  is 
by  no  means  necessary  to  tell  \vhat  force  is  in 
itself,  nor  whether  it  is  the  cause  or  the  effect  of 
motion.  We  must  therefore  first  define  what  is 
meant  by  the  equality  of  two  forces.  When  are 
twro  forces  equal  ?  We  are  told  that  it  is  when 
they  give  the  same  acceleration  to  the  same  mass, 
or  when  acting  in  opposite  directions  they  are  in 
equilibrium.  This  definition  is  a  sham.  A  force 
applied  to  a  body  cannot  be  uncoupled  and 
applied  to  another  body  as  an  engine  is  uncoupled 
from  one  train  and  coupled  to  another.  It  is 
therefore  impossible  to  say  what  acceleration  such 
a  force,  applied  to  such  a  body,  would  give  to 
another  body  if  it  were  applied  to  it.  It  is  im 
possible  to  tell  how  two  forces  which  are  not 
acting  in  exactly  opposite  directions  would  be 
have  if  they  were  acting  in  opposite  directions. 
It  is  this  definition  which  we  try  to  materialise,  as 
it  were,  when  we  measure  a  force  with  a  dyna 
mometer  or  with  a  balance.  Two  forces,  F  and 


THE    CLASSICAL    MECHANICS.  QQ 

F',  which  I  suppose,  for  simplicity,  to  be  acting 
vertically  upwards,  are  respectively  applied  to  two 
bodies,  C  and  C'.  I  attach  a  body  weighing  P 
first  to  C  and  then  to  C';  if  there  is  equilibrium  in 
both  cases  I  conclude  that  the  two  forces  F  and 
F'  are  equal,  for  they  are  both  equal  to  the  weight 
of  the  body  P.  But  am  I  certain  that  the  body  P 
has  kept  its  weight  when  I  transferred  it  from  the 
first  body  to  the  second  ?  Far  from  it.  I  am 
certain  of  the  contrary.  I  know  that  the  magni 
tude  of  the  weight  varies  from  one  point  to 
another,  and  that  it  is  greater,  for  instance,  at  the 
pole  than  at  the  equator.  No  doubt  the  difference 
is  very  small,  and  we  neglect  it  in  practice ;  but  a 
definition  must  have  mathematical  rigour ;  this 
rigour  does  not  exist.  What  I  say  of  weight 
would  apply  equally  to  the  force  of  the  spring  of 
a  dynamometer,  which  would  vary  according  to 
temperature  and  many  other  circumstances.  Nor 
is  this  all.  We  cannot  say  that  the  weight  of  the 
body  P  is  applied  to  the  body  C  and  keeps  in 
equilibrium  the  force  F.  What  is  applied  to 
the  body  C  is  the  action  of  the  body  P  on  the 
body  C.  On  the  other  hand,  the  body  P  is 
acted  on  by  its  weight,  and  by  the  reaction  R 
of  the  body  C  on  P  the  forces  F  and  A  are 
equal,  because  they  are  in  equilibrium;  the  forces 
A  and  R  are  equal  by  virtue  of  the  principle 
of  action  and  reaction ;  and  finally,  the  force 
R  and  the  weight  P  are  equal  because  they 
are  in  equilibrium.  From  these  three  equalities 


100  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

we  deduce  the  equality  of  the  weight  P  and  the 
force  F. 

Thus  we  are  compelled  to  bring  into  our  defini 
tion,  of  the  equality  of  two  forces  the  principle 
of  the  equality  of  action  and  reaction;  hence  this 
principle  can  no  longer  be  regarded  as  an  experimental 
law  hit  only  as  a  definition. 

To  recognise  the  equality  of  two  forces  we  are 
then  in  possession  of  two  rules :  the  equality  of 
two  forces  in  equilibrium  and  the  equality  of  action 
and  reaction.  But,  as  we  have  seen,  these  are  not 
sufficient,  and  we  are  compelled  to  have  recourse 
to  a  third  rule,  and  to  admit  that  certain  forces — 
the  weight  of  a  body,  for  instance — ar>5  constant  in 
magnitude  and  direction.  But  this  third  rule  is 
an  experimental  law.  It  is  only  approximately 
true:  it  is  a  bad  definition.  We  are  therefore 
reduced  to  Kirchoff's  definition:  force  is  the  pro 
duct  of  the  mass  and  the  acceleration.  This  law 
of  Newton  in  its  turn  ceases  to  be  regarded  as  an 
experimental  law,  it  is  now  only  a  definition.  But 
as  a  definition  it  is  insufficient,  for  we  do  not 
know  what  mass  is.  It  enables  us,  no  doubt,  to 
calculate  the  ratio  of  two  forces  applied  at 
different  times  to  the  same  body,  but  it  tells  us 
nothing  about  the  ratio  of  two  forces  applied  to 
two  different  bodies.  To  fill  up  the  gap  we  must 
have  recourse  to  Newton's  third  law,  the  equality 
of  action  and  reaction,  still  regarded  not  as 
an  experimental  law  but  as  a  definition.  Two 
bodies,  A  and  B,  act  on  each  other ;  tvie  accelera- 


THE    CLASSICAL    MECHANICS.  IOT 

tion  of  A,  multiplied  by  the  mass  of  A,  is  equal  to 
the  action  of  B  on  A ;  in  the  same  way  the 
acceleration  of  B,  multiplied  by  the  mass  of  B»  is 
equal  to  the  reaction  of  A  on  B.  As,  by  definition, 
the  action  and  the  reaction  are  equal,  the  masses 
of  A  and  B  arc  respectively  in  the  inverse  ratio  of 
their  masses.  Thus  is  the  ratio  of  the  two  masses 
defined,  and  it  is  for  experiment  to  verify  that  the 
ratio  is  constant. 

This  would  do  very  well  if  the  two  bodies  were 
alone  and  could  be  abstracted  from  the  action  of 
the  rest  of  the  world ;  but  this  is  by  no  means 
the  case.  The  acceleration  of  A  is  not  solely  due 
to  the  action  of  B,  but  to  that  of  a  multitude  of.  -' 
other  bodies,  C,  D,  .  .  .  To  apply  the  preceding 
rule  we  must  decompose  the  acceleration  of  A  into 
many  components,  and  find  out  which  of  these 
components  is  due  to  the  action  of  B.  The 
decomposition  would  still  be  possible  if  we 
suppose  that  the  action  of  C  on  A  is  simply  added 
to  that  of  B  on  A,  and  that  the  presence  of  the 
body  C  does  not  in  any  way  modify  the  action  of 
B  on  A,  or  that  the  presence  of  B  does  not  modify 
the  action  of  C  on  A  ;  that  is,  if  we  admit  that 
any  two  bodies  attract  each  other,  that  their 
mutual  action  is  along  their  join,  and  is  only  de 
pendent  on  their  distance  apart ;  if,  in  a  word,  we 
admit  the  hypothesis  of  central  forces. 

We  know  that  to  determine  the  masses  of  the 
heavenly  bodies  we  adopt  quite  a  different  prin 
ciple.  The  law  of  gravitation  teaches  us  that  the 


102  SCIENCE   AND   HYPOTHESIS. 

attraction  of  two  bodies  is  proportional  to  their 
masses;  if  r  is  their  distance  apart,  m  and  ni  their 
masses,  k  a  constant,  then  their  attraction  will  be 
knun'/r2.  What  we  are  measuring  is  therefore  not 
mass,  the  ratio  of  the  force  to  the  acceleration,  but 
the  attracting  mass ;  not  the  inertia  of  the  body, 
but  its  attracting  power.  It  is  an  indirect  process, 
the  use  of  which  is  not  indispensable  theoretically. 
We  might  have  said  that  the  attraction  is  in 
versely  proportional  to  the  square  of  the  distance, 
without  being  proportional  to  the  product  of  the 
masses,  that  it  is  equal  to  //r2  and  not  to  kinm'. 
If  it  were  so,  we  should  nevertheless,  by  observing 
the  relative  motion  of  the  celestial  bodies,  be  able 
to  calculate  the  masses  of  these  bodies. 

But  have  we  any  right  to  admit  the  hypothesis 
of  central  forces  ?  Is  this  hypothesis  rigorously 
accurate  ?  Is  it  certain  that  it  will  never  be 
falsified  by  experiment  ?  Who  will  venture  to 
make  such  an  assertion  ?  And  if  we  must  abandon 
this  hypothesis,  the  building  which  has  been  so 
laboriously  erected  must  fall  to  the  ground. 

We  have  no  longer  any  right  to  speak  of  the 
component  of  the  acceleration  of  A  which  is 
due  to  the  action  of  B.  We  have  no  means  of 
distinguishing  it  from  that  which  is  due  to  the 
action  of  C  or  of  any  other  body.  The  rule 
becomes  inapplicable  in  the  measurement  of 
masses.  What  then  is  left  of  the  principle  of 
the  equality  of  action  and  reaction  ?  If  we 
reject  the  hypothesis  of  central  forces  this  prin- 


THE    CLASSICAL    MECHANICS.  103 

ciple  must  go  too ;  the  geometrical  resultant  of 
all  the  forces  applied  to  the  different  bodies  of  a 
system  abstracted  from  all  external  action  will  be 
zero.  In  other  words,  the  motion  of  the  centre  of 
gravity  of  this  system  will  be  uniform  and  in  a 
straight  line.  Here  would  seem  to  be  a  means  of 
defining  mass.  The  position  of  the  centre  of 
gravity  evidently  depends  on  the  values  given  to 
the  masses ;  we  must  select  these  values  so  that 
the  motion  of  the  centre  of  gravity  is  uniform 
and  rectilinear.  This  will  always  be  possible  if 
Newton's  third  law  holds  good,  and  it  will  be  in 
general  possible  only  in  one  way.  But  no  system 
exists  which  is  abstracted  from  all  external  action; 
every  part  of  the  universe  is  subject,  more  or  less, 
to  the  action  of  the  other  parts.  The  law  of  the 
Motion  of  the  centre  of  gravity  is  only  rigorously  true 
when  applied  to  the  whole  universe. 

But  then,  to  obtain  the  values  of  the  masses 
we  must  find  the  motion  of  the  centre  of  gravity 
of  the  universe.  The  absurdity  of  this  conclusion 
is  obvious ;  the  motion  of  the  centre  of  gravity 
of  the  universe  will  be  for  ever  to  us  unknown. 
Nothing,  therefore,  is  left,  and  our  efforts  are 
fruitless.  There  is  no  escape  from  the  following 
definition,  which  is  only  a  confession  of  failure : 
Masses  are  co-efficients  which  it  is  found  convenient  to 
introduce  into  calculations. 

We  could  reconstruct  our  mechanics  by  giving 
to  our  masses  different  values.  The  new  me 
chanics  would  be  in  contradiction  neither  with 


104  SCIENCE   AND   HYPOTHESIS. 

experiment  nor  with  the  general  principles  of 
dynamics  (the  principle  of  inertia,  proportion 
ality  of  masses  and  accelerations,  equality  of 
action  and  reaction,  uniform  motion  of  the  centre 
of  gravity  in  a  straight  line,  and  areas).  But  the 
equations  of  this  mechanics  would  not  be  so  simple. 
Let  us  clearly  understand  this.  It  would  be  only 
the  first  terms  which  would  be  less  simple — i.e., 
those  we  already  know  through  experiment ; 
perhaps  the  small  masses  could  be  slightly  altered 
without  the  complete  equations  gaining  or  losing 
in  simplicity. 

Hertz  has  inquired  if  the  principles  of  mechanics 
are  rigorously  true.  "  In  the  opinion  of  many 
physicists  it  seems  inconceivable  that  experiment 
will  ever  alter  the  impregnable  principles  of 
mechanics;  and  yet,  what  is  due  to  experiment 
may  always  be  rectified  by  experiment."  From 
what  we  have  just  seen  these  fears  would  appear 
to  be  groundless.  The  principles  of  dynamics 
appeared  to  us  first  as  experimental  truths,  but 
we  have  been  compelled  to  use  them  as  defini 
tions.  It  is  by  definition  that  force  is  equal  to 
the  product  of  the  mass  and  the  acceleration ; 
this  is  a  principle  which  is  henceforth  beyond 
the  reach  of  any  future  experiment.  Thus 
it  is  by  definition  that  action  and  reaction  are 
equal  and  opposite.  But  then  it  will  be  said, 
these  unverifiable  principles  are  absolutely  devoid 
of  any  significance.  They  cannot  be  disproved  by 
experiment,  but  we  can  learn  from  them  nothing 


THE    CLASSICAL    MECHANICS.  105 

of  any  use  to  us ;  \vhat  then  is  the  use  of  studying 
dynamics  ?  This  somewhat  rapid  condemnation 
would  be  rather  unfair.  There  is  not  in  Nature  any 
system  perfectly  isolated,  perfectly  abstracted  from 
all  external  action ;  but  there  are  systems  which 
are  nearly  isolated.  If  we  observe  such  a  system, 
we  can  study  not  only  the  relative  motion  of  its 
different  parts  writh  respect  to  each  other,  but  the 
motion  of  its  centre  of  gravity  with  respect  to  the 
other  parts  of  the  universe.  We  then  find  that 
the  motion  of  its  centre  of  gravity  is  nearly  uniform 
and  rectilinear  in  conformity  with  Newton's  Third 
Law.  This  is  an  experimental  fact,  which  cannot 
be  invalidated  by  a  more  accurate  experiment. 
What,  in  fact,  would  a  more  accurate  experiment 
teach  us  ?  It  \vould  teach  us  that  the  law  is  only 
approximately  true,  and  we  know  that  already. 
Thus  is  explained  how  experiment  may  serve  as  a  basis 
for  the  principles  of  mechanics,  and  yet  will  never 
invalidate  them. 

Anthropomorphic  Mechanics. — It  will  be  said  that 
Kirchoff  has  only  followed  the  general  tendency  of 
mathematicians  towards  nominalism ;  from  this  his 
skill  as  a  physicist  has  not  saved  him.  He  wanted 
a  definition  of  a  force,  and  he  took  the  first  that 
came  handy  ;  but  we  do  not  require  a  definition 
of  force  ;  the  idea  of  force  is  primitive,  irreducible, 
indefinable ;  we  all  know  what  it  is  ;  of  it  we  have 
direct  intuition.  This  direct  intuition  arises  from 
the  idea  of  effort  which  is  familiar  to  us  from 
childhood.  But  in  the  first  place,  even  if  this 


106  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

direct  intuition  made  known  to  us  the  real  nature 
of  force  in  itself,  it  would  prove  to  be  an  insufficient 
basis  for  mechanics ;  it  would,  moreover,  be  quite 
useless.  The  important  thing  is  not  to  know 
what  force  is,  but  how  to  measure  it.  Everything 
which  does  not  teach  us  how  to  measure  it  is  as 
useless  to  the  mechanician  as,  for  instance,  the 
subjective  idea  of  heat  and  cold  to  the  student  of 
heat.  This  subjective  idea  cannot  be  translated 
into  numbers,  and  is  therefore  useless ;  a  scientist 
whose  skin  is  an  absolutely  bad  conductor  of  heat, 
and  who,  therefore,  has  never  felt  the  sensation 
of  heat  or  cold,  would  read  a  thermometer  in  just 
the  same  way  as  any  one  else,  and  would  have 
enough  material  to  construct  the  whole  of  the 
theory  of  heat. 

Now  this  immediate  notion  of  effort  is  of  no  use 
to  us  in  the  measurement  of  force.  It  is  clear,  for 
example,  that  I  shall  experience  more  fatigue  in 
lifting  a  weight  of  100  Ib.  than  a  man  who  is 
accustomed  to  lifting  heavy  burdens.  But  there 
is  more  than  this.  This  notion  of  effort  does  not 
teach  us  the  nature  of  force ;  it  is  definitively  re 
duced  to  a  recollection  of  muscular  sensations,  and 
no  one  will  maintain  that  the  sun  experiences 
a  muscular  sensation  when  it  attracts  the  earth. 
All  that  we  can  expect  to  find  from  it  is  a  symbol, 
less  precise  and  less  convenient  than  the  arrows 
(to  denote  direction)  used  by  geometers,  and  quite 
as  remote  from  reality. 

Anthropomorphism  plays  a  considerable  historic 


THE    CLASSICAL   MECHANICS.  107 

role  ill  the  genesis  of  mechanics ;  perhaps  it  may 
yet  furnish  us  with  a  symbol  which  some  minds 
may  find  convenient;  but  it  can  be  the  foundation 
of  nothing  of  a  really  scientific  or  philosophical 
character. 

The  Thread  School. — M.  Andrade,  in  his  Lccons 
de  Mecanique  physique,  has  modernised  anthropo 
morphic  mechanics.  To  the  school  of  mechanics 
with  which  Kirchoff  is  identified,  he  opposes  a 
school  which  is  quaintly  called  the  "  Thread 
School." 

This  school  tries  to  reduce  everything  to  the  con 
sideration  of  certain  material  systems  of  negligible 
mass,  regarded  in  a  state  of  tension  and  capable 
of  transmitting  considerable  effort  to  distant 
bodies — systems  of  which  the  ideal  type  is  the 
fine  string,  wire,  or  thread.  A  thread  which 
transmits  any  force  is  slightly  lengthened  in  the 
direction  of  that  force;  the  direction  of  the  thread 
tells  us  the  direction  of  the  force,  and  the  magni 
tude  of  the  force  is  measured  by  the  lengthening  of 
the  thread. 

We  may  imagine  such  an  experiment  as  the 
following : — A  body  A  is  attached  to  a  thread ; 
at  the  other  extremity  of  the  thread  acts  a  force 
which  is  made  to  vary  until  the  length  of  the 
thread  is  increased  by  a,  and  the  acceleration 
of  the  body  A  is  recorded.  A  is  then  detached, 
and  a  body  B  is  attached  to  the  same  thread,  and 
the  same  or  another  force  is  made  to  act  until 
the  increment  of  length  again  is  a,  and  the 


108  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

acceleration  of  B  is  noted.  The  experiment  is 
then  renewed  with  both  A  and  B  until  the  incre 
ment  of  length  is  ft.  The  four  accelerations 
observed  should  be  proportional.  Here  we  have 
an  experimental  verification  of  the  law  of  accelera 
tion  enunciated  above.  Again,  we  may  consider 
a  body  under  the  action  of  several  threads  in 
equal  tension,  and  by  experiment  we  determine 
the  direction  of  those  threads  when  the  body 
is  in  equilibrium.  This  is  an  experimental 
verification  of  the  law  of  the  composition  of 
forces.  But,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  what  have  we 
done  ?  We  have  defined  the  force  acting  on  the 
string  by  the  deformation  of  the  thread,  which  is 
reasonable  enough;  we  have  then  assumed  that  if 
a  body  is  attached  to  this  thread,  the  effort  which 
is  transmitted  to  it  by  the  thread  is  equal  to  the 
action  exercised  by  the  body  on  the  thread ;  in 
fact,  we  have  used  the  principle  of  action  and 
reaction  by  considering  it,  not  as  an  experimental 
truth,  but  as  the  very  definition  of  force.  This 
definition  is  quite  as  conventional  as  that  of 
Kirchoff,  but  it  is  much  less  general. 

All  the  forces  are  not  transmitted  by  the  thread 
(and  to  compare  them  they  would  all  have  to  be 
transmitted  by  identical  threads).  If  we  even 
admitted  that  the  earth  is  attached  to  the  sun  by 
an  invisible  thread,  at  any  rate  it  will  be  agreed 
that  we  have  no  means  of  measuring  the  increment 
of  the  thread.  Nine  times  out  of  ten,  in  con 
sequence,  our  definition  will  be  in  default ;  no 


THE    CLASSICAL    MECHANICS.  IOQ 

sense  of  any  kind  can  be  attached  to  it,  and  we 
must  fall  back  on  that  of  Kirchoff.  Why  then  go 
on  in  this  roundabout  way  ?  You  admit  a  certain 
definition  of  force  which  has  a  meaning  only  in 
certain  particular  cases.  In  those  cases  you  verify 
by  experiment  that  it  leads  to  the  law  of  accelera 
tion.  On  the  strength  of  these  experiments  you 
then  take  the  law  of  acceleration  as  a  definition  of 
force  in  all  the  other  cases. 

Would  it  not  be  simpler  to  consider  the  law  of 
acceleration  as  a  definition  in  all  cases,  and  to 
regard  the  experiments  in  question,  not  as  verifica 
tions  of  that  law,  but  as  verifications  of  the 
principle  of  action  and  reaction,  or  as  proving 
the  deformations  of  an  elastic  body  depend  only 
on  the  forces  acting  on  that  body  ?  Without 
taking  into  account  the  fact  that  the  conditions 
in  which  your  definition  could  be  accepted  can 
only  be  very  imperfectly  fulfilled,  that  a  thread  is 
never  without  mass,  that  it  is  never  isolated  from 
all  other  forces  than  the  reaction  of  the  bodies 
attached  to  its  extremities. 

The  ideas  expounded  by  M.  Andrade  are  none 
the  less  very  interesting.  If  they  do  not  satisfy  our 
logical  requirements,  they  give  us  a  better  view  of 
the  historical  genesis  of  the  fundamental  ideas  of 
mechanics.  The  reflections  they  suggest  show  us 
how  the  human  mind  passed  from  a  naive 
anthropomorphism  to  the  present  conception  of 
science. 

We  see  that  we  end  with  an  experiment  which 


110  SCIENCE   AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

is  very  particular,  and  as  a  matter  of  fact  very 
crude,  and  we  start  with  a  perfectly  general  law, 
perfectly  precise,  the  truth  of  which  we  regard  as 
absolute.  We  have,  so  to  speak,  freely  conferred 
this  certainty  on  it  by  looking  upon  it  as  a  con 
vention. 

Are  the  laws  of  acceleration  and  of  the  com 
position  of  forces  only  arbitrary  conventions  ? 
Conventions,  yes;  arbitrary,  no — they  would  be 
so  if  we  lost  sight  of  the  experiments  which  led  the 
founders  of  the  science  to  adopt  them,  and  which, 
imperfect  as  they  were,  were  sufficient  to  justify 
their  adoption.  It  is  well  from  time  to  time  to  let 
our  attention  dwell  on  the  experimental  origin  of 
these  conventions. 


CHAPTER  VII. 

RELATIVE   AND   ABSOLUTE    MOTION. 

The  Principle  of  Relative  Motion.  —  Sometimes 
endeavours  have  been  made  to  connect  the  law  of 
acceleration  with  a  more  general  principle.  The 
movement  of  any  system  whatever  ought  to 
obey  the  same  laws,  whether  it  is  referred  to  fixed 
axes  or  to  the  movable  axes  which  are  implied 
in  uniform  motion  in  a  straight  line.  This  is 
the  principle  of  relative  motion ;  it  is  imposed 
upon  us  for  two  reasons:  the  commonest  experi 
ment  confirms  it;  the  consideration  of  the  contrary 
hypothesis  is  singularly  repugnant  to  the  mind. 

Let  us  admit  it  then,  and  consider  a  body  under 
the  action  of  a  force.  The  relative  motion  of  this 
body  with  respect  to  an  observer  moving  with  a 
uniform  velocity  equal  to  the  initial  velocity  of  the 
body,  should  be  identical  with  what  would  be  its 
absolute  motion  if  it  started  from  rest.  We  con 
clude  that  its  acceleration  must  not  depend  upon 
its  absolute  velocity,  and  from  that  we  attempt  to 
deduce  the  complete  law  of  acceleration. 

For  a  long  time  there  have  been  traces  of  this 
proof  in  the  regulations  for  the  degree  of  IB.  es  Sc. 


112  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

It  is  clear  that  the  attempt  has  failed.  The 
obstacle  which  prevented  us  from  proving  the 
law  of  acceleration  is  that  we  have  no  definition 
of  force.  This  obstacle  subsists  in  its  entirety, 
since  the  principle  invoked  has  not  furnished  us 
wdth  the  missing  definition.  The  principle  of 
relative  motion  is  none  the  less  very  interesting, 
and  deserves  to  be  considered  for  its  own  sake. 
Let  us  try  to  enunciate  it  in  an  accurate  manner. 
We  have  said  above  that  the  accelerations  of  the 
different  bodies  which  form  part  of  an  isolated 
system  only  depend  on  their  velocities  and  their 
relative  positions,  and  not  on  their  velocities  and 
their  absolute  positions,  provided  that  the  mov 
able  axes  to  which  the  relative  motion  is  referred 
move  uniformly  in  a  straight  line;  or,  if  it  is  pre 
ferred,  their  accelerations  depend  only  on  the 
differences  of  their  velocities  and  the  differences  of 
their  co-ordinates,  and  not  on  the  absolute  values 
of  these  velocities  and  co-ordinates.  If  this  prin 
ciple  is  true  for  relative  accelerations,  or  rather 
for  differences  of  acceleration,  by  combining  it 
with  the  law  of  reaction  we  shall  deduce  that  it  is 
true  for  absolute  accelerations.  It  remains  to  be 
seen  how  we  can  prove  that  differences  of  accelera 
tion  depend  only  on  differences  of  velocities 
and  co-ordinates;  or,  to  speak  in  mathematical 
language,  that  these  differences  of  co-ordinates 
satisfy  differential  equations  of  the  second  order. 
Can  this  proof  be  deduced  from  experiment  or 
from  a  priori  conditions?  Remembering  what  we 


RELATIVE    AND    ABSOLUTE    MOTION.  113 

have  said  before,  the  reader  will  give  his  own 
answer.  Thus  enunciated,  in  fact,  the  principle  of 
relative  motion  curiously  resembles  what  I  called 
above  the  generalised  principle  of  inertia;  it  is  not 
quite  the  same  thing,  since  it  is  a  question  of 
differences  of  co-ordinates,  and  not  of  the  co 
ordinates  themselves.  The  new  principle  teaches 
us  something  more  than  the  old,  but  the  same 
discussion  applies  to  it,  and  would  lead  to  the 
same  conclusions.  We  need  not  recur  to  it. 

Newton's  Argument. — Here  we  find  a  very  im 
portant  and  even  slightly  disturbing  question.  I 
have  said  that  the  principle  of  relative  motion 
was  not  for  us  simply  a  result  of  experiment;  and 
that  a  priori  every  contrary  hypothesis  would  be 
repugnant  to  the  mind.  But,  then,  why  is  the 
principle  only  true  if  the  motion  of  the  movable 
axes  is  uniform  and  in  a  straight  line?  It  seems 
that  it  should  be  imposed  upon  us  with  the  same 
force  if  the  motion  is  accelerated,  or  at  any  rate 
if  it  reduces  to  a  uniform  rotation.  In  these  two 
cases,  in  fact,  the  principle  is  not  true.  I  need  not 
dwell  on  the  case  in  which  the  motion  of  the 
axes  is  in  a  straight  line  and  not  uniform.  The 
paradox  does  not  bear  a  moment's  examination. 
If  I  am  in  a  railway  carriage,  and  if  the  train, 
striking  against  any  obstacle  whatever,  is  suddenly 
stopped,  I  shall  be  projected  on  to  the  opposite 
side,  although  I  have  not  been  directly  acted  upon 
by  any  force.  There  is  nothing  mysterious  in 
that,  and  if  I  have  not  been  subject  to  the  action 

8 


114  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS, 

of  any  external  force,  the  train  has  experienced  an 
external  impact.  There  can  be  nothing  para 
doxical  in  the  relative  motion  of  two  bodies  being 
disturbed  when  the  motion  of  one  or  the  other  is 
modified  by  an  external  cause.  Nor  need  I  dwell 
on  the  case  of  relative  motion  referring  to  axes 
which  rotate  uniformly.  If  the  sky  were  for  ever 
covered  with  clouds,  and  if  we  had  no  means  of 
observing  the  stars,  we  might,  nevertheless,  con 
clude  that  the  earth  turns  round.  We  should  be 
warned  of  this  fact  by  the  flattening  at  the  poles, 
or  by  the  experiment  of  Foucault's  pendulum. 
And  yet,  would  there  in  this  case  be  any  meaning 
in  saying  that  the  earth  turns  round  ?  If  there  is 

I  no  absolute  space,  can  a  thing  turn  without  turn 
ing  with  respect  to  something;  and,  on  the  other 
hand,  how  can  we  admit  Newton's  conclusion  and 
believe  in  absolute  space?  But  it  is  not  sufficient 
to  state  that  all  possible  solutions  are  equally 
unpleasant  to  us.  We  must  analyse  in  each  case 
the  reason  of  our  dislike,  in  order  to  make  our 
choice  with  the  knowledge  of  the  cause.  The 
long  discussion  which  follows  must,  therefore,  be 
excused. 

Let  us  resume  our  imaginary  story.  Thick 
clouds  hide  the  stars  from  men  who  cannot  observe 
them,  and  even  are  ignorant  of  their  existence. 
How  will  those  men  know  that  the  earth  turns 
round  ?  No  doubt,  for  a  longer  period  than  did 
our  ancestors,  they  will  regard  the  soil  on  which 
they  stand  as  fixed  and  immovable!  They  will 


RELATIVE    AND    ABSOLUTE    MOTION.  1 15 

wait  a  much  longer  time  than  we  did  for  the 
coming  of  a  Copernicus;  but  this  Copernicus  will 
come  at  last.  How  will  he  come?  In  the  first 
place,  the  mechanical  school  of  this  world  would 
not  run  their  heads  against  an  absolute  contradic 
tion.  In  the  theory  of  relative  motion  we  observe, 
besides  real  forces,  t\vo  imaginary  forces,  which 
we  call  ordinary  centrifugal  force  and  compounded 
centrifugal  force.  Our  imaginary  scientists  can 
thus  explain  everything  by  looking  upon  these  two 
forces  as  real,  and  they  would  not  see  in  this  a 
contradiction  of  the  generalised  principle  of  inertia, 
for  these  forces  would  depend,  the  one  on  the 
relative  positions  of  the  different  parts  of  the 
system,  such  as  real  attractions,  and  the  other  on 
their  relative  velocities,  as  in  the  case  of  real 
frictions.  Many  difficulties,  however,  would  before 
long  awaken  their  attention.  If  they  succeeded  in 
realising  an  isolated  system,  the  centre  of  gravity 
of  this  system  would  not  have  an  approximately 
rectilinear  path.  They  could  invoke,  to  explain 
this  fact,  the  centrifugal  forces  which  they  would 
regard  as  real,  and  which,  no  doubt,  they  would 
attribute  to  the  mutual  actions  of  the  bodies — only 
they  would  not  see  these  forces  vanish  at  great 
distances— that  is  to  say,  in  proportion  as  the 
isolation  is  better  realised.  Far  from  it.  Centri 
fugal  force  increases  indefinitely  with  distance. 
Already  this  difficulty  would  seem  to  them  suffi 
ciently  serious,  but  it  would  not  detain  them  for 
long.  They  would  soon  imagine  some  very  subtle 


Il6  SCIENCE   AND   HYPOTHESIS. 

medium  analogous  to  our  ether,  in  which  all 
bodies  would  be  bathed,  and  which  would  exer 
cise  on  them  a  repulsive  action.  But  that  is  not 
all.  Space  is  symmetrical — yet  the  laws  of 
motion  would  present  no  symmetry.  They  should 
be  able  to  distinguish  between  right  and  left. 
They  would  see,  for  instance,  that  cyclones  always 
turn  in  the  same  direction,  while  for  reasons  of 
symmetry  they  should  turn  indifferently  in  any 
direction.  If  our  scientists  were  able  by  dint  of 
much  hard  work  to  make  their  universe  perfectly 
symmetrical,  this  symmetry  would  not  subsist, 
although  there  is  no  apparent  reason  why  it 
should  be  disturbed  in  one  direction  more  than 
in  another.  They  would  extract  this  from  the 
situation  no  doubt — they  would  invent  something 
which  would  not  be  more  extraordinary  than  the 
glass  spheres  of  Ptolemy,  and  would  thus  go  on 
accumulating  complications  until  the  long-ex 
pected  Copernicus  would  sweep  them  all  away 
with  a  single  blow,  saying  it  is  much  more  simple 
to  admit  that  the  earth  turns  round.  Just  as 
our  Copernicus  said  to  us:  "  It  is  more  convenient 
to  suppose  that  the  earth  turns  round,  because  the 
laws  of  astronomy  are  thus  expressed  in  a  more 
simple  language,"  so  he  would  say  to  them:  "It 
is  more  convenient  to  suppose  that  the  earth  turns 
round,  because  the  laws  of  mechanics  are  thus 
expressed  in  much  more  simple  language.  That 
does  not  prevent  absolute  space — that  is  to  say, 
the  point  to  which  we  must  refer  the  earth  to 


RELATIVE    AND    ABSOLUTE    MOTION.  117 

know  if  it  really  does  turn  round — from  having 
no  objective  existence.  And  hence  this  affirma 
tion:  "the  earth  turns  round,"  has  no  meaning, 
since  it  cannot  be  verified  by  experiment;  since 
such  an  experiment  not  only  cannot  be  realised  or 
even  dreamed  of  by  the  most  daring  Jules  Verne, 
but  cannot  even  be  conceived  of  without  con 
tradiction  ;  or,  in  other  words,  these  two  proposi 
tions,  "the  earth  turns  round,"  and,  "it  is  morel 
convenient  to  suppose  that  the  earth  turns  round,"  | 
have  one  and  the  same  meaning.  There  is  nothing 
more  in  one  than  in  the  other.  Perhaps  they  will 
not  be  content  with  this,  and  may  find  it  surpris 
ing  that  among  all  the  hypotheses,  or  rather  all 
the  conventions,  that  can  be  made  on  this  subject 
there  is  one  which  is  more  convenient  than  the 
rest?  But  if  we  have  admitted  it  without  diffi 
culty  when  it  is  a  question  of  the  laws  of 
astronomy,  why  should  we  object  when  it  is  a 
question  of  the  laws  of  mechanics  ?  We  have 
seen  that  the  co-ordinates  of  bodies  are  deter 
mined  by  differential  equations  of  the  second 
order,  and  that  so  are  the  differences  of  these 
co-ordinates.  This  is  what  we  have  called  the 
generalised  principle  of  inertia,  and  the  principle 
of  relative  motion.  If  the  distances  of  these 
bodies  were  determined  in  the  same  way  by 
equations  of  the  second  order,  it  seems  that  the 
mind  should  be  entirely  satisfied.  How  far  does 
the  mind  receive  this  satisfaction,  and  why  is  it 
not  content  with  it  ?  To  explain  this  we  had 


IlS  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

better  take  a  simple  example.  I  assume  a  system 
analogous  to  our  solar  system,  but  in  which  fixed 
stars  foreign  to  this  system  cannot  be  perceived, 
so  that  astronomers  can  only  observe  the  mutual 
distances  of  planets  and  the  sun,  and  not  the 
absolute  longitudes  of  the  planets.  If  we  deduce 
directly  from  Newton's  law  the  differential  equa 
tions  which  define  the  variation  of  these  distances, 
these  equations  will  not  be  of  the  second  order.  I 
mean  that  if,  outside  Newton's  law,  we  knew  the 
initial  values  of  these  distances  and  of  their  de 
rivatives  with  respect  to  time — that  would  not  be 
sufficient  to  determine  the  values  of  these  same 
distances  at  an  ulterior  moment.  A  datum  would 
be  still  lacking,  and  this  datum  might  be,  for 
example,  what  astronomers  call  the  area-constant. 
But  here  \ve  may  look  at  it  from  two  different 
points  of  view.  We  may  consider  two  kinds  of 
constants.  In  the  eyes  of  the  physicist  the  world 
reduces  to  a  series  of  phenomena  depending,  on  the 
I  one  hand,  solely  on  initial  phenomena,  and,  on  the 
other  hand,  on  the  laws  connecting  consequence 
|and  antecedent.  If  observation  then  teaches  us 
that  a  certain  quantity  is  a  constant,  we  shall  have 
a  choice  of  two  ways  of  looking  at  it.  So  let  us 
admit  that  there  is  a  law  which  requires  that  this 
quantity  shall  not  vary,  but  that  by  chance  it  has 
been  found  to  have  had  in  the  beginning  of  time 
this  value  rather  than  that,  a  value  that  it  has 
kept  ever  since.  This  quantity  might  then  be 
called  an  accidental  constant.  Or  again,  let  us 


RELATIVE   AND   ABSOLUTE    MOTION.          Il<) 

admit  on  the  contrary  that  there  is  a  law  of  nature 
which  imposes  on  this  quantity  this  value  and  not 
that.  We  shall  then  have  what  may  be  called  an 
essential  constant.  For  example,  in  virtue  of  the 
laws  of  Newton  the  duration  of  the  revolution  of 
the  earth  must  be  constant,  But  if  it  is  366  and 
something  sidereal  days,  and  not  300  or  400,  it  is 
because  of  some  initial  chance  or  other.  It  is  an 
accidental  constant.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  the 
exponent  of  the  distance  which  figures  in  the 
expression  of  the  attractive  force  is  equal  to  -2 
and  not  to  -3,  it  is  not  by  chance,  but  because  it 
is  required  by  Newton's  la\v.  It  is  an  essential 
constant.  I  do  not  know  if  this  manner  of  giving 
to  chance  its  share  is  legitimate  in  itself,  and  if 
there  is  not  some  artificiality  about  this  distinc 
tion;  but  it  is  certain  at  least  that  in  proportion 
as  Nature  has  secrets,  she  will  be  strictly  arbitrary 
and  always  uncertain  in  their  application.  As  far 
as  the  area-constant  is  concerned,  we  are  accus 
tomed  to  look  upon  it  as  accidental.  Is  it  certain 
that  our  imaginary  astronomers  would  do  the 
same  ?  If  they  were  able  to  compare  two  different 
solar  systems,  they  would  get  the  idea  that  this 
constant  may  assume  several  different  values.  But 
I  supposed  at  the  outset,  as  I  was  entitled  to  do, 
that  their  system  would  appear  isolated,  and  that 
they  would  see  no  star  which  was  foreign  to  their 
system.  Under  these  conditions  they  could  only 
detect  a  single  constant,  which  would  have  an 
absolutely  invariable,  unique  value.  They  would 


120  SCIENCE   AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

be  led  no  doubt  to  look  upon  it  as  an  essential 
constant. 

One  word  in  passing  to  forestall  an  objection. 
The  inhabitants  of  this  imaginary  world  could 
neither  observe  nor  define  the  area-constant  as  we 
do,  because  absolute  longitudes  escape  their  notice; 
but  that  would  not  prevent  them  from  being 
rapidly  led  to  remark  a  certain  constant  which 
would  be  naturally  introduced  into  their  equations, 
and  which  would  be  nothing  but  what  we  call  the 
area-constant.  But  then  what  would  happen  ? 
If  the  area-constant  is  regarded  as  essential,  as 
dependent  upon  a  law  of  nature,  then  in  order  to 
calculate  the  distances  of  the  planets  at  any  given 
moment  it  would  be  sufficient  to  know  the  initial 
values  of  these  distances  and  those  of  their  first 
derivatives.  From  this  new  point  of  view,  dis 
tances  will  be  determined  by  differential  equations 
of  the  second  order.  Would  this  completely 
satisfy  the  minds  of  these  astronomers  ?  I  think 
not.  In  the  first  place,  they  wTould  very  soon  see 
that  in  differentiating  their  equations  so  as  to 
raise  them  to  a  higher  order,  these  equations 
would  become  much  more  simple,  and  they  would 
be  especially  struck  by  the  difficulty  which  arises 
from  symmetry.  They  would  have  to  admit 
different  laws,  according  as  the  aggregate  of  the 
planets  presented  the  figure  of  a  certain  polyhedron 
or  rather  of  a  regular  polyhedron,  and  these  conse 
quences  can  only  be  escaped  by  regarding  the  area- 
constant  as  accidental.  I  have  taken  this  particular 


RELATIVE    AND   ABSOLUTE    MOTION.          121 

example,  because  I  have  imagined  astronomers 
who  would  not  be  in  the  least  concerned  with 
terrestrial  mechanics  and  whose  vision  would  be 
bounded  by  the  solar  system.  But  our  con 
clusions  apply  in  all  cases.  Our  universe  is  more 
extended  than  theirs,  since  we  have  fixed  stars; 
but  it,  too,  is  very  limited,  so  we  might  reason  on 
the  whole  of  our  universe  just  as  these  astronomers 
do  on  their  solar  system.  We  thus  see  that  we 
should  be  definitively  led  to  conclude  that  the 
equations  which  define  distances  are  of  an  order 
higher  than  the  second.  Why  should  this  alarm 
us — why  do  we  find  it  perfectly  natural  that  the 
sequence  of  phenomena  depends  on  initial  values 
of  the  first  derivatives  of  these  distances,  while  we 
hesitate  to  admit  that  they  may  depend  on  the 
initial  values  of  the  second  derivatives  ?  It  can 
only  be  because  of  mental  habits  created  in  us  by 
the  constant  study  of  the  generalised  principle  of 
inertia  and  of  its  consequences.  The  values  of  the 
distances  at  any  given  moment  depend  upon  their 
initial  values,  on  that  of  their  first  derivatives,  and 
something  else.  What  is  that  something  else  ?  If 
we  do  not  want  it  to  be  merely  one  of  the  second 
derivatives,  we  have  only  the  choice  of  hypotheses. 
Suppose,  as  is  usually  done,  that  this  something 
else  is  the  absolute  orientation  of  the  universe  in 
space,  or  the  rapidity  with  which  this  orientation 
varies;  this  may  be,  it  certainly  is,  the  most  con 
venient  solution  for  the  geometer.  But  it  is  not 
the  most  satisfactory  for  the  philosopher,  because 


122  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

this  orientation  does  not  exist.  We  may  assume 
that  this  something  else  is  the  position  or  the 
velocity  of  some  invisible  body,  and  this  is  what  is 
done  by  certain  persons,  who  have  even  called  the 
body  Alpha,  although  we  are  destined  to  never 
know  anything  about  this  body  except  its  name. 
This  is  an  artifice  entirely  analogous  to  that  of 
which  I  spoke  at  the  end  of  the  paragraph  con 
taining  my  reflections  on  the  principle  of  inertia. 
But  as  a  matter  of  fact  the  difficulty  is  artificial. 
Provided  that  the  future  indications  of  our  instru 
ments  can  only  depend  on  the  indications  which 
they  have  given  us,  or  that  they  might  have 
formerly  given  us,  such  is  all  we  want,  and  with 
these  conditions  we  may  rest  satisfied. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

ENERGY    AND    THERMODYNAMICS. 

Energetics. — The  difficulties  raised  by  the  classi 
cal  mechanics  have  led  certain  minds  to  prefer  a 
new  system  which  they  call  Energetics.  Energetics 
took  its  rise  in  consequence  of  the  discovery  of  the 
principle  of  the  conservation  of  energy.  Helm- 
holtz  gave  it  its  definite  form.  We  begin  by  de 
fining  two  quantities  which  play  a  fundamental 
part  in  this  theory.  They  are  kinetic  energy,  or 
vis  viva,  and  potential  energy.  Every  change 
that  the  bodies  of  nature  can  undergo  is  regulated 
by  two  experimental  laws.  First,  the  sum  of  the 
kinetic  and  potential  energies  is  constant.  This 
is  the  principle  of  the  conservation  of  energy. 
Second,  if  a  system  of  bodies  is  at  A  at  the  time  t0, 
and  at  B  at  the  time  £15  it  always  passes  from  the 
first  position  to  the  second  by  such  a  path  that 
the  mean  value  of  the  difference  between  the  two 
kinds  of  energy  in  the  interval  of  time  which 
separates  the  two  epochs  t0  and  tl  is  a  minimum. 
This  is  Hamilton's  principle,  and  is  one  of  the 
forms  of  the  principle  of  least  action.  The 
energetic  theory  has  the  following  advantages 


124  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

over  the  classical.  First,  it  is  less  incomplete — 
that  is  to  say,  the  principles  of  the  conservation  of 
energy  and  of  Hamilton  teach  us  more  than  the 
fundamental  principles  of  the  classical  theory,  and 
exclude  certain  motions  which  do  not  occur  in 
nature  and  which  would  be  compatible  with  the 
classical  theory.  Second,  it  frees  us  from  the 
hypothesis  of  atoms,  which  it  was  almost  impos 
sible  to  avoid  with  the  classical  theory.  But  in 
its  turn  it  raises  fresh  difficulties.  The  definitions 
of  the  two  kinds  of  energy  would  raise  difficulties 
almost  as  great  as  those  of  force  and  mass  in  the 
first  system.  However,  we  can  get  out  of  these 
difficulties  more  easily,  at  any  rate  in  the  simplest 
cases.  Assume  an  isolated  system  formed  of  a 
certain  number  of  material  points.  Assume  that 
these  points  are  acted  upon  by  forces  depending 
only  on  their  relative  position  and  their  dis 
tances  apart,  and  independent  of  their  velocities. 
In  virtue  of  the  principle  of  the  conservation  of 
energy  there  must  be  a  function  of  forces.  In  this 
simple  case  the  enunciation  of  the  principle  of  the 
conservation  of  energy  is  of  extreme  simplicity. 
A  certain  quantity,  which  may  be  determined  by 
experiment,  must  remain  constant.  This  quantity 
is  the  sum  of  two  terms.  The  first  depends  only  on 
the  position  of  the  material  points,  and  is  inde 
pendent  of  their  velocities;  the  second  is  pro 
portional  to  the  squares  of  these  velocities.  This 
decomposition  can  only  take  place  in  one  way. 
The  first  of  these  terms,  which  I  shall  call  U,  will 


ENERGY   AND    THERMO-DYNAMICS.  125 

be  potential  energy ;  the  second,  which  I  shall  call 
T,  will  be  kinetic  energy.  It  is  true  that  if  T  +  U 
is  constant,  so  is  any  function  of  T  +  U,  <£  (T  +  U). 
But  this  function  <f>  (T+U)  will  not  be  the  sum  of 
two  terms,  the  one  independent  of  the  velocities, 
and  the  other  proportional  to  the  square  of  the 
velocities.  Among  the  functions  which  remain 
constant  there  is  only  one  which  enjoys  this  pro 
perty.  It  is  T  +  U  (or  a  linear  function  of  T  +  U), 
it  matters  not  which,  since  this  linear  function  may 
always  be  reduced  to  T  +  U  by  a  change  of  unit 
and  of  origin.  This,  then,  is  what  we  call  energy. 
The  first  term  we  shall  call  potential  energy,  and 
the  second  kinetic  energy.  The  definition  of  the 
two  kinds  of  energy  may  therefore  be  carried 
through  without  any  ambiguity. 

So  it  is  with  the  definition  of  mass.  Kinetic 
energy,  or  vis  viva,  is  expressed  very  simply  by  the 
aid  of  the  masses,  and  of  the  relative  velocities  of  all 
the  material  points  with  reference  to  one  of  them. 
These  relative  velocities  may  be  observed,  and 
when  we  have  the  expression  of  the  kinetic  energy 
as  a  function  of  these  relative  velocities,  the  co 
efficients  of  this  expression  will  give  us  the  masses. 
So  in  this  simple  case  the  fundamental  ideas  can 
be  defined  without  difficulty.  But  the  difficulties 
reappear  in  the  more  complicated  cases  if  the 
forces,  instead  of  depending  solely  on  the  dis 
tances,  depend  also  on  the  velocities.  For  ex 
ample,  Weber  supposes  the  mutual  action  of  two 
electric  molecules  to  depend  not  only  on  their 


126  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

distance  but  on  their  velocity  and  on  their  accelera 
tion.  If  material  points  attracted  each  other 
according  to  an  analogous  law,  U  would  depend 
on  the  velocity,  and  it  might  contain  a  term 
proportional  to  the  square  of  the  velocity.  How 
can  we  detect  among  such  terms  those  that  arise 
from  T  or  U  ?  and  how,  therefore,  can  we  dis 
tinguish  the  two  parts  of  the  energy  ?  But  there 
is  more  than  this.  How  can  we  define  energy 
itself?  We  have  no  more  reason  to  take  as  our 
definition  T+U  rather  than  any  other  function  of 
T  +  U,  when  the  property  which  characterised 
T  +  U  has  disappeared — namely,  that  of  being  the 
sum  of  two  terms  of  a  particular  form.  But  that 
is  not  all.  We  must  take  account,  not  only  of 
mechanical  energy  properly  so  called,  but  of  the 
other  forms  of  energy— heat,  chemical  energy, 
electrical  energy,  etc.  The  principle  of  the  con 
servation  of  energy  must  be  written  T+U+Q= 
a  constant,  where  T  is  the  sensible  kinetic  energy, 
U  the  potential  energy  of  position,  depending  only 
on  the  position  of  the  bodies,  Q  the  internal 
molecular  energy  under  the  thermal,  chemical,  or 
electrical  form.  This  would  be  all  right  if  the 
three  terms  were  absolutely  distinct ;  if  T  were 
proportional  to  the  square  of  the  velocities,  U 
independent  of  these  velocities  and  of  the  state  of 
the  bodies,  Q  independent  of  the  velocities  and  of 
the  positions  of  the  bodies,  and  depending  only  on 
their  internal  state.  The  expression  for  the  energy 
could  be  decomposed  in  one  way  only  into  three 


ENERGY   AND   THERMO-DYNAMICS.  127 

terms  of  this  form.  But  this  is  not  the  case.  Let 
us  consider  electrified  bodies.  The  electro-static 
energy  due  to  their  mutual  action  will  evidently 
depend  on  their  charge — i.e.,  on  their  state ; 
but  it  will  equally  depend  on  their  position. 
If  these  bodies  are  in  motion,  they  will  act 
electro-dynamically  on  one  another,  and  the 
electro-dynamic  energy  will  depend  not  only  on 
their  state  and  their  position  but  on  their  velocities. 
We  have  therefore  no  means  of  making  the  selec 
tion  of  the  terms  which  should  form  part  of  T, 
and  U,  and  Q,  and  of  separating  the  three  parts  of 
the  energy.  IfT  +  U  +  Q  is  constant,  the  same  is 
true  of  any  function  whatever,  </>  (T  +  U  +  Q). 

If  T  +  U  +  Q  were  of  the  particular  form  that  I 
have  suggested  above,  no  ambiguity  would  ensue. 
Among  the  functions  </>  (T  +  U  +  Q)  which  remain 
constant,  there  is  only  one  that  would  be  of  this 
particular  form,  namely  the  one  which  I  would 
agree  to  call  energy.  But  I  have  said  this  is  not 
rigorously  the  case.  Among  the  functions  that 
remain  constant  there  is  not  one  which  can 
rigorously  be  placed  in  this  particular  form.  How 
then  can  we  choose  from  among  them  that  which 
should  be  called  energy  ?  We  have  no  longer 
any  guide  in  our  choice. 

Of  the  principle  of  the  conservation  of  energy 
there  is  nothing  left  then  but  an  enunciation:— 
There  is  something  which  remains  constant.  In  this 
form  it,  in  its  turn,  is  outside  the  bounds  of  ex 
periment  and  reduced  to  a  kind  of  tautology.  It 


128  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

is  clear  that  if  the  world  is  governed  by  laws 
there  will  be  quantities  which  remain  constant. 
Like  Newton's  laws,  and  for  an  analogous  reason, 
the  principle  of  the  conservation  of  energy  being 
based  on  experiment,  can  no  longer  be  invalidated 
by  it. 

This  discussion  shows  that,  in  passing  from  the 
classical  system  to  the  energetic,  an  advance  has 
been  made ;  but  it  shows,  at  the  same  time,  that 
we  have  not  advanced  far  enough. 

Another  objection  seems  to  be  still  more  serious. 
The  principle  of  least  action  is  applicable  to  revers 
ible  phenomena,  but  it  is  by  no  means  satisfactory 
as  far  as  irreversible  phenomena  are  concerned. 
Helmholtz  attempted  to  extend  it  to  this  class 
of  phenomena,  but  he  did  not  and  could  not 
succeed.  So  far  as  this  is  concerned  all  has  yet  to 
be  done.  The  very  enunciation  of  the  principle  of 
least  action  is  objectionable.  To  move  from  one 
point  to  another,  a  material  molecule,  acted  upon 
by  no  force,  but  compelled  to  move  on  a  surface, 
will  take  as  its  path  the  geodesic  line — i.e.,  the 
shortest  path.  This  molecule  seems  to  know  the 
point  to  which  we  want  to  take  it,  to  foresee 
the  time  that  it  will  take  it  to  reach  it  by  such 
a  path,  and  then  to  know  how  to  choose  the  most 
convenient  path.  The  enunciation  of  the  prin 
ciple  presents  it  to  us,  so  to  speak,  as  a  living 
and  free  entity.  It  is  clear  that  it  would  be  better 
to  replace  it  by  a  less  objectionable  enunciation, 
one  in  which,  as  philosophers  would  say,  final 


ENERGY    AND    THERMODYNAMICS,  I2Q 

effects  do  not   seem  to  be  substituted  for  acting 
causes. 

Thcr mo-dynamics. — The  role  of  the  two  funda 
mental  principles  of  thermo-dynamics  becomes 
daily  more  important  in  all  branches  of  natural 
philosophy.  Abandoning  the  ambitious  theories 
of  forty  years  ago,  encumbered  as  they  were  with 
molecular  hypotheses,  we  now  try  to  rest  on 
thermo-dynamics  alone  the  entire  edifice  of 
mathematical  physics.  Will  the  two  principles 
of  Mayer  and  of  Clausius  assure  to  it  founda 
tions  solid  enough  to  last  for  some  time  ?  We 
all  feel  it,  but  whence  does  our  confidence 
arise  ?  An  eminent  physicist  said  to  me  one  day, 
apropos  of  the  law  of  errors: — every  one  stoutly \ 
believes  it,  because  mathematicians  imagine  that 
it  is  an  effect  of  observation,  and  observers  imagine 
that  it  is  a  mathematical  theorem.  And  this  was 
for  a  long  time  the  case  with  the  principle  of  the 
conservation  of  energy.  It  is  no  longer  the  same 
now.  There  is  no  one  who  does  not  know  that  it 
is  an  experimental  fact.  But  then  who  gives  us 
the  right  of  attributing  to  the  principle  itself  more 
generality  and  more  precision  than  to  the  experi 
ments  which  have  served  to  demonstrate  it?  This 
is  asking,  if  it  is  legitimate  to  generalise,  as  we  do 
every  day,  empiric  data,  and  I  shall  not  be  so 
foolhardy  as  to  discuss  this  question,  after  so  many 
philosophers  have  vainly  tried  to  solve  it.  One 
thing  alone  is  certain.  If  this  permission  were 
refused  to  us,  science  could  not  exist;  or  at  least 

9 


130  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

would  be  reduced  to  a  kind  of  inventory,  to  the 
ascertaining  of  isolated  facts.  It  would  not  longer 
be  to  us  of  any  value,  since  it  could  not  satisfy  our 
need  of  order  and  harmony,  and  because  it  would 
be  at  the  same  time  incapable  of  prediction..  As 
the  circumstances  which  have  preceded  any  fact 
whatever  will  never  again,  in  all  probability,  be 
simultaneously  reproduced,  we  already  require  a 
first  generalisation  to  predict  whether  the  fact  will 
be  renewed  as  soon  as  the  least  of  these  circum 
stances  is  changed,  f  But  every  proposition  may 
be  generalised  in  an  infinite  number  of  ways. 
Among  all  possible  generalisations  we  must 
choose,  and  we  cannot  but  choose  the  simplest. 
We  are  therefore  led  to  adopt  the  same  course 
as  if  a  simple  law  were,  other  things  being  equal, 
more  probable  than  a  complex  law.  A  century 
ago  it  was  frankly  confessed  and  proclaimed 
abroad  that  Nature  loves  simplicity;  but  Nature 
has  proved  the  contrary  since  then  on  more  than 
one  occasion.  We  no  longer  confess  this  tendency, 
and  we  only  keep  of  it  what  is  indispensable,  so 
that  science  may  not  become  impossible.  In 
formulating  a  general,  simple,  and  formal  law, 
based  on  a  comparatively  small  number  of  not  alto 
gether  consistent  experiments,  we  have  only  obeyed 
a  necessity  from  which  the  human  mind  cannot 
free  itself.  ^But  there  is  something  more,  and  that 
is  why  I  dwell  on  this  topic.  No  one  doubts  that 
Mayer's  principle  is  not  called  upon  to  survive  all 
the  particular  laws  from  which  it  was  deduced,  in 


ENERGY    AND   THERMO-DYNAMICS.  131 

the  same  way  that  Newton's  law  has  survived  the 
laws  of  Kepler  from  which  it  was  derived,  and 
which  are  no  longer  anything  but  approximations, 
if  we  take  perturbations  into  account.  Now  why 
does  this  principle  thus  occupy  a  kind  of  privileged 
position  among  physical  laws?  There  are  many 
reasons  for  that.  At  the  outset  we  think  that  we 
cannot  reject  it,  or  even  doubt  its  absolute  rigour, 
without  admitting  the  possibility  of  perpetual 
motion;  we  certainly  feel  distrust  at  such  a 
prospect,  and  we  believe  ourselves  less  rash  in 
affirming  it  than  in  denying  it.  That  perhaps  is 
not  quite  accurate.  The  impossibility  of  perpetual 
motion  only  implies  the  conservation  of  energy  for 
reversible  phenomena.  The  imposing  simplicity 
of  Mayer's  principle  equally  contributes  to 
strengthen  our  faith.  In  a  law  immediately  de 
duced  from  experiments,  such  as  Mariotte's  law, 
this  simplicity  would  rather  appear  to  us  a  reason 
for  distrust ;  but  here  this  is  no  longer  the  case. 
We  take  elements  which  at  the  first  glance  are 
unconnected;  these  arrange  themselves  in  an  un 
expected  order,  and  form  a  harmonious  whole. 
We  cannot  believe  that  this  unexpected  har 
mony  is  a  mere  result  of  chance.  Our  conquest 
appears  to  be  valuable  to  us  in  proportion  to  the 
efforts  it  has  cost,  and  we  feel  the  more  certain  of 
having  snatched  its  true  secret  from  Nature  in  pro 
portion  as  Nature  has  appeared  more  jealous  of  our 
attempts  to  discover  it.  But  these  are  only  small 
reasons.  Before  we  raise  Mayer's  law  to  the 


132  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

dignity  of  an  absolute  principle,  a  deeper  discussion 
is  necessary.  But  if  we  embark  on  this  discussion 
we  see  that  this  absolute  principle  is  not  even  easy 
to  enunciate.  In  every  particular  case  we  clearly 
see  what  energy  is,  and  we  can  give  it  at  least  a 
provisory  definition;  but  it  is  impossible  to  find 
a  general  definition  of  it.  If  we  wish  to  enunciate 
the  principle  in  all  its  generality  and  apply  it  to 
the  universe,  we  see  it  vanish,  so  to  speak,  and 
nothing  is  left  but  this — there  is  something  which 
remains  constant.  But  has  this  a  meaning  ?  In 
the  determinist  hypothesis  the  state  of  the  uni 
verse  is  determined  by  an  extremely  large  number 
n  of  parameters,  which  I  shall  call  xit  x.2,  x3  .  .  .  xn. 
As  soon  as  we  know  at  a  given  moment  the  values  of 
these  n  parameters,  we  also  know  their  derivatives 
with  respect  to  time,  and  we  can  therefore  cal 
culate  the  values  of  these  same  parameters  at  an 
anterior  or  ulterior  moment.  In  other  words, 
these  n  parameters  specify  n  differential  equations 
of  the  first  order.  These  equations  have  n-i 
integrals,  and  therefore  there  are  n-i  functions  of 
xi>  X2>  #3  •  .  .  xMt  which  remain  constant.  If  we 
say  then,  there  is  something  which  remains  constant, 
we  are  only  enunciating  a  tautology.  We  would 
be  even  embarrassed  to  decide  which  among  all 
our  integrals  is  that  which  should  retain  the  name 
of  energy.  Besides,  it  is  not  in  this  sense  that 
Mayer's  principle  is  understood  when  it  is  applied 
to  a  limited  system.  We  admit,  then,  that  p  of 
our  n  parameters  vary  independently  so  that  we 


ENERGY    AND    THERMODYNAMICS.  133 

have  only  n  -p  relations,  generally  linear,  between 
our  n  parameters  and  their  derivatives.  Suppose, 
for  the  sake  of  simplicity,  that  the  sum  of  the 
work  done  by  the  external  forces  is  zero,  as  well 
as  that  of  all  the  quantities  of  heat  given  off  from 
the  interior:  what  will  then  be  the  meaning  of 
our  principle  ?  There  is  a  combination  of  these  n  -p 
relations,  of  which  the  first  member  is  an  exact 
differential;  and  then  this  differential  vanishing 
in  virtue  of  our  n—p  relations,  its  integral  is  a 
constant,  and  it  is  this  integral  which  we  call 
energy.  But  how  can  it  be  that  there  are  several 
parameters  whose  variations  are  independent  ? 
That  can  only  take  place  in  the  case  of  external 
forces  (although  \ve  have  supposed,  for  the  sake 
of  simplicity,  that  the  algebraical  sum  of  all  the 
work  done  by  these  forces  has  vanished).  If, 
in  fact,  the  system  were  completely  isolated  from 
all  external  action,  the  values  of  our  n  parameters 
at  a  given  moment  would  suffice  to  determine 
the  state  of  the  system  at  any  ulterior  moment 
whatever,  provided  that  we  still  clung  to  the  deter- 
minist  hypothesis.  We  should  therefore  fall  back 
on  the  same  difficulty  as  before.  If  the  future 
state  of  the  system  is  not  entirely  determined 
by  its  present  state,  it  is  because  it  further  depends 
on  the  state  of  bodies  external  to  the  system. 
But  then,  is  it  likely  that  there  exist  among  the 
parameters  %  which  define  the  state  of  the  system  of 
equations  independent  of  this  state  of  the  external 
bodies?  and  if  in  certain  cases  we  think  we  can 


134  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

find  them,  is  it  not  only  because  of  our  ignorance, 
and  because  the  influence  of  these  bodies  is  too 
weak  for  our  experiment  to  be  able  to  detect  it  ? 
If  the  system  is  not  regarded  as  completely 
isolated,  it  is  probable  that  the  rigorously  exact 
expression  of  its  internal  energy  will  depend  upon 
the  state  of  the  external  bodies.  Again,  I  have 
supposed  above  that  the  sum  of  all  the  external 
work  is  zero,  and  if  we  wish  to  be  free  from 
this  rather  artificial  restriction  the  enunciation 
becomes  still  more  difficult.  To  formulate 
Mayer's  principle  by  giving  it  an  absolute 
meaning,  we  must  extend  it  to  the  whole 
universe,  and  then  we  find  ourselves  face  to 
face  with  the  very  difficulty  we  have  endeavoured 
to  avoid.  To  sum  up,  and  to  use  ordinary 
language,  the  law  of  the  conservation  of  energy 
can  have  only  one  significance,  because  there  is 
in  it  a  property  common  to  all  possible  properties; 
but  in  the  determinist  hypothesis  there  is  only  one 
possible,  and  then  the  law  has  no  meaning.  In 
the  indeterminist  hypothesis,  on  the  other  hand, 
it  would  have  a  meaning  even  if  \ve  wished  to 
regard  it  in  an  absolute  sense.  It  would  appear 
as  a  limitation  imposed  on  freedom. 

But  this  word  warns  me  that  I  am  wandering 
from  the  subject,  and  that  I  am  leaving  the 
domain  of  mathematics  and  physics.  I  check 
myself,  therefore,  and  I  wish  to  retain  only  one 
impression  of  the  whole  of  this  discussion,  and 
that  is,  that  Mayer's  law  is  a  form  subtle  enough 


ENERGY   AND   THERMODYNAMICS.  ±35 

for  us  to  be  able  to  put  into  it  almost  anything  we 
like.  I  do  not  mean  by  that  that  it  corresponds 
to  no  objective  reality,  nor  that  it  is  reduced  to 
mere  tautology;  since,  in  each  particular  case,  and 
provided  we  do  not  wish  to  extend  it  to  the 
absolute,  it  has  a  perfectly  clear  meaning.  This 
subtlety  is  a  reason  for  believing  that  it  will  last 
long;  and  as,  on  the  other  hand,  it  will  only 
disappear  to  be  blended  in  a  higher  harmony, 
we  may  work  with  confidence  and  utilise  it, 
certain  beforehand  that  our  work  will  not  be 
lost. 

Almost  everything  that  I  have  just  said 
applies  to  the  principle  of  Clausius.  What 
distinguishes  it  is,  that  it  is  expressed  by  an 
inequality.  It  will  be  said  perhaps  that  it  is 
the  same  with  all  physical  laws,  since  their 
precision  is  always  limited  by  errors  of 
observation.  But  they  at  least  claim  to  be 
first  approximations,  and  we  hope  to  replace 
them  little  by  little  by  more  exact  laws.  If, 
on  the  other  hand,  the  principle  of  Clausius 
reduces  to  an  inequality,  this  is  not  caused  by 
the  imperfection  of  our  means  of  observation,  but 
by  the  very  nature  of  the  question. 

General  Conclusions  on  Part  III. — The  prin 
ciples  of  mechanics  are  therefore  presented  to  us 
under  two  different  aspects.  On  the  one  hand, 
there  are  truths  founded  on  experiment,  and 
verified  approximately  as  far  as  almost  isolated 
systems  are  concerned ;  on  the  other  hand, 


136  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

there  are  postulates  applicable  to  the  whole  of 
the  universe  and  regarded  as  rigorously  true. 
If  these  postulates  possess  a  generality  and  a 
certainty  which  falsify  the  experimental  truths 
from  which  they  were  deduced,  it  is  because 
they  reduce  in  final  analysis  to  a  simple  con 
vention  that  we  have  a  right  to  make,  because 
we  are  certain  beforehand  that  no  experiment 
can  contradict  it.  This  convention,  however,  is 
not  absolutely  arbitrary;  it  is  not  the  child 
of  our  caprice.  \Ye  admit  it  because  certain 
experiments  have  shown  us  that  it  will  be  con 
venient,  and  thus  is  explained  how  experiment 
has  built  up  the  principles  of  mechanics,  and 
why,  moreover,  it  cannot  reverse  them.  Take  a 
comparison  with  geometry.  The  fundamental 
propositions  of  geometry,  for  instance,  Euclid's 
postulate,  are  only  conventions,  and  it  is  quite 
as  unreasonable  to  ask  if  they  are  true  or  false 
as  to  ask  if  the  metric  system  is  true  or  false. 
Only,  these  conventions  are  convenient,  and  there 
are  certain  experiments  which  prove  it  to  us.  At 
the  first  glance,  the  analogy  is  complete,  the  role 
of  experiment  seems  the  same.  We  shall  there 
fore  be  tempted  to  say,  either  mechanics  must 
be  looked  upon  as  experimental  science  and  then 
it  should  be  the  same  with  geometry;  or,  on  the 
contrary,  geometry  is  a  deductive  science,  and 
then  we  can  say  the  same  of  mechanics.  Such 
a  conclusion  would  be  illegitimate.  The  experi 
ments  which  have  led  us  to  adopt  as  more 


ENERGY   AND   THERMO-DYNAMICS.  137 

convenient  the  fundamental  conventions  of 
geometry  refer  to  bodies  which  have  nothing 
in  common  with  those  that  are  studied  by 
geometry.  They  refer  to  the  properties  of  solid 
bodies  and  to  the  propagation  of  light  in  a  straight 
line.  These  are  mechanical,  optical  experiments. 
In  no  way  can  they  be  regarded  as  geometrical 
experiments.  And  even  the  probable  reason  why 
our  geometry  seems  convenient  to  us  is,  that  our 
bodies,  our  hands,  and  our  limbs  enjoy  the  properties 
of  solid  bodies.  Our  fundamental  experiments  are 
pre-eminently  physiological  experiments  which 
refer,  not  to  the  space  which  is  the  object  that 
geometry  must  study,  but  to  our  body — that  is  to 
say,  to  the  instrument  which  we  use  for  that 
study.  On  the  other  hand,  the  fundamental 
conventions  of  mechanics  and  the  experiments 
which  prove  to  us  that  they  are  convenient, 
certainly  refer  to  the  same  objects  or  to  analogous 
objects.  Conventional  and  general  principles  are 
the  natural  and  direct  generalisations  of  experi 
mental  and  particular  principles.  Let  it  not  be 
said  that  I  am  thus  tracing  artificial  frontiers 
between  the  sciences;  that  I  am  separating  by 
a  barrier  geometry  properly  so  called  from  the 
study  of  solid  bodies.  I  might  just  as  well 
raise  a  barrier  between  experimental  mechanics 
and  the  conventional  mechanics  of  general 
principles.  Who  does  not  see,  in  fact,  that 
by  separating  these  two  sciences  we  mutilate 
both,  and  that  what  will  remain  of  the  conven- 


138  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

tional  mechanics  when  it  is  isolated  will  be  but 
very  little,  and  can  in  no  way  be  compared  with 
that  grand  body  of  doctrine  which  is  called 
geometry. 

We  now  understand  why  the  teaching  of 
mechanics  should  remain  experimental.  Thus 
only  can  we  be  made  to  understand  the  genesis 
of  the  science,  and  that  is  indispensable  for 
a  complete  knowledge  of  the  science  itself. 
Besides,  if  we  study  mechanics,  it  is  in  order 
to  apply  it ;  and  we  can  only  apply  it  if  it  remains 
objective.  Now,  as  we  have  seen,  when  principles 
gain  in  generality  and  certainty  they  lose  in 
objectivity.  It  is  therefore  especially  with  the 
objective  side  of  principles  that  we  must  be 
early  familiarised,  and  this  can  only  be  by 
passing  from  the  particular  to  the  general,  instead 
of  from  the  general  to  the  particular. 

Principles  are  conventions  and  definitions  in 
disguise.  They  are,  however,  deduced  from 
experimental  laws,  and  these  laws  have,  so  to 
speak,  been  erected  into  principles  to  which 
our  mind  attributes  an  absolute  value.  Some 
philosophers  have  generalised  far  too  much. 
They  have  thought  that  the  principles  were 
the  whole  of  science,  and  therefore  that  the 
whole  of  science  was  conventional.  This  para 
doxical  doctrine,  which  is  called  Nominalism, 
cannot  stand  examination.  How  can  a  law 
become  a  principle  ?  It  expressed  a  relation 
between  two  real  terms,  A  and  B;  but  it  was 


ENERGY    AND    THERMODYNAMICS.  139 

not  rigorously  true,  it  was  only  approximate. 
We  introduce  arbitrarily  an  intermediate  term,  C, 
more  or  less  imaginary,  and  C  is  by  definition  that 
which  has  with  A  exactly  the  relation  expressed 
by  the  law.  So  our  law  is  decomposed  into  an 
absolute  and  rigorous  principle  which  expresses 
the  relation  of  A  to  C,  and  an  approximate  experi 
mental  and  revisable  law  which  expresses  the: 
relation  of  C  to  B.  But  it  is  clear  that  however 
far  this  decomposition  may  be  carried,  laws  will 
always  remain.  We  shall  now  enter  into  the 
domain  of  laws  properly  so  called. 


PART   IV, 

NATURE. 
CHAPTER  IX. 

HYPOTHESES    IN    PHYSICS. 

The  Role  of  Experiment  and  Generalisation. — 
Experiment  is  the  sole  source  of  truth.  It  alone 
can  teach  us  something  new ;  it  alone  can  give 
us  certainty.  These  are  two  points  that  cannot 
be  questioned.  But  then,  if  experiment  is  every 
thing,  what  place  is  left  for  mathematical  physics  ? 
What  can  experimental  physics  do  with  such  an 
auxiliary — an  auxiliary,  moreover,  which  seems 
useless,  and  even  may  be  dangerous? 

However,  mathematical  physics  exists.  It  has 
rendered  undeniable  service,  and  that  is  a  fact 
which  has  to  be  explained.  It  is  not  sufficient 
merely  to  observe ;  we  must  use  our  observations, 
and  for  that  purpose  we  must  generalise.  This 
is  what  has  always  been  done,  only  as  the  recollec 
tion  of  past  errors  has  made  man  more  and  more 
circumspect,  he  has  observed  more  and  more  and 
generalised  less  and  less.  Every  age  has  scoffed 
at  its  predecessor,  accusing  it  of  having  generalised 


HYPOTHESES    IN    PHYSICS.  141 

too  boldly  and  too  naively.  Descartes  used  to 
commiserate  the  lonians.  Descartes  in  his  turn 
makes  us  smile,  and  no  doubt  some  day  our 
children  will  laugh  at  us.  Is  there  no  way  of 
getting  at  once  to  the  gist  of  the  matter,  and 
thereby  escaping  the  raillery  which  we  foresee  ? 
Cannot  we  be  content  with  experiment  alone  ? 
No,  that  is  impossible ;  that  would  be  a  complete 
misunderstanding  of  the  true  character  of  science. 
The  man  of  science  must  work  with  method. 
Science  is  built  up  of  facts,  as  a  house  is  built  of 
stones ;  but  an  accumulation  of  facts  is  no  more  a 
science  than  a  heap  of  stones  is  a  house.  Most 
important  of  all,  the  man  of  science  must  exhibit 
foresight.  Carlyle  has  written  somewhere  some 
thing  after  this  fashion.  "  Nothing  but  facts  are 
of  importance.  John  Lackland  passed  by  here. 
Here  is  something  that  is  admirable.  Here  is  a 
reality  for  which  I  would  give  all  the  theories  in 
the  world."1  Carlyle  was  a  compatriot  of  Bacon, 
and,  like  him,  he  wished  to  proclaim  his  worship 
of  the  God  of  Things  as  they  are. 

But  Bacon  would  not  have  said  that.  That  is 
the  language  of  the  historian.  The  physicist 
would  most  likely  have  said :  "  John  Lackland 
passed  by  here.  It  is  all  the  same  to  me,  for  he 
will  not  pass  this  way  again." 

We  all  know  that  there  are  good  and  bad 
experiments.  The  latter  accumulate  in  vain. 
Whether  there  are  a  hundred  or  a  thousand, 

1  V.  Past  and  Present,  end  of  Chapter  I.,  Book  II.—  [TR.] 


142  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

one  single  piece  of  work  by  a  real  master — by  a 
Pasteur,  for  example — will  be  sufficient  to  sweep 
them  into  oblivion.  Bacon  w7ould  have  thoroughly 
understood  that,  for  he  invented  the  phrase  experi- 
mentuni  crucis;  but  Carlyle  would  not  have  under 
stood  it.  A  fact  is  a  fact.  A  student  has  read 
such  and  such  a  number  on  his  thermometer. 
He  has  taken  no  precautions.  It  does  not  matter; 
he  has  read  it,  and  if  it  is  only  the  fact  which 
counts,  this  is  a  reality  that  is  as  much  entitled 
to  be  called  a  reality  as  the  peregrinations  of  King 
John  Lackland.  What,  then,  is  a  good  experiment? 
It  is  that  which  teaches  us  something  more  than 
V  an  isolated  fact.  It  is  that  which  enables  us  to 
predict,  and  to  generalise.  Without  generalisa 
tion,  prediction  is  impossible.  The  circumstances 
under  which  one  has  operated  will  never  again 
be  reproduced  simultaneously.  The  fact  observed 
will  never  be  repeated.  All  that  can  be  affirmed 
is  that  under  analogous  circumstances  an  analogous 
fact  will  be  produced.  To  predict  it,  we  must 
therefore  invoke  the  aid  of  analogy — that  is  to  say, 
even  at  this  stage,  we  must  generalise.  However 
timid  we  may  be,  there  must  be  interpolation. 
Experiment  only  gives  us  a  certain  number  of 
isolated  points.  They  must  be  connected  by  a 
continuous  line,  and  this  is  a  true  generalisation. 
But  more  is  done.  The  curve  thus  traced  will 
pass  between  and  near  the  points  observed;  it 
will  not  pass  through  the  points  themselves. 
Thus  we  are  not  restricted  to  generalising  our 


HYPOTHESES    IN    PHYSICS.  143 

experiment,  we  correct  it ;  and  the  physicist  who 
would  abstain  from  these  corrections,  and  really 
content  himself  with  experiment  pure  and  simple, 
would  be  compelled  to  enunciate  very  extra 
ordinary  laws  indeed.  Detached  facts  cannot 
therefore  satisfy  us,  and  that  is  why  our  science 
must  be  ordered,  or,  better  still,  generalised. 

It  is  often  said  that  experiments  should  be  made 
without  preconceived  ideas.  That  is  impossible. 
Not  only  would  it  make  every  experiment  fruitless, 
but  even  if  we  wished  to  do  so,  it  could  not  be 
done.  Every  man  has  his  own  conception  of  the 
world,  and  this  he  cannot  so  easily  lay  aside.  We 
must,  for  example,  use  language,  and  our  language 
is  necessarily  steeped  in  preconceived  ideas.  Only 
they  are  unconscious  preconceived  ideas,  which 
are  a  thousand  times  the  most  dangerous  of  all. 
Shall  we  say,  that  if  we  cause  others  to  intervene  of 
which  we  are  fully  conscious,  that  we  shall  only 
aggravate  the  evil?  I  do  not  think  so.  I  am 
inclined  to  think  that  they  will  serve  as  ample 
counterpoises — I  was  almost  going  to  say  antidotes. 
They  will  generally  disagree,  they  will  enter  into 
conflict  one  with  another,  and  ipso  facto,  they  will 
force  us  to  look  at  things  under  different  aspects. 
This  is  enough  to  free  us.  He  is  no  longer  a  slave 
who  can  choose  his  master. 

Thus,  by  generalisation,  every  fact  observed 
enables  us  to  predict  a  large  number  of  others ; 
only,  we  ought  not  to  forget  that  the  first  alone 
is  certain,  and  that  all  the  others  are  merely 


144  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

probable.  However  solidly  founded  a  prediction 
may  appear  to  us,  we  are  never  absolutely  sure  that 
experiment  will  not  prove  it  to  be  baseless  if  we 
set  to  work  to  verify  it.  But  the  probability  of  its 
accuracy  is  often  so  great  that  practically  we  may 
be  content  with  it.  It  is  far  better  to  predict 
without  certainty,  than  never  to  have  predicted 
at  all.  We  should  never,  therefore,  disdain  to 
verify  when  the  opportunity  presents  itself.  But 
every  experiment  is  long  and  difficult,  and  the 
labourers  are  few,  and  the  number  of  facts  which 
we  require  to  predict  is  enormous ;  and  besides 
this  mass,  the  number  of  direct  verifications  that 
we  can  make  will  never  be  more  than  a  negligible 
quantity.  Of  this  little  that  we  can  directly  attain 
we  must  choose  the  best.  Every  experiment  must 
enable  us  to  make  a  maximum  number  of  predic 
tions  having  the  highest  possible  degree  of  prob 
ability.  The  problem  is,  so  to  speak,  to  increase 
the  output  of  the  scientific  machine.  I  may  be 
permitted  to  compare  science  to  a  library  which 
must  go  on  increasing  indefinitely;  the  librarian 
has  limited  funds  for  his  purchases,  and  he  must, 
therefore,  strain  every  nerve  not  to  waste  them. 
Experimental  physics  has  to  make  the  purchases, 
and  experimental  physics  alone  can  enrich  the 
library.  As  for  mathematical  physics,  her  duty 
is  to  draw  up  the  catalogue.  If  the  catalogue  is 
well  done  the  library  is  none  the  richer  for  it ;  but 
the  reader  will  be  enabled  to  utilise  its  riches; 
and  also  by  showing  the  librarian  the  gaps  in  his 


HYPOTHESES    IN    PHYSICS.  145 

collection,  it  will  help  him  to  make  a  judicious 
use  of  his  funds,  which  is  all  the  more  important, 
inasmuch  as  those  funds  are  entirely  inadequate. 
That  is  the  role  of  mathematical  physics.  It 
must  direct  generalisation,  so  as  to  increase  what 
I  called  just  now  the  output  of  science.  By  what 
means  it  does  this,  and  how  it  may  do  it  without 
danger,  is  what  we  have  now  to  examine. 

The  Unity  oj  Nature. — Let  us  first  of  all  observe 
that  every  generalisation  supposes  in  a  certain 
measure  a  belief  in  the  unity  and  simplicity  of 
Nature.  As  far  as  the  unity  is  concerned,  there 
can  be  no  difficulty.  If  the  different  parts  of  the 
universe  were  not  as  the  organs  of  the  same  body, 
they  would  not  re-act  one  upon  the  other;  they 
would  mutually  ignore  each  other,  and  we  in 
particular  should  only  know  one  part.  We  need 
not,  therefore,  ask  if  Nature  is  one,  but  how  she 
is  one. 

As  for  the  second  point,  that  is  not  so  clear.  It 
is  not  certain  that  Nature  is  simple.  Can  we 
without  danger  act  as  if  she  were  ? 

There  was  a  time  when  the  simplicity  of 
Mariotte's  law  was  an  argument  in  favour  of  its 
accuracy:  when  Fresnel  himself,  after  having  said 
in  a  conversation  with  Laplace  that  Nature  cares 
naught  for  analytical  difficulties,  was  compelled 
to  explain  his  words  so  as  not  to  give  offence  to 
current  opinion.  Nowadays,  ideas  have  changed 
considerably ;  but  those  who  do  not  believe  that 
natural  laws  must  be  simple,  are  still  often  obliged 

10 


146  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

to  act  as  if  they  did  believe  it.  They  cannot 
entirely  dispense  with  this  necessity  without 
making  all  generalisation,  and  therefore  all  science, 
impossible.  It  is  clear  that  any  fact  can  be 
generalised  in  an  infinite  number  of  ways,  and 
it  is  a  question  of  choice.  The  choice  can  only 
be  guided  by  considerations  of  simplicity.  Let 
us  take  the  most  ordinary  case,  that  of  interpola 
tion.  We  draw  a  continuous  line  as  regularly  as 
possible  between  the  points  given  by  observation. 
Why  do  we  avoid  angular  points  and  inflexions 
that  are  too  sharp  ?  Why  do  we  not  make  our 
curve  describe  the  most  capricious  zigzags  ?  It 
is  because  we  know  beforehand,  or  think  we  know, 
that  the  law  we  have  to  express  cannot  be  so 
complicated  as  all  that.  The  mass  of  Jupiter 
may  be  deduced  either  from  the  movements  of 
his  satellites,  or  from  the  perturbations  of  the 
major  planets,  or  from  those  of  the  minor  planets. 
If  we  take  the  mean  of  the  determinations  obtained 
by  these  three  methods,  we  find  three  numbers 
very  close  together,  but  not  quite  identical.  This 
result  might  be  interpreted  by  supposing  that  the 
gravitation  constant  is  not  the  same  in  the  three 
cases;  the  observations  would  be  certainly  much 
better  represented.  Why  do  we  reject  this  inter 
pretation  ?  Not  because  it  is  absurd,  but  because 
it  is  uselessly  complicated.  W7e  shall  only  accept 
it  when  we  are  forced  to,  and  it  is  not  imposed 
upon  us  yet.  To  sum  up,  in  most  cases  every  law 
is  held  to  be  simple  until  the  contrary  is  proved. 


HYPOTHESES    IN    PHYSICS.  147 

This  custom  is  imposed  upon  physicists  by  the 
reasons  that  I  have  indicated,  but  how  can  it  be 
justified  in  the  presence  of  discoveries  which  daily 
show  us  fresh  details,  richer  and  more  complex? 
How  can  we  even  reconcile  it  with  the  unity  of 
nature  ?  For  if  all  things  are  interdependent, 
the  relations  in  which  so  many  different  objects 
intervene  can  no  longer  be  simple. 

If  we  study  the  history  of  science  we  see  pro 
duced  two  phenomena  which  are,  so  to  speak, 
each  the  inverse  of  the  other.  Sometimes  it  is 
simplicity  which  is  hidden  under  what  is 
apparently  complex ;  sometimes,  on  the  contrary, 
it  is  simplicity  which  is  apparent,  and  which 
conceals  extremely  complex  realities.  What  is 
there  more  complicated  than  the  disturbed 
motions  of  the  planets,  and  what  more  simple 
than  Newton's  law  ?  There,  as  Fresnel  said, 
Nature  playing  with  analytical  difficulties,  only 
uses  simple  means,  and  creates  by  their  combina 
tion  I  know  not  what  tangled  skein.  Here  it  is 
the  hidden  simplicity  which  must  be  disentangled. 
Examples  to  the  contrary  abound.  In  the  kinetic 
theory  of  gases,  molecules  of  tremendous  velocity 
are  discussed,  whose  paths,  deformed  by  incessant 
impacts,  have  the  most  capricious  shapes,  and 
plough  their  way  through  space  in  every  direction. 
The  result  observable  is  Mariotte's  simple  law. 
Each  individual  fact  was  complicated.  The  law 
of  great  numbers  has  re-established  simplicity  in 
the  mean.  Here  the  simplicity  is  only  apparent, 


148  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

and  the  coarseness  of  our  senses  alone  prevents  us 
from  seeing  the  complexity. 

Many  phenomena  obey  a  law  of  proportion 
ality.  But  why?  Because  in  these  phenomena 
there  is  something  which  is  very  small.  The 
simple  law  observed  is  only  the  translation  of 
the  general  analytical  rule  by  which  the  infinitely 
small  increment  of  a  function  is  proportional 
to  the  increment  of  the  variable.  As  in  reality 
our  increments  are  not  infinitely  small,  but  only 
very  small,  the  law  of  proportionality  is  only 
approximate,  and  simplicity  is  only  apparent. 
What  I  have  just  said  applies  to  the  law  of  the 
superposition  of  small  movements,  which  is  so 
fruitful  in  its  applications  and  which  is  the  founda 
tion  of  optics. 

And  Newton's  law  itself?  Its  simplicity,  so 
long  undetected,  is  perhaps  only  apparent.  Who 
knows  if  it  be  not  due  to  some  complicated 
mechanism,  to  the  impact  of  some  subtle  matter 
animated  by  irregular  movements,  and  if  it  has 
not  become  simple  merely  through  the  play  of 
averages  and  large  numbers?  In  any  case,  it 
is  difficult  not  to  suppose  that  the  true  law  con 
tains  complementary  terms  which  may  become 
sensible  at  small  distances.  If  in  astronomy  they 
are  negligible,  and  if  the  law  thus  regains  its 
simplicity,  it  is  solely  on  account  of  the  enormous 
distances  of  the  celestial  bodies.  No  doubt,  if  our 
means  of  investigation  became  more  and  more 
penetrating,  we  should  discover  the  simple  beneath 


HYPOTHESES    IN    PHYSICS.  149 

the  complex,  and  then  the  complex  from  the 
simple,  and  then  again  the  simple  beneath  the 
complex,  and  so  on,  without  ever  being  able  to 
predict  what  the  last  term  will  be.  We  must  stop 
somewhere,  and  for  science  to  be  possible  we  must 
stop  where  we  have  found  simplicity.  That  is  the 
only  ground  on  which  we  can  erect  the  edifice  of 
our  generalisations.  But,  this  simplicity  being 
only  apparent,  will  the  ground  be  solid  enough  ? 
That  is  what  we  have  now  to  discover. 

For  this  purpose  let  us  see  what  part  is  played 
in  our  generalisations  by  the  belief  in  simplicity. 
We  have  verified  a  simple  law  in  a  considerable 
number  of  particular  cases.  We  refuse  to  admit 
that  this  coincidence,  so  often  repeated,  is  a  result 
of  mere  chance,  and  we  conclude  that  the  law 
must  be  true  in  the  general  case. 

Kepler  remarks  that  the  positions  of  a  planet 
observed  by  Tycho  are  all  on  the  same  ellipse. 
Not  for  one  moment  does  he  think  that,  by  a 
singular  freak  of  chance,  Tycho  had  never  looked 
at  the  heavens  except  at  the  very  moment  when 
the  path  of  the  planet  happened  to  cut  that 
ellipse.  What  does  it  matter  then  if  the  simplicity 
be  real  or  if  it  hide  a  complex  truth  ?  Whether  it 
be  due  to  the  influence  of  great  numbers  which 
reduces  individual  differences  to  a  level,  or  to  the 
greatness  or  the  smallness  of  certain  quantities 
which  allow  of  certain  terms  to  be  neglected — in 
no  case  is  it  due  to  chance.  This  simplicity,  real 
or  apparent,  has  always  a  cause.  We  shall  there- 


150  SCIENCE   AND   HYPOTHESIS. 

fore  always  be  able  to  reason  in  the  same  fashion, 
and  if  a  simple  law  has  been  observed  in  several 
particular  cases,  we  may  legitimately  suppose  that 
it  still  will  be  true  in  analogous  cases.  To  refuse 
to  admit  this  would  be  to  attribute  an  in 
admissible  role  to  chance.  However,  there  is  a 
difference.  If  the  simplicity  were  real  and  pro 
found  it  would  bear  the  test  of  the  increasing 
precision  of  our  methods  of  measurement.  If, 
then,  we  believe  Nature  to  be  profoundly  simple, 
we  must  conclude  that  it  is  an  approximate  and 
not  a  rigorous  simplicity.  This  is  what  was 
formerly  done,  but  it  is  what  we  have  no  longer 
the  right  to  do.  The  simplicity  of  Kepler's  laws, 
for  instance,  is  only  apparent ;  but  that  does  not 
prevent  them  from  being  applied  to  almost  all 
systems  analogous  to  the  solar  system,  though 
that  prevents  them  from  being  rigorously  exact. 

Role  of  Hypothesis. — Every  generalisation  is  a 
hypothesis.  Hypothesis  therefore  plays  a  neces 
sary  role,  which  no  one  has  ever  contested.  Only, 
it  should  always  be  as  soon  as  possible  submitted 
to  verification.  It  goes  without  saying  that,  if  it 
cannot  stand  this  test,  it  must  be  abandoned 
without  any  hesitation.  This  is,  indeed,  what 
is  generally  done;  but  sometimes  with  a  certain 
impatience.  Ah  well !  this  impatience  is  not 
justified.  The  physicist  who  has  just  given  up 
one  of  his  hypotheses  should,  on  the  contrary, 
rejoice,  for  he  found  an  unexpected  opportunity  of 
discovery.  His  hypothesis,  I  imagine,  had  not 


HYPOTHESES    IN    PHYSICS.  151 

been  lightly  adopted,  It  took  into  account  all  the 
known  factors  which  seem  capable  of  intervention 
in  the  phenomenon.  If  it  is  not  verified,  it  is 
because  there  is  something  unexpected  and  extra 
ordinary  about  it,  because  we  are  on  the  point 
of  finding  something  unknown  and  new.  Has 
the  hypothesis  thus  rejected  been  sterile  ?  Far 
from  it.  It  may  be  even  said  that  it  has  rendered 
more  service  than  a  true  hypothesis.  Not  only 
has  it  been  the  occasion  of  a  decisive  experiment, 
but  if  this  experiment  had  been  made  by  chance, 
without  the  hypothesis,  no  conclusion  could  have 
been  drawn ;  nothing  extraordinary  would  have 
been  seen ;  and  only  one  fact  the  more  would  have 
been  catalogued,  without  deducing  from  it  the 
remotest  consequence. 

Now,  under  what  conditions  is  the  use  of 
hypothesis  without  danger  ?  The  proposal  to 
submit  all  to  experiment  is  not  sufficient.  Some 
hypotheses  are  dangerous,  —  first  and  foremost 
those  which  are  tacit  and  unconscious.  And 
since  we  make  them  without  knowing  them, 
we  cannot  get  rid  of  them.  Here  again,  there 
is  a  service  that  mathematical  physics  may 
render  us.  By  the  precision  which  is  its  char 
acteristic,  we  are  compelled  to  formulate  all  the 
hypotheses  that  we  would  unhesitatingly  make 
without  its  aid.  Let  us  also  notice  that  it  is 
important  not  to  multiply  hypotheses  indefinitely. 
If  we  construct  a  theory  based  upon  multiple  hypo 
theses,  and  if  experiment  condemns  it,  which  of 


152  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

the  premisses  must  be  changed  ?  It  is  impossible 
to  tell.  Conversely,  if  the  experiment  succeeds, 
must  we  suppose  that  it  has  verified  all  these 
hypotheses  at  once  ?  Can  several  unknowns  be 
determined  from  a  single  equation  ? 
I  We  must  also  take  care  to  distinguish  between 
'  the  different  kinds  of  hypotheses.  First  of  all, 
there  are  those  wrhich  are  quite  natural  and 
(  necessary.  It  is  difficult  not  to  suppose  that  the 
influence  of  very  distant  bodies  is  quite  negligible, 
that  small  movements  obey  a  linear  law,  and  that 
effect  is  a  continuous  function  of  its  cause.  I  will 
say  as  much  for  the  conditions  imposed  by 
symmetry.  All  these  hypotheses  affirm,  so  to 
speak,  the  common  basis  of  all  the  theories  of 
mathematical  physics.  They  are  the  last  that 
should  be  abandoned.  There  is  a  second  category 
of  hypotheses  which  I  shall  qualify  as  indifferent. 
In  most  questions  the  analyst  assumes,  at  the 
beginning  of  his  calculations,  either  that  matter  is 
continuous,  or  the  reverse,  that  it  is  formed  of 
atoms.  In  either  case,  his  results  would  have 
been  the  same.  On  the  atomic  supposition  he  has 
a  little  more  difficulty  in  obtaining  them — that  is 
all.  If,  then,  experiment  confirms  his  conclusions, 
will  he  suppose  that  he  has  proved,  for  example, 
the  real  existence  of  atoms  ? 

In  optical  theories  two  vectors  are  introduced, 
one  of  which  we  consider  as  a  velocity  and  the 
other  as  a  vortex.  This  again  is  an  indifferent 
hypothesis,  since  we  should  have  arrived  at  the 


HYPOTHESES    TN    PHYSICS.  153 

same  conclusions  by  assuming  the  former  to  be 
a  vortex  and  the  latter  to  be  a  velocity.  The 
success  of  the  experiment  cannot  prove,  therefore, 
that  the  first  vector  is  really  a  velocity.  It  only 
proves  one  thing — namely,  that  it  is  a  vector; 
and  that  is  the  only  hypothesis  that  has  really 
been  introduced  into  the  premisses.  To  give  it 
the  concrete  appearance  that  the  fallibility  of  our 
minds  demands,  it  was  necessary  to  consider  it 
either  as  a  velocity  or  as  a  vortex.  In  the  same 
way,  it  was  necessary  to  represent  it  by  an  x  or  a 
y,  but.  the  result  will  not  prove  that  we  were  right 
or  wrong  in  regarding  it  as  a  velocity;  nor  will  it 
prove  we  are  right  or  wrong  in  calling  it  x  and 
not  y. 

These  indifferent  hypotheses  are  never  danger 
ous  provided  their  characters  are  not  misunder 
stood.  They  may  be  useful,  either  as  artifices  for 
calculation,  or  to  assist  our  understanding  by 
concrete  images,  to  fix  the  ideas,  as  we  say.  They 
need  not  therefore  be  rejected.  The  hypotheses 
of  the  third  category  are  real  generalisations. 
They  must  be  confirmed  or  invalidated  by  experi 
ment.  Whether  verified  or  condemned,  they  will 
always  be  fruitful;  but,  for  the  reasons  I  have 
given,  they  will  only  be  so  if  they  are  not  too 
numerous. 

Origin  of  Mathematical  Physics. — Let  us  go 
further  and  study  more  closely  the  conditions 
which  have  assisted  the  development  of  mathe 
matical  physics.  We  recognise  at  the  outset  that 


154  SCIENCE  AND  HYPOTHESIS. 

the  efforts  of  men  of  science  have  always  tended 
to  resolve  the  complex  phenomenon  given  directly 
by  experiment  into  a  very  large  number  of  ele 
mentary  phenomena,  and  that  in  three  different 
ways. 

First,  with  respect  to  time.  Instead  of  embracing 
in  its  entirety  the  progressive  development  of  a 
phenomenon,  we  simply  try  to  connect  each 
moment  with  the  one  immediately  preceding. 
We  admit  that  the  present  state  of  the  world 
only  depends  on  the  immediate  past,  without 
being  directly  influenced,  so  to  speak,  by  the 
recollection  of  a  more  distant  past.  Thanks  to 
this  postulate,  instead  of  studying  directly  the 
whole  succession  of  phenomena,  we  may  confine 
ourselves  to  writing  down  its  differential  equation; 
for  the  laws  of  Kepler  we  substitute  the  law  of 
Newton. 

Next,  we  try  to  decompose  the  phenomena  in 
space.  What  experiment  gives  us  is  a  confused 
aggregate  of  facts  spread  over  a  scene  of  consider 
able  extent.  We  must  try  to  deduce  the  element 
ary  phenomenon,  which  will  still  be  localised  in  a 
very  small  region  of  space. 

A  few  examples  perhaps  will  make  my  meaning 
clearer.  If  \ve  wished  to  study  in  all  its  com 
plexity  the  distribution  of  temperature  in  a  cooling 
solid,  we  could  never  do  so.  This  is  simply  be 
cause,  if  we  only  reflect  that  a  point  in  the  solid 
can  directly  impart  some  of  its  heat  to  a  neigh 
bouring  point,  it  will  immediately  impart  that 


HYPOTHESES    IN    PHYSICS.  155 

heat  only  to  the  nearest  points,  and  it  is  but 
gradually  that  the  flow  of  heat  will  reach  other 
portions  of  the  solid.  The  elementary  pheno 
menon  is  the  interchange  of  heat  between  two 
contiguous  points.  It  is  strictly  localised  and 
relatively  simple  if,  as  is  natural,  we  admit  that 
it  is  not  influenced  by  the  temperature  of  the 
molecules  whose  distance  apart  is  small. 

I  bend  a  rod:  it  takes  a  very  complicated  form, 
the  direct  investigation  of  which  would  be  im 
possible.  But  I  can  attack  the  problem,  however, 
if  I  notice  that  its  flexure  is  only  the  resultant  of 
the  deformations  of  the  very  small  elements  of  the 
rod,  and  that  the  deformation  of  each  of  these 
elements  only  depends  on  the  forces  which  are 
directly  applied  to  it,  and  not  in  the  least  on 
those  which  may  be  acting  on  the  other  elements. 

In  all  these  examples,  which  may  be  increased 
without  difficulty,  it  is  admitted  that  there  is  no 
action  at  a  distance  or  at  great  distances.  That 
is  an  hypothesis.  It  is  not  always  true,  as  the  law 
of  gravitation  proves.  It  must  therefore  be  verified. 
If  it  is  confirmed,  even  approximately,  it  is  valu 
able,  for  it  helps  us  to  use  mathematical  physics, 
at  any  rate  by  successive  approximations.  If  it 
does  not  stand  the  test,  we  must  seek  something 
else  that  is  analogous,  for  there  are  other  means 
of  arriving  at  the  elementary  phenomenon.  If 
several  bodies  act  simultaneously,  it  may  happen 
that  their  actions  are  independent,  and  may  be 
added  one  to  the  other,  either  as  vectors  or  as  scalar 


156  SCIENCE   AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

quantities.  The  elementary  phenomenon  is  then 
the  action  of  an  isolated  body.  Or  suppose,  again, 
it  is  a  question  of  small  movements,  or  more 
generally  of  small  variations  which  obey  the  well- 
known  law  of  mutual  or  relative  independence. 
The  movement  observed  will  then  be  decomposed 
into  simple  movements — for  example,  sound  into 
its  harmonics,  and  white  light  into  its  monochro 
matic  components.  When  we  have  discovered  in 
which  direction  to  seek  for  the  elementary  pheno 
mena,  by  what  means  may  we  reach  it  ?  First,  it 
will  often  happen  that  in  order  to  predict  it,  or  rather 
in  order  to  predict  what  is  useful  to  us,  it  will  not 
be  necessary  to  know  its  mechanism.  The  law  of 
great  numbers  will  suffice.  Take  for  example  the 
propagation  of  heat.  Each  molecule  radiates  to 
wards  its  neighbour — we  need  not  inquire  accord 
ing  to  what  law;  and  if  we  make  any  supposition 
in  this  respect,  it  will  be  an  indifferent  hypothesis, 
and  therefore  useless  and  unverifiable.  In  fact, 
by  the  action  of  averages  and  thanks  to  the 
symmetry  of  the  medium,  all  differences  are 
levelled,  and,  whatever  the  hypothesis  may  be,  the 
result  is  always  the  same. 

The  same  feature  is  presented  in  the  theory  of 
elasticity,  and  in  that  of  capillarity.  The  neigh 
bouring  molecules  attract  and  repel  each  other,  we 
need  not  inquire  by  what  law.  It  is  enough  for  us 
that  this  attraction  is  sensible  at  small  distances 
only,  and  that  the  molecules  are  very  numerous, 
that  the  medium  is  symmetrical,  and  we  have 


HYPOTHESES    IN    PHYSICS.  157 

only  to  let  the  law  of  great  numbers  come  into 
play. 

Here  again  the  simplicity  of  the  elementary 
phenomenon  is  hidden  beneath  the  complexity  of 
the  observable  resultant  phenomenon;  but  in  its 
turn  this  simplicity  was  only  apparent  and  dis 
guised  a  very  complex  mechanism.  Evidently  the 
best  means  of  reaching  the  elementary  pheno 
menon  would  be  experiment.  It  would  be  neces 
sary  by  experimental  artifices  to  dissociate  the 
complex  system  which  nature  offers  for  our  in 
vestigations  and  carefully  to  study  the  elements  as 
dissociated  as  possible;  for  example,  natural  white 
light  would  be  decomposed  into  monochromatic 
lights  by  the  aid  of  the  prism,  and  into  polarised 
lights  by  the  aid  of  the  polariser.  Unfortunately, 
that  is  neither  always  possible  nor  always  suffi 
cient,  and  sometimes  the  mind  must  run  ahead  of 
experiment.  I  shall  only  give  one  example  which 
has  always  struck  me  rather  forcibly.  If  I  de 
compose  white  light,  I  shall  be  able  to  isolate  a 
portion  of  the  spectrum,  but  however  small  it  may 
be,  it  will  always  be  a  certain  width.  In  the  same 
way  the  natural  lights  which  are  called  mono 
chromatic  give  us  a  very  fine  array,  but  a  y  which 
is  not,  however,  infinitely  fine.  It  might  be 
supposed  that  in  the  experimental  study  of  the 
properties  of  these  natural  lights,  by  operating 
with  finer  and  finer  rays,  and  passing  on  at  last 
to  the  limit,  so  to  speak,  we  should  eventually 
obtain  the  properties  of  a  rigorously  mono- 


158  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

chromatic  light.  That  would  not  be  accurate. 
I  assume  that  two  rays  emanate  from  the  same 
source,  that  they  are  first  polarised  in  planes  at 
right  angles,  that  they  are  then  brought  back 
again  to  the  same  plane  of  polarisation,  and  that 
we  try  to  obtain  interference.  If  the  light  were 
rigorously  monochromatic,  there  would  be  inter 
ference;  but  with  our  nearly  monochromatic 
lights,  there  will  be  no  interference,  and  that, 
however  narrow  the  ray  may  be.  For  it  to  be 
otherwise,  the  ray  would  have  to  be  several  million 
times  finer  than  the  finest  known  rays. 

Here  then  we  should  be  led  astray  by  proceeding 
to  the  limit.  The  mind  has  to  run  ahead  of  the 
experiment,  and  if  it  has  done  so  with  success,  it 
is  because  it  has  allowed  itself  to  be  guided  by  the 
instinct  of  simplicity.  The  knowledge  of  the  ele 
mentary  fact  enables  us  to  state  the  problem  in 
the  form  of  an  equation.  It  only  remains  to  de 
duce  from  it  by  combination  the  observable  and 
verifiable  complex  fact.  That  is  what  we  call 
integration,  and  it  is  the  province  of  the  mathe 
matician.  It  might  be  asked,  why  in  physical 
science  generalisation  so  readily  takes  the 
mathematical  form.  The  reason  is  now  easy  to 
see.  It  is  not  only  because  we  have  to  express 
numerical  laws;  it  is  because  the  observable 
phenomenon  is  due  to  the  superposition  of  a  large 
number  of  elementary  phenomena  which  are  all 
similar  to  each  other ;  and  in  this  way  differential 
equations  are  quite  naturally  introduced.  It  is 


HYPOTHESES    IN    PHYSICS.  I5Q 

not  enough  that  each  elementary  phenomenon 
should  obey  simple  laws:  all  those  that  we  have 
to  combine  must  obey  the  same  law;  then  only 
is  the  intervention  of  mathematics  of  any  use. 
Mathematics  teaches  us,  in  fact,  to  combine  like 
with  like.  Its  object  is  to  divine  the  result  of  a 
combination  without  having  to  reconstruct  that 
combination  element  by  element.  If  we  have  to 
repeat  the  same  operation  several  times,  mathe 
matics  enables  us  to  avoid  this  repetition  by  telling 
the  result  beforehand  by  a  kind  of  induction. 
This  I  have  explained  before  in  the  chapter  on 
mathematical  reasoning.  But  for  that  purpose 
all  these  operations  must  be  similar;  in  the  con 
trary  case  we  must  evidently  make  up  our  minds 
to  working  them  out  in  full  one  after  the  other, 
and  mathematics  will  be  useless.  It  is  therefore, 
thanks  to  the  approximate  homogeneity  of  the 
matter  studied  by  physicists,  that  mathematical 
physics  came  into  existence.  In  the  natural 
sciences  the  following  conditions  are  no  longer  to 
be  found: — homogeneity,  relative  independence  of 
remote  parts,  simplicity  of  the  elementary  fact; 
and  that  is  why  the  student  of  natural  science  is 
compelled  to  have  recourse  to  other  modes  of 
generalisation. 


CHAPTER  X. 

THE   THEORIES    OF   MODERN    PHYSICS, 

Significance  of  Physical  Theories. — The  ephemeral 
nature  of  scientific  theories  takes  by  surprise  the 
man  of  the  world.  Their  brief  period  of  prosperity 
ended,  he  sees  them  abandoned  one  after  another ; 
he  sees  ruins  piled  upon  ruins;  he  predicts  that 
the  theories  in  fashion  to-day  will  in  a  short  time 
succumb  in  their  turn,  and  he  concludes  that  they 
are  absolutely  in  vain.  This  is  what  he  calls  the 
bankruptcy  of  science. 

His  scepticism  is  superficial ;  he  does  not  take 
into  account  the  object  of  scientific  theories  and 
the  part  they  play,  or  he  would  understand  that 
the  ruins  may  be  still  good  for  something.  No 
theory  seemed  established  on  firmer  ground  than 
Fresnel's,  which  attributed  light  to  the  move 
ments  of  the  ether.  Then  if  Maxwell's  theory  is 
to-day  preferred,  does  that  mean  that  Fresnel's 
work  was  in  vain  ?  No;  for  Fresnel's  object  was 
not  to  know  whether  there  really  is  an  ether,  if  it 
is  or  is  not  formed  of  atoms,  if  these  atoms  really 
move  in  this  way  or  that;  his  object  was  to 
predict  optical  phenomena. 

This    Fresnel's    theory    enables    us    to    do    to- 


THE    THEORIES    OF    MODERN    PHYSICS.        l6l 

day  as  well  as  it  did  before  Maxwell's  time.  The 
differential  equations  are  always  true,  they  may 
be  always  integrated  by  the  same  methods,  and 
the  results  of  this  integration  still  preserve  their 
value.  It  cannot  be  said  that  this  is  reducing 
physical  theories  to  simple  practical  recipes ; 
these  equations  express  relations,  and  if  the 
equations  remain  true,  it  is  because  the  relations 
preserve  their  reality.  They  teach  us  now,  as  they 
did  then,  that  there  is  such  and  such  a  relation 
between  this  thing  and  that ;  only,  the  something 
which  we  then  called  motion,  we  now  call  electric 
current.  But  these  are  merely  names  of  the  images 
we  substituted  for  the  real  objects  which  Nature 
will  hide  for  ever  from  our  eyes.  The  true  relations 
between  these  real  objects  are  the  only  reality  we 
can  attain,  and  the  sole  condition  is  that  the  same 
relations  shall  exist  between  these  objects  as  between 
the  images  we  are  forced  to  put  in  their  place.  If 
the  relations  are  known  to  us,  what  does  it  matter 
if  we  think  it  convenient  to  replace  one  image  by 
another  ? 

That  a  given  periodic  phenomenon  (an  electric 
oscillation,  for  instance)  is  really  due  to  the 
vibration  of  a  given  atom,  which,  behaving  like 
a  pendulum,  is  really  displaced  in  this  manner  or 
that,  all  this  is  neither  certain  nor  essential. 
But  that  there  is  between  the  electric  oscillation, 
the  movement  of  the  pendulum,  and  all  periodic 
phenomena  an  intimate  relationship  which  corre 
sponds  to  a  profound  reality;  that  this  relationship, 

II 


l62  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

this  similarity,  or  rather  this  parallelism,  is  con 
tinued  in  the  details ;  that  it  is  a  consequence  of 
more  general  principles  such  as  that  of  the  con 
servation  of  energy,  and  that  of  least  action ;  this 
we  may  affirm ;  this  is  the  truth  which  will  ever 
remain  the  same  in  whatever  garb  we  may  see  fit 
to  clothe  it. 

Many  theories  of  dispersion  have  been  proposed. 
The  first  were  imperfect,  and  contained  but  little 
truth.  Then  came  that  of  Helmholtz,  and  this 
in  its  turn  was  modified  in  different  ways ;  its 
author  himself  conceived  another  theory,  founded 
on  Maxwell's  principles.  But  the  remarkable 
thing  is,  that  all  the  scientists  who  followed 
Helmholtz  obtain  the  same  equations,  although 
their  starting-points  were  to  all  appearance  widely 
separated.  I  venture  to  say  that  these  theories 
are  all  simultaneously  truje;  not  merely  because 
they  express  a  true  relation — that  between  absorp 
tion  and  abnormal  dispersion.  In  the  premisses 
of  these  theories  the  part  that  is  true  is  the  part 
common  to  all:  it  is  the  affirmation  of  this  or 
that  relation  between  certain  things,  which  some 
call  by  one  name  and  some  by  another. 

The  kinetic  theory  of  gases  has  given  rise  to 
many  objections,  to  which  it  would  be  difficult 
to  find  an  answer  were  it  claimed  that  the  theory 
is  absolutely  true.  But  all  these  objections  do 
not  alter  the  fact  that  it  has  been  useful, 
particularly  in  revealing  to  us  one  true  relation 
which  would  otherwise  have  remained  profoundly 


THE    THEORIES    OF    MODERN    PHYSICS.        163 

hidden — the  relation  between  gaseous  and  osmotic 
pressures.  In  this  sense,  then,  it  may  be  said  to 
be  true. 

When  a  physicist  finds  a  contradiction  between 
two  theories  which  are  equally  dear  to  him,  he 
sometimes  says:  "  Let  us  not  be  troubled,  but  let 
us  hold  fast  to  the  two  ends  of  the  chain,  lest 
we  lose  the  intermediate  links."  This  argument 
of  the  embarrassed  theologian  would  be  ridiculous 
if  we  were  to  attribute  to  physical  theories  the 
interpretation  given  them  by  the  man  of  the 
world.  In  case  of  contradiction  one  of  them  at 
least  should  be  considered  false.  But  this  is  no 
longer  the  case  if  we  only  seek  in  them  what 
should  be  sought.  It  is  quite  possible  that  they 
both  express  true  relations,  and  that  the  contra 
dictions  only  exist  in  the  images  we  have  formed 
to  ourselves  of  reality.  To  those  who  feel  that 
we  are  going  too  far  in  our  limitations  of  the 
domain  accessible  to  the  scientist,  I  reply:  These 
questions  which  we  forbid  you  to  investigate, 
and  which  you  so  regret,  are  not  only  insoluble, 
they  are  illusory  and  devoid  of  meaning. 

Such  a  philosopher  claims  that  all  physics  can  be 
explained  by  the  mutual  impact  of  atoms.  If  he 
simply  means  that  the  same  relations  obtain 
between  physical  phenomena  as  between  ~the 
mutual  impact  of  a  large  number  of  billiard 
balls — well  and  good!  this  is  verifiable,  and 
perhaps  is  true.  But  he  means  something  more, 
and  we  think  we  understand  him,  because  we 


164  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

think  we  know  what  an  impact  is.  Why?  Simply 
because  we  have  often  watched  a  game  of  billiards. 
Are  we  to  understand  that  God  experiences  the 
same  sensations  in  the  contemplation  of  His 
work  that  we  do  in  watching  a  game  of  billiards  ? 
If  it  is  not  our  intention  to  give  his  assertion 
this  fantastic  meaning,  and  if  we  do  not  wish 
to  give  it  the  more  restricted  meaning  I  have 
already  mentioned,  which  is  the  sound  meaning, 
then  it  has  no  meaning  at  all.  Hypotheses  of 
this  kind  have  therefore  only  a  metaphorical  sense. 
The  scientist  should  no  more  banish  them  than  a 
poet  banishes  metaphor;  but  he  ought  to  know 
what  they  are  worth.  They  may  be  useful  to 
give  satisfaction  to  the  mind,  and  they  will  do 
no  harm  as  long  as  they  are  only  indifferent 
hypotheses. 

These  considerations  explain  to  us  why  certain 
theories,  that  were  thought  to  be  abandoned  and 
definitively  condemned  by  experiment,  are  suddenly 
revived  from  their  ashes  and  begin  a  new  life. 
It  is  because  they  expressed  true  relations,  and 
had  not  ceased  to  do  so  when  for  some  reason  or 
other  we  felt  it  necessary  to  enunciate  the  same 
relations  in  another  language.  Their  life  had  been 
latent,  as  it  were. 

Barely  fifteen  years  ago,  was  there  anything 
more  ridiculous,  more  quaintly  old-fashioned,  than 
the  fluids  of  Coulomb  ?  And  yet,  here  they  are 
re-appearing  under  the  name  of  electrons.  In  what 
do  these  permanently  electrified  molecules  differ 


THE   THEORIES   OF   MODERN    PHYSICS.        165 

from  the  electric  molecules  of  Coulomb  ?  It  is 
true  that  in  the  electrons  the  electricity  is  sup 
ported  by  a  little,  a  very  little  matter ;  in  other 
words,  they  have  mass.  Yet  Coulomb  did  not 
deny  mass  to  his  fluids,  or  if  he  did,  it  was  with 
reluctance.  It  would  be  rash  to  affirm  that  the 
belief  in  electrons  will  not  also  undergo  an  eclipse, 
but  it  was  none  the  less  curious  to  note  this  un 
expected  renaissance. 

But  the  most  striking  example  is  Carnot's 
principle.  Carnot  established  it,  starting  from 
false  hypotheses.  When  it  was  found  that  heat 
was  indestructible,  and  may  be  converted  into 
work,  his  ideas  were  completely  abandoned ; 
later,  Clausius  returned  to  them,  and  to  him  is 
due  their  definitive  triumph.  In  its  primitive 
form,  Carnot's  theory  expressed  in  addition  to 
true  relations,  other  inexact  relations,  the  debris 
of  old  ideas ;  but  the  presence  of  the  latter  did 
not  alter  the  reality  of  the  others.  Clausius  had 
only  to  separate  them,  just  as  one  lops  off  dead 
branches. 

The  result  was  the  second  fundamental  law  of 
thermodynamics.  The  relations  were  always  the 
same,  although  they  did  not  hold,  at  least  to  all 
appearance,  between  the  same  objects.  This  was 
sufficient  for  the  principle  to  retain  its  value. 
Nor  have  the  reasonings  of  Carnot  perished  on 
this  account ;  they  were  applied  to  an  imperfect 
conception  of  matter,  but  their  form — i.e.,  the 
essential  part  of  them,  remained  correct.  What 


l66  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

I  have  just  said  throws  some  light  at  the  same 
time  on  the  role  of  general  principles,  such  as 
those  of  the  principle  of  least  action  or  of  the 
conservation  of  energy.  These  principles  are  of 
very  great  value.  They  were  obtained  in  the 
search  for  what  there  was  in  common  in  the 
enunciation  of  numerous  physical  laws ;  they 
thus  represent  the  quintessence  of  innumerable 
observations.  However,  from  their  very  generality 
results  a  consequence  to  which  I  have  called 
attention  in  Chapter  VIII. — namely,  that  they  are 
no  longer  capable  of  verification.  As  we  cannot 
give  a  general  definition  of  energy,  the  principle 
of  the  conservation  of  energy  simply  signifies  that 
there  is  a  something  which  remains  constant. 
Whatever  fresh  notions  of  the  world  may  be 
given  us  by  future  experiments,  we  are  certain 
beforehand  that  there  is  something  which  remains 
constant,  and  which  may  be  called  energy.  Does 
this  mean  that  the  principle  has  no  meaning  and 
vanishes  into  a  tautology  ?  Not  at  all.  It  means 
that  the  different  things  to  which  we  give  the 
name  of  energy  are  connected  by  a  true  relation 
ship  ;  it  affirms  between  them  a  real  relation. 
But  then,  if  this  principle  has  a  meaning,  it  may 
be  false ;  it  may  be  that  we  have  no  right  to 
extend  indefinitely  its  applications,  and  yet  it  is 
certain  beforehand  to  be  verified  in  the  strict 
sense  of  the  word.  How,  then,  shall  we  know 
when  it  has  been  extended  as  far  as  is  legitimate  ? 
Simply  when  it  ceases  to  be  useful  to  us — i.e., 


THE    THEORIES    OF    MODERN    PHYSICS.        167 

when  we  can  no  longer  use  it  to  predict  correctly 
new  phenomena.  We  shall  be  certain  in  such  a 
case  that  the  relation  affirmed  is  no  longer  real, 
for  otherwise  it  would  be  fruitful ;  experiment 
without  directly  contradicting  a  new  extension  of 
the  principle  will  nevertheless  have  condemned  it. 

Physics  and  Mechanism. — Most  theorists  have  a 
constant  predilection  for  explanations  borrowed 
from  physics,  mechanics,  or  dynamics.  Some 
\vould  be  satisfied  if  they  could  account  for  all 
phenomena  by  the  motion  of  molecules  attracting 
one  another  according  to  certain  laws.  Others 
are  more  exact :  they  would  suppress  attractions 
acting  at  a  distance ;  their  molecules  would  follow 
rectilinear  paths,  from  which  they  would  only  be 
deviated  by  impacts.  Others  again,  such  as  Hertz, 
suppress  the  forces  as  well,  but  suppose  their 
molecules  subjected  to  geometrical  connections 
analogous,  for  instance,  to  those  of  articulated 
systems;  thus,  they  wish  to  reduce  dynamics  to  a 
kind  of  kinematics.  In  a  word,  they  all  wish  to 
bend  nature  into  a  certain  form,  and  unless  they 
can  do  this  they  cannot  be  satisfied.  Is  Nature 
flexible  enough  for  this  ? 

We  shall  examine  this  question  in  Chapter  XII., 
apropos  of  Maxwell's  theory.  Every  time  that  the 
principles  of  least  action  and  energy  are  satisfied, 
we  shall  see  that  not  only  is  there  always  a 
mechanical  explanation  possible,  but  that  there 
is  an  unlimited  number  of  such  explanations.  By 
means  of  a  well-known  theorem  due  to  Konigs, 


l68  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

it  may  be  shown  that  we  can  explain  everything 
in  an  unlimited  number  of  ways,  by  connections 
after  the  manner  of  Hertz,  or,  again,  by  central 
forces.  No  doubt  it  may  be  just  as  easily  de 
monstrated  that  everything  may  be  explained  by 
simple  impacts.  For  this,  let  us  bear  in  mind 
that  it  is  not  enough  to  be  content  with  the 
ordinary  matter  of  which  we  are  aware  by  means 
of  our  senses,  and  the  movements  of  which  we 
observe  directly.  We  may  conceive  of  ordinary 
matter  as  either  composed  of  atoms,  whose  internal 
movements  escape  us,  our  senses  being  able  to 
estimate  only  the  displacement  of  the  whole ;  or 
we  may  imagine  one  of  those  subtle  fluids,  which 
under  the  name  of  ether  or  other  names,  have 
from  all  time  played  so  important  a  role  in 
physical  theories.  Often  we  go  further,  and  regard 
the  ether  as  the  only  primitive,  or  even  as  the 
only  true  matter.  The  more  moderate  consider 
ordinary  matter  to  be  condensed  ether,  and 
there  is  nothing  startling  in  this  conception;  but 
others  only  reduce  its  importance  still  further, 
and  see  in  matter  nothing  more  than  the  geo 
metrical  locus  of  singularities  in  the  ether.  Lord 
Kelvin,  for  instance,  holds  what  we  call  matter 
to  be  only  the  locus  of  those  points  at  which  the 
ether  is  animated  by  vortex  motions.  Riemann 
believes  it  to  be  locus  of  those  points  at  which 
ether  is  constantly  destroyed ;  to  Wiechert  or 
Larmor,  it  is  the  locus  of  the  points  at  which 
the  ether  has  undergone  a  kind  of  torsion  of  a 


THE    THEORIES    OF    MODERN    PHYSICS.        l6g 

very  particular  kind.  Taking  any  one  of  these 
points  of  view,  I  ask  by  what  right  do  we  apply 
to  the  ether  the  mechanical  properties  observed 
in  ordinary  matter,  which  is  but  false  matter  ? 
The  ancient  fluids,  caloric,  electricity,  etc.,  were 
abandoned  when  it  was  seen  that  heat  is  not 
indestructible.  But  they  were  also  laid  aside 
for  another  reason,  In  materialising  them,  their 
individuality  was,  so  to  speak,  emphasised — gaps 
were  opened  between  them  ;  and  these  gaps  had 
to  be  filled  in  when  the  sentiment  of  the  unity  of 
Nature  became  stronger,  and  when  the  intimate 
relations  which  connect  all  the  parts  were  per 
ceived.  In  multiplying  the  fluids,  not  only  did 
the  ancient  physicists  create  unnecessary  entities, 
but  they  destroyed  real  ties.  It  is  not  enough  for 
a  theory  not  to  affirm  false  relations ;  it  must  not 
conceal  true  relations. 

Does  our  ether  actually  exist  ?  We  know  the 
origin  of  our  belief  in  the  ether.  If  light  takes 
several  years  to  reach  us  from  a  distant  star,  it 
is  no  longer  on  the  star,  nor  is  it  on  the  earth. 
It  must  be  somewhere,  and  supported,  so  to  speak, 
by  some  material  agency. 

The  same  idea  may  be  expressed  in  a  more 
mathematical  and  more  abstract  form.  What  we 
note  are  the  changes  undergone  by  the  material 
molecules.  We  see,  for  instance,  that  the  photo 
graphic  plate  experiences  the  consequences  of  a 
phenomenon  of  which  the  incandescent  mass  of 
a  star  was  the  scene  several  vears  before.  Now, 


170  SCIENCE   AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

in  ordinary  mechanics,  the  state  of  the  system 
under  consideration  depends  only  on  its  state  at 
the  moment  immediately  preceding;  the  system 
therefore  satisfies  certain  differential  equations. 
On  the  other  hand,  if  we  did  not  believe  in  the 
ether,  the  state  of  the  material  universe  would 
depend  not  only  on  the  state  immediately  pre 
ceding,  but  also  on  much  older  states  ;  the  system 
would  satisfy  equations  of  finite  differences.  The 
ether  was  invented  to  escape  this  breaking  down 
of  the  laws  of  general  mechanics. 

Still,  this  would  only  compel  us  to  fill  the 
interplanetary  space  with  ether,  but  not  to 
make  it  penetrate  into  the  midst  of  the  material 
media.  Fizeau's  experiment  goes  further.  By 
the  interference  of  rays  which  have  passed 
through  the  air  or  water  in  motion,  it  seems  to 
show  us  two  different  media  penetrating  each 
other,  and  yet  being  displaced  with  respect  to 
each  other.  The  ether  is  all  but  in  our  grasp. 
Experiments  can  be  conceived  in  which  we  come 
closer  still  to  it.  Assume  that  Newton's  principle 
of  the  equality  of  action  and  re-action  is  not  true 
if  applied  to  matter  alone,  and  that  this  can  be 
proved.  The  geometrical  sum  of  all  the  forces 
applied  to  all  the  molecules  would  no  longer  be 
zero.  If  we  did  not  wish  to  change  the  whole  of  the 
science  of  mechanics,  we  should  have  to  introduce 
the  ether,  in  order  that  the  action  which  matter 
apparently  undergoes  should  be  counterbalanced 
by  the  re-action  of  matter  on  something. 


THE    THEORIES    OF    MODERN    PHYSICS.        IJI 

Or  again,  suppose  we  discover  that  optical  and 
electrical  phenomena  are  influenced  by  the  motion 
of  the  earth.  It  would  follow  that  those  pheno 
mena  might  reveal  to  us  not  only  the  relative 
motion  of  material  bodies,  but  also  what  would 
seem  to  be  their  absolute  motion.  Again,  it  would 
be  necessary  to  have  an  ether  in  order  that  these 
so-called  absolute  movements  should  not  be  their 
displacements  with  respect  to  empty  space,  but 
with  respect  to  something  concrete. 

Will  this  ever  be  accomplished  ?  I  do  not 
think  so,  and  I  shall  explain  why;  and  yet,  it  is 
not  absurd,  for  others  have  entertained  this  view. 
For  instance,  if  the  theory  of  Lorentz,  of  which  I 
shall  speak  in  more  detail  in  Chapter  XIII.,  were 
true,  Newton's  principle  would  not  apply  to  matter 
alone,  and  the  difference  would  not  be  very  far 
from  being  within  reach  of  experiment.  On  the 
other  hand,  many  experiments  have  been  made 
on  the  influence  of  the  motion  of  the  earth.  The 
results  have  always  been  negative.  But  if  these 
experiments  have  been  undertaken,  it  is  because 
we  have  not  been  certain  beforehand;  and  indeed, 
according  to  current  theories,  the  compensation 
would  be  only  approximate,  and  we  might  expect 
to  find  accurate  methods  giving  positive  results. 
I  think  that  such  a  hope  is  illusory ;  it  was  none 
the  less  interesting  to  show  that  a  success  of  this 
kind  would,  in  a  certain  sense,  open  to  us  a  new 
world. 

And    now    allow  me   to   make    a   digression ;    I 


172  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

must  explain  why  I  do  not  believe,  in  spite  of 
Lorentz,  that  more  exact  observations  will  ever 
make  evident  anything  else  but  the  relative  dis 
placements  of  material  bodies.  Experiments  have 
been  made  that  should  have  disclosed  the  terms 
of  the  first  order;  the  results  were  nugatory. 
Could  that  have  been  by  chance  ?  No  one  has 
admitted  this ;  a  general  explanation  was  sought, 
and  Lorentz  found  it.  He  showed  that  the  terms 
of  the  first  order  should  cancel  each  other,  but 
not  the  terms  of  the  second  order.  Then  more 
exact  experiments  were  made,  which  were  also 
negative ;  neither  could  this  be  the  result  of 
chance.  An  explanation  was  necessary,  and  was 
forthcoming ;  they  always  are ;  hypotheses  are 
what  we  lack  the  least.  But  this  is  not  enough. 
Who  is  there  who  does  not  think  that  this  leaves 
to  chance  far  too  important  a  role  ?  Would  it 
not  also  be  a  chance  that  this  singular  concurrence 
should  cause  a  certain  circumstance  to  destroy  the 
terms  of  the  first  order,  and  that  a  totally  different 
but  very  opportune  circumstance  should  cause 
those  of  the  second  order  to  vanish?  No;  the 
same  explanation  must  be  found  for  the  two 
cases,  and  everything  tends  to  show  that  this 
explanation  would  serve  equally  well  for  the 
terms  of  the  higher  order,  and  that  the  mutual 
destruction  of  these  terms  will  be  rigorous  and 
absolute. 

The    Present    State    of   Physics. — Two    opposite 
tendencies   may  be    distinguished    in    the    history 


THE    THEORIES    OF    MODERN    PHYSICS.         173 

of  the  development  of  physics.  On  the  one  hand, 
new  relations  are  continually  being  discovered 
between  objects  which  seemed  destined  to  remain 
for  ever  unconnected ;  scattered  facts  cease  to  be 
strangers  to  each  other  and  tend  to  be  marshalled 
into  an  imposing  synthesis.  The  march  of  science 
is  towards  unity  and  simplicity. 

On  the  other  hand,  new  phenomena  are  con 
tinually  being  revealed ;  it  will  be  long  before 
they  can  be  assigned  their  place — sometimes  it 
may  happen  that  to  find  them  a  place  a  corner  of 
the  edifice  must  be  demolished.  In  the  same  way, 
we  are  continually  perceiving  details  ever  more 
varied  in  the  phenomena  we  know,  where  our 
crude  senses  used  to  be  unable  to  detect  any  lack 
of  unity.  What  we  thought  to  be  simple  becomes 
complex,  and  the  march  of  science  seems  to  be 
towards  diversity  and  complication. 

Here,  then,  are  two  opposing  tendencies,  each  of 
which  seems  to  triumph  in  turn.  Which  will  win  ? 
If  the  first  wins,  science  is  possible  ;  but  nothing 
proves  this  a  priori,  and  it  may  be  that  after 
unsuccessful  efforts  to  bend  Nature  to  our  ideal  of 
unity  in  spite  of  herself,  we  shall  be  submerged  by 
the  ever-rising  flood  of  our  new  riches  and  com 
pelled  to  renounce  all  idea  of  classification — to 
abandon  our  ideal,  and  to  reduce  science  to  the 
mere  recording  of  innumerable  recipes. 

In  fact,  we  can  give  this  question  no  answer. 
All  that  we  can  do  is  to  observe  the  science  of 
to-day,  and  compare  it  with  that  of  yesterday. 


174  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

No  doubt  after  this  examination  we  shall  be  in  a 
position  to  offer  a  few  conjectures. 

Half-a-century  ago  hopes  ran  high  indeed.  The 
unity  of  force  had  just  been  revealed  to  us  by  the 
discovery  of  the  conservation  of  energy  and  of  its 
transformation.  This  discovery  also  showed  that 
the  phenomena  of  heat  could  be  explained  by 
molecular  movements.  Although  the  nature  of 
these  movements  was  not  exactly  known,  no  one 
doubted  but  that  they  would  be  ascertained  before 
long.  As  for  light,  the  work  seemed  entirely  com 
pleted.  So  far  as  electricity  was  concerned,  there 
was  not  so  great  an  advance.  Electricity  had  just 
annexed  magnetism.  This  was  a  considerable  and 
a  definitive  step  towards  unity.  But  how  was 
electricity  in  its  turn  to  be  brought  into  the 
general  unity,  and  how  was  it  to  be  included  in 
the  general  universal  mechanism  ?  No  one  had 
the  slightest  idea.  As  to  the  possibility  of  the  in 
clusion,  all  were  agreed ;  they  had  faith.  Finally, 
as  far  as  the  molecular  properties  of  material 
bodies  are  concerned,  the  inclusion  seemed  easier, 
but  the  details  were  very  hazy.  In  a  word,  hopes 
were  vast  and  strong,  but  vague. 

To-day,  what  do  we  see  ?  In  the  first  place,  a 
step  in  advance — immense  progress.  The  relations 
between  light  and  electricity  are  now  known ;  the 
three  domains  of  light,  electricity,  and  magnetism, 
formerly  separated,  are  now  one ;  and  this  annexa 
tion  seems  definitive. 

Nevertheless  the  conquest  has  caused  us  some 


THE    THEORIES    OF    MODERN    PHYSICS.         175 

sacrifices.  Optical  phenomena  become  particular 
cases  in  electric  phenomena;  as  long  as  the  former 
remained  isolated,  it  was  easy  to  explain  them  by 
movements  which  were  thought  to  be  known  in 
all  their  details.  That  was  easy  enough  ;  but  any 
explanation  to  be  accepted  must  now  cover  the 
whole  domain  of  electricity.  This  cannot  be  done 
without  difficulty. 

The  most  satisfactory  theory  is  that  of  Lorentz; 
it  is  unquestionably  the  theory  that  best  explains 
the  known  facts,  the  one  that  throws  into  relief 
the  greatest  number  of  known  relations,  the  one  in 
which  we  find  most  traces  of  definitive  construc 
tion.  That  it  still  possesses  a  serious  fault  I 
have  shown  above.  It  is  in  contradiction  with 
Newton's  law  that  action  and  re-action  are  equal 
and  opposite — or  rather,  this  principle  according 
to  Lorentz  cannot  be  applicable  to  matter  alone ; 
if  it  be  true,  it  must  take  into  account  the  action 
of  the  ether  on  matter,  and  the  re-action  of  the 
matter  on  the  ether.  Now,  in  the  new  order,  it  is 
very  likely  that  things  do  not  happen  in  this  way. 

However  this  may  be,  it  is  due  to  Lorentz  that 
the  results  of  Fizeau  on  the  optics  of  moving 
bodies,  the  laws  of  normal  and  abnormal  dis 
persion  and  of  absorption  are  connected  with 
each  other  and  with  the  other  properties  of  the 
ether,  by  bonds  which  no  doubt  will  not  be 
readily  severed.  Look  at  the  ease  with  which  the 
new  Zeeman  phenomenon  found  its  place,  and 
even  aided  the  classification  of  Faraday's  magnetic 


176  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

rotation,  which  had  defied  all  Maxwell's  efforts. 
This  facility  proves  that  Lorentz's  theory  is  not  a 
mere  artificial  combination  which  must  eventually 
find  its  solvent.  It  will  probably  have  to  be 
modified,  but  not  destroyed. 

The  only  object  of  Lorentz  was  to  include  in  a 
single  whole  all  the  optics  and  electro-dynamics 
of  moving  bodies  ;  he  did  not  claim  to  give  a 
mechanical  explanation.  Larmor  goes  further ; 
keeping  the  essential  part  of  Lorentz's  theory,  he 
grafts  upon  it,  so  to  speak,  MacCullagh's  ideas  on 
the  direction  of  the  movement  of  the  ether. 
MacCullagh  held  that  the  velocity  of  the  ether 
is  the  same  in  magnitude  and  direction  as  the 
magnetic  force.  Ingenious  as  is  this  attempt,  the 
fault  in  Lorentz's  theory  remains,  and  is  even 
aggravated.  According  to  Lorentz,  we  do  not 
know  what  the  movements  of  the  ether  are;  and 
because  we  do  not  know  this,  we  may  suppose 
them  to  be  movements  compensating  those  of 
matter,  and  re-affirming  that  action  and  re-action 
are  equal  and  opposite.  According  to  Larmor 
we  know  the  movements  of  the  ether,  and  we 
can  prove  that  the  compensation  does  not  take 
place. 

If  Larmor  has  failed,  as  in  my  opinion  he  has, 
does  it  necessarily  follow  that  a  mechanical  ex 
planation  is  impossible  ?  Far  from  it.  I  said 
above  that  as  long  as  a  phenomenon  obeys  the 
two  principles  of  energy  and  least  action,  so  long 
it  allows  of  an  unlimited  number  of  mechanical 


THE    THEORIES    OF    MODERN    PHYSICS.         177 

explanations.      And    so    with    the    phenomena   of 
optics  and  electricity. 

But  this  is  not  enough.  For  a  mechanical 
explanation  to  be  good  it  must  be  simple ;  to 
choose  it  from  among  all  the  explanations  that  are 
possible  there  must  be  other  reasons  than  the 
necessity  of  making  a  choice.  Well,  we  have  no 
theory  as  yet  which  will  satisfy  this  condition  and 
consequently  be  of  any  use.  Are  we  then  to 
complain  ?  That  would  be  to  forget  the  end  we 
seek,  which  is  not  the  mechanism  ;  the  true  and 
only  aim  is  unity. 

We  ought  therefore  to  set  some  limits  to 
our  ambition.  Let  us  not  seek  to  formulate  a 
mechanical  explanation  ;  let  us  be  content  to 
show  that  we  can  always  find  one  if  we  wish.  In 
this  we  have  succeeded.  The  principle  of  the 
conservation  of  energy  has  always  been  confirmed, 
and  now  it  has  a  fellow  in  the  principle  of  least 
action,  stated  in  the  form  appropriate  to  physics. 
This  has  also  been  verified,  at  least  as  far  as 
concerns  the  reversible  phenomena  which  obey 
Lagrange's  equations — in  other  words,  which  obey 
the  most  general  laws  of  physics.  The  irreversible 
phenomena  are  much  more  difficult  to  bring  into 
line ;  but  they,  too,  are  being  co-ordinated  and 
tend  to  come  into  the  unity.  The  light  which 
illuminates  them  comes  from  Carnot's  principle. 
For  a  long  time  thermo-dynamics  was  confined  to 
the  study  of  the  dilatations  of  bodies  and  of  their 
change  of  state.  For  some  time  past  it  has  been 

12 


1/8  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

growing  bolder,  and  has  considerably  extended  its 
domain.  We  owe  to  it  the  theories  of  the  voltaic 
cell  and  of  their  thermo-electric  phenomena;  there 
is  not  a  corner  in  physics  which  it  has  not  ex 
plored,  and  it  has  even  attacked  chemistry  itself. 
The  same  laws  hold  good  ;  everywhere,  disguised 
in  some  form  or  other,  we  find  Carnot's  principle ; 
everywhere  also  appears  that  eminently  abstract 
concept  of  entropy  which  is  as  universal  as  the 
concept  of  energy,  and  like  it,  seems  to  conceal  a 
reality.  It  seemed  that  radiant  heat  must  escape, 
but  recently  that,  too,  has  been  brought  under  the 
same  laws. 

In  this  way  fresh  analogies  are  revealed  which 
may  be  often  pursued  in  detail ;  electric  resistance 
resembles  the  viscosity  of  fluids ;  hysteresis  would 
rather  be  like  the  friction  of  solids.  In  all  cases 
friction  appears  to  be  the  type  most  imitated  by 
the  most  diverse  irreversible  phenomena,  and  this 
relationship  is  real  and  profound. 

A  strictly  mechanical  explanation  of  these 
phenomena  has  also  been  sought,  but,  owing  to 
their  nature,  it  is  hardly  likely  that  it  will  be 
found.  To  find  it,  it  has  been  necessary  to 
suppose  that  the  irreversibility  is  but  apparent,  that 
the  elementary  phenomena  are  reversible  and  obey 
the  known  laws  of  dynamics.  But  the  elements 
are  extremely  numerous,  and  become  blended 
more  and  more,  so  that  to  our  crude  sight  all 
appears  to  tend  towards  uniformity — i.e.,  all  seems 
to  progress  in  the  same  direction,  and  that  without 


THE    THEORIES    OF    MODERN    PHYSICS.         179 

hope  of  return.  The  apparent  irreversibility  is 
therefore  but  an  effect  of  the  law  of  great  numbers. 
Only  a  being  of  infinitely  subtle  senses,  such  as 
Maxwell's  demon,  could  unravel  this  tangled  skein 
and  turn  back  the  course  of  the  universe. 

This  conception,  which  is  connected  with  the 
kinetic  theory  of  gases,  has  cost  great  effort  and 
has  not,  on  the  whole,  been  fruitful ;  it  may 
become  so.  This  is  not  the  place  to  examine  if  it 
leads  to  contradictions,  and  if  it  is  in  conformity 
with  the  true  nature  of  things. 

Let  us  notice,  however,  the  original  ideas  of 
M.  Gouy  on  the  Brownian  movement.  According 
to  this  scientist,  this  singular  movement  does  not 
obey  Carnot's  principle.  The  particles  which  it  sets 
moving  would  be  smaller  than  the  meshes  of  that 
tightly  drawn  net;  they  would  thus  be  ready  to 
separate  them,  and  thereby  to  set  back  the  course 
of  the  universe.  One  can  almost  see  Maxwell's 
demon  at  work.1 

To  resume,  phenomena  long  known  are  gradually 
being  better  classified,  but  new  phenomena  come 
to  claim  their  place,  and  most  of  them,  like  the 
Zeeman  effect,  find  it  at  once.  Then  we  have  the 
cathode  rays,  the  X-rays,  uranium  and  radium 
rays;  in  fact,  a  whole  world  of  which  none  had 
suspected  the  existence.  How  many  unexpected 

1  Clerk-Maxwell  imagined  some  supernatural  agency  at  work, 
sorting  molecules  in  a  gas  of  uniform  temperature  into  (a]  those 
possessing  kinetic  energy  above  the  average,  (/;)  those  possessing 
kinetic  energy  below  the  average. — [Tk.] 


l8o  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

guests  to  find  a  place  for  !  No  one  can  yet  predict 
the  place  they  will  occupy,  but  I  do  not  believe 
they  will  destroy  the  general  unity :  I  think  that 
they  will  rather  complete  it.  On  the  one  hand, 
indeed,  the  new  radiations  seem  to  be  connected 
with  the  phenomena  of  luminosity;  not  only  do 
they  excite  fluorescence,  but  they  sometimes  come 
into  existence  under  the  same  conditions  as  that 
property;  neither  are  they  unrelated  to  the  cause 
which  produces  the  electric  spark  under  the  action 
of  ultra-violet  light.  Finally,  and  most  important 
of  all,  it  is  believed  that  in  all  these  phenomena 
there  exist  ions,  animated,  it  is  true,  with  velocities 
far  greater  than  those  of  electrolytes.  All  this  is 
very  vague,  but  it  will  all  become  clearer. 

Phosphorescence  and  the  action  of  light  on  the 
spark  were  regions  rather  isolated,  and  consequently 
somewhat  neglected  by  investigators.  It  is  to  be 
hoped  that  a  new  path  will  now  be  made  which 
will  facilitate  their  communications  with  the 
rest  of  science.  Not  only  do  we  discover  new 
phenomena,  but  those  we  think  we  know  are 
revealed  in  unlooked-for  aspects.  In  the  free  ether 
the  laws  preserve  their  majestic  simplicity,  but 
matter  properly  so  called  seems  more  and  more 
complex ;  all  we  can  say  of  it  is  but  approximate, 
and  our  formulae  are  constantly  requiring  new 
terms. 

But  the  ranks  are  unbroken,  the  relations  that 
we  have  discovered  between  objects  we  thought 
simple  still  hold  good  between  the  same  objects 


THE    THEORIES    OF    MODERN    PHYSICS.         l8l 

when  their  complexity  is  recognised,  and  that 
alone  is  the  important  thing.  Our  equations 
become,  it  is  true,  more  and  more  complicated,  so 
as  to  embrace  more  closely  the  complexity  of 
nature ;  but  nothing  is  changed  in  the  relations 
which  enable  these  equations  to  be  derived  from 
each  other.  In  a  word,  the  form  of  these  equations 
persists.  Take  for  instance  the  laws  of  reflection. 
Fresnel  established  them  by  a  simple  and  attractive 
theory  which  experiment  seemed  to  confirm.  Sub 
sequently,  more  accurate  researches  have  shown 
that  this  verification  was  but  approximate;  traces 
of  elliptic  polarisation  were  detected  everywhere. 
But  it  is  owing  to  the  first  approximation  that  the 
cause  of  these  anomalies  was  found  in  the  existence 
of  a  transition  layer,  and  all  the  essentials  of 
Fresnel's  theory  have  remained.  We  cannot  help 
reflecting  that  all  these  relations  would  never  have 
been  noted  if  there  had  been  doubt  in  the  first 
place  as  to  the  complexity  of  the  objects  they 
connect.  Long  ago  it  was  said:  If  Tycho  had  had 
instruments  ten  times  as  precise,  we  would  never 
have  had  a  Kepler,  or  a  Newton,  or  Astronomy. 
It  is  a  misfortune  for  a  science  to  be  born  too  late, 
when  the  means  of  observation  have  become  too 
perfect.  That  is  what  is  happening  at  this  moment 
with  respect  to  physical  chemistry;  the  founders 
are  hampered  in  their  general  grasp  by  third  and 
fourth  decimal  places;  happily  they  are  men  of 
robust  faith.  As  we  get  to  know  the  properties 
of  matter  better  we  see  that  continuity  reigns. 


182  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

From  the  work  of  Andrews  and  Van  der  Waals, 
we  see  how  the  transition  from  the  liquid  to  the 
gaseous  state  is  made,  and  that  it  is  not  abrupt. 
Similarly,  there  is  no  gap  between  the  liquid  and 
solid  states,  and  in  the  proceedings  of  a  recent 
Congress  we  see  memoirs  on  the  rigidity  of  liquids 
side  by  side  with  papers  on  the  flow  of  solids. 

With  this  tendency  there  is  no  doubt  a  loss  of 
simplicity.  Such  and  such  an  effect  was  represented 
by  straight  lines;  it  is  nowr  necessary  to  connect 
these  lines  by  more  or  less  complicated  curves. 
On  the  other  hand,  unity  is  gained.  Separate 
categories  quieted  but  did  not  satisfy  the  mind. 

Finally,  a  new  domain,  that  of  chemistry,  has 
been  invaded  by  the  method  of  physics,  and  we  see 
the  birth  of  physical  chemistry.  It  is  still  quite 
young,  but  already  it  has  enabled  us  to  connect 
such  phenomena  as  electrolysis,  osmosis,  and  the 
movements  of  ions. 

From  this  cursory  exposition  what  can  we  con 
clude?  Taking  all  things  into  account,  we  have 
approached  the  realisation  of  unity.  This  has  not 
been  done  as  quickly  as  was  hoped  fifty  years  ago, 
and  the  path  predicted  has  not  always  been 
followed;  but,  on  the  whole,  much  ground  has 
been  gained. 


CHAPTER  XL 

THE    CALCULUS    OF    PROBABILITIES. 

No  doubt  the  reader  will  be  astonished  to  find 
reflections  on  the  calculus  of  probabilities  in  such 
a  volume  as  this.  What  has  that  calculus  to  do 
with  physical  science  ?  The  questions  I  shall  raise 
—without,  however,  giving  them  a  solution  — are 
naturally  raised  by  the  philosopher  who  is  examin 
ing  the  problems  of  physics.  So  far  is  this  the  case, 
that  in  the  two  preceding  chapters  I  have  several 
times  used  the  words  "probability"  and  "chance." 
"  Predicted  facts,"  as  I  said  above,  "  can  only  be 
probable."  However  solidly  founded  a  predic 
tion  may  appear  to  be,  we  are  never  absolutely 
certain  that  experiment  will  not  prove  it  false;  but 
the  probability  is  often  so  great  that  practically 
it  may  be  accepted.  And  a  little  farther  on  I 
added: — "See  what  a  part  the  belief  in  simplicity 
plays  in  our  generalisations.  We  have  verified  a 
simple  law  in  a  large  number  of  particular  cases, 
and  we  refuse  to  admit  that  this  so-often-repeated 
coincidence  is  a  mere  effect  of  chance."  Thus,  in  a 
multitude  of  circumstances  the  physicist  is  often 
in  the  same  position  as  the  gambler  who  reckons 
up  his  chances.  Every  time  that  he  reasons  by 


184  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

induction,  he  more  or  less  consciously  requires  the 
calculus  of  probabilities,  and  that  is  why  I  am 
obliged  to  open  this  chapter  parenthetically,  and  to 
interrupt  our  discussion  of  method  in  the  physical 
sciences  in  order  to  examine  a  little  closer  what  this 
calculus  is  worth,  and  what  dependence  we  may 
place  upon  it.  The  very  name  of  the  calculus  of 
probabilities  is  a  paradox.  Probability  as  opposed 
to  certainty  is  what  one  does  not  know,  and  how 
can  we  calculate  the  unknown  ?  Yet  many  eminent 
scientists  have  devoted  themselves  to  this  calculus, 
and  it  cannot  be  denied  that  science  has  drawn  there 
from  no  small  advantage.  How  can  we  explain 
this  apparent  contradiction  ?  Has  probability  been 
defined  ?  Can  it  even  be  defined  ?  And  if  it  can 
not,  how  can  we  venture  to  reason  upon  it  ?  The 
definition,  it  will  be  said,  is  very  simple.  The 
probability  of  an  event  is  the  ratio  of  the  number 
of  cases  favourable  to  the  event  to  the  total  number 
of  possible  cases.  A  simple  example  will  show  how 
incomplete  this  definition  is: — I  throw  two  dice. 
What  is  the  probability  that  one  of  the  two 
at  least  turns  up  a  6  ?  Each  can  turn  up  in  six 
different  ways;  the  number  of  possible  cases  is 
6  x  6  =  36.  The  number  of  favourable  cases  is  n  ; 

the  probability  is  -1-    That  is  the  correct  solution. 

But  why  cannot  we  just  as  well  proceed  as  follows? 
-The  points  which  turn  up  on  the  two  dice  form 

—  =  2 1    different   combinations.      Among  these 
combinations,  six  are  favourable ;  the  probability 


THE    CALCULUS    OF    PROBABILITIES.  185 

is  — •      Now  why  is  the  first  method  of  calculating 

the  number  of  possible  cases  more  legitimate  than 
the  second  ?  In  any  case  it  is  not  the  definition 
that  tells  us.  We  are  therefore  bound  to  complete 
the  definition  by  saying,  "  ...  to  the  total  number 
of  possible  cases,  provided  the  cases  are  equally 
probable."  So  we  are  compelled  to  define  the 
probable  by  the  probable.  How  can  we  know 
that  two  possible  cases  are  equally  probable  ? 
Will  it  be  by  a  convention  ?  If  we  insert  at  the 
beginning  of  every  problem  an  explicit  convention, 
well  and  good !  We  then  have  nothing  to  do  but  to 
apply  the  rules  of  arithmetic  and  algebra,  and  we 
complete  our  calculation,  when  our  result  cannot 
be  called  in  question.  But  if  we  wish  to  make  the 
slightest  application  of  this  result,  we  must  prove 
that  our  convention  is  legitimate,  and  we  shall  find 
ourselves  in  the  presence  of  the  very  difficulty  we 
thought  we  had  avoided.  It  may  be  said  that 
common-sense  is  enough  to  show  us  the  convention 
that  should  be  adopted.  Alas !  M.  Bertrand  has 
amused  himself  by  discussing  the  following  simple 
problem  : — "  What  is  the  probability  that  a  chord 
of  a  circle  may  be  greater  than  the  side  of  the 
inscribed  equilateral  triangle?"  The  illustrious 
geometer  successively  adopted  two  conventions 
which  seemed  to  be  equally  imperative  in  the  eyes 
of  common-sense,  and  with  one  convention  he  finds 
J,  and  with  the  other  J-.  The  conclusion  which 
seems  to  follow-  from  this  is  that  the  calculus  of 
probabilities  is  a  useless  science,  that  the  obscure 


l86  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

instinct  which  we  call  common-sense,  and  to  which 
we  appeal  for  the  legitimisation  of  our  conventions, 
must  be  distrusted.  But  to  this  conclusion  we  can 
no  longer  subscribe.  We  cannot  do  without  that 
obscure  instinct.  Without  it,  science  would  be 
impossible,  and  without  it  we  could  neither  discover 
nor  apply  a  law.  Have  we  any  right,  for  instance, 
to  enunciate  Newton's  law  ?  No  doubt  numerous 
observations  are  in  agreement  with  it,  but  is  not 
that  a  simple  fact  of  chance  ?  and  how  do  we  know, 
besides,  that  this  law  which  has  been  true  for  so 
many  generations  will  not  be  untrue  in  the  next  ? 
To  this  objection  the  only  answer  you  can  give  is: 
It  is  very  improbable.  But  grant  the  law.  By 
means  of  it  I  can  calculate  the  position  of  Jupiter 
in  a  year  from  now.  Yet  have  I  any  right  to  say 
this?  Who  can  tell  if  a  gigantic  mass  of  enormous 
velocity  is  not  going  to  pass  near  the  solar  system 
and  produce  unforeseen  perturbations  ?  Here 
again  the  only  answer  is :  It  is  very  improbable. 
From  this  point  of  view  all  the  sciences  would  only 
be  unconscious  applications  of  the  calculus  of  prob 
abilities.  And  if  this  calculus  be  condemned,  then 
the  whole  of  the  sciences  must  also  be  condemned. 
I  shall  not  dwell  at  length  on  scientific  problems 
in  which  the  intervention  of  the  calculus  of  prob 
abilities  is  more  evident.  In  the  forefront  of  these 
is  the  problem  of  interpolation,  in  which,  knowing 
a  certain  number  of  values  of  a  function,  we  try 
to  discover  the  intermediary  values.  I  may  also 
mention  the  celebrated  theory  of  errors  of  observa- 


THE    CALCULUS    OF    PROBABILITIES.  187 

tion,  to  which  I  shall  return  later;  the  kinetic 
theory  of  gases,  a  well-known  hypothesis  wherein 
each  gaseous  molecule  is  supposed  to  describe  an 
extremely  complicated  path,  but  in  which,  through 
the  effect  of  great  numbers,  the  mean  phenomena 
\vhich  are  all  we  observe  obey  the  simple  laws  of 
Mariotte  and  Gay-Lussac.  All  these  theories  are 
based  upon  the  laws  of  great  numbers,  and  the 
calculus  of  probabilities  would  evidently  involve 
them  in  its  ruin.  It  is  true  that  they  have  only  a 
particular  interest,  and  that,  save  as  far  as  inter 
polation  is  concerned,  they  are  sacrifices  to  which 
we  might  readily  be  resigned.  But  I  have  said 
above,  it  would  not  be  these  partial  sacrifices  that 
would  be  in  question  ;  it  would  be  the  legitimacy 
of  the  whole  of  science  that  would  be  challenged. 
I  quite  see  that  it  might  be  said:  We  do  not  know, 
and  yet  we  must  act.  As  for  action,  we  have  not 
time  to  devote  ourselves  to  an  inquiry  that  will 
suffice  to  dispel  our  ignorance.  Besides,  such  an 
inquiry  would  demand  unlimited  time.  We  must 
therefore  make  up  our  minds  without  knowing. 
This  must  be  often  done  whatever  may  happen, 
and  we  must  follow  the  rules  although  we  may 
have  but  little  confidence  in  them.  What  I  know 
is,  not  that  such  a  thing  is  true,  but  that  the  best 
course  for  me  is  to  act  as  if  it  were  true.  The 
calculus  of  probabilities,  and  therefore  science 
itself,  would  be  no  longer  of  any  practical  value. 
Unfortunately  the  difficulty  does  not  thus  dis 
appear.  A  gambler  wants  to  try  a  coup,  and  he 


l88  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

asks  my  advice.  If  I  give  it  him,  I  use  the 
calculus  of  probabilities;  but  I  shall  not  guarantee 
success.  That  is  what  I  shall  call  subjective  prob 
ability.  In  this  case  we  might  be  content  with  the 
explanation  'of  which  I  have  just  given  a  sketch. 
But  assume  that  an  observer  is  present  at  the  play, 
that  he  knows  of  the  coup,  and  that  play  goes 
on  for  a  long  time,  and  that  he  makes  a  summary 
of  his  notes.  He  will  find  that  events  have 
taken  place  in  conformity  with  the  laws  of  the 
calculus  of  probabilities.  That  is  what  I  shall  call 
objective  probability,  and  it  is  this  phenomenon 
which  has  to  be  explained.  There  are  numerous 
Insurance  Societies  which  apply  the  rules  of  the 
calculus  of  probabilities,  and  they  distribute  to 
their  shareholders  dividends,  the  objective  reality 
of  which  cannot  be  contested.  In  order  to  explain 
them,  we  must  do  more  than  invoke  our  ignorance 
and  the  necessity  of  action.  Thus,  absolute  scepti 
cism  is  not  admissible.  We  may  distrust,  but  we 
cannot  condemn  en  bloc.  Discussion  is  necessary. 
I.  Classification  of  the  Problems  of  Probability. — In 
order  to  classify  the  problems  which  are  presented 
to  us  with  reference  to  probabilities,  we  must  look  at 
them  from  different  points  of  view,  and  first  of  all, 
from  that  of  generality.  I  said  above  that  prob 
ability  is  the  ratio  of  the  number  of  favourable  to 
the  number  of  possible  cases.  What  for  want  of  a 
better  term  I  call  generality  will  increase  with  the 
number  of  possible  cases.  This  number  may  be 
finite,  as,  for  instance,  if  we  take  a  throw  of  the 


THE    CALCULUS    OF    PROBABILITIES.  l8g 

dice  in  which  the  number  of  possible  cases  is  36. 
That  is  the  first  degree  of  generality.  But  if  we 
ask,  for  instance,  what  is  the  probability  that  a 
point  within  a  circle  is  within  the  inscribed  square, 
there  are  as  many  possible  cases  as  there  are  points 
in  the  circle — that  is  to  say,  an  infinite  number. 
This  is  the  second  degree  of  generality.  Generality 
can  be  pushed  further  still.  We  may  ask  the  prob 
ability  that  a  function  will  satisfy  a  given  condi 
tion.  There  are  then  as  many  possible  cases  as  one 
can  imagine  different  functions.  This  is  the  third 
degree  of  generality,  which  we  reach,  for  instance, 
wrhen  we  try  to  find  the  most  probable  law  after  a 
finite  number  of  observations.  Yet  we  may  place 
ourselves  at  a  quite  different  point  of  view.  If  we 
were  not  ignorant  there  would  be  no  probability, 
there  could  only  be  certainty.  But  our  ignorance 
cannot  be  absolute,  for  then  there  would  be  no 
longer  any  probability  at  all.  Thus  the  problems 
of  probability  may  be  classed  according  to  the 
greater  or  less  depth  of  this  ignorance.  In  mathe 
matics  we  may  set  ourselves  problems  in  prob 
ability.  What  is  the  probability  that  the  fifth 
decimal  of  a  logarithm  taken  at  random  from  a 
table  is  a  9.  There  is  no  hesitation  in  answering 
that  this  probability  is  i-ioth.  Here  we  possess 
all  the  data  of  the  problem.  We  can  calculate 
our  logarithm  without  having  recourse  to  the 
table,  but  we  need  not  give  ourselves  the  trouble. 
This .  is  the  first  degree  of  ignorance.  In  the 
physical  sciences  our  ignorance  is  already  greater. 


IQO  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

The  state  of  a  system  at  a  given  moment  depends 
on  two  things — its  initial  state,  and  the  law 
according  to  which  that  state  varies.  If  we  know 
both  this  lawr  and  this  initial  state,  we  have  a 
simple  mathematical  problem  to  solve,  and  we 
fall  back  upon  our  first  degree  of  ignorance. 
Then  it  often  happens  that  we  know  the  law 
and  do  not  know  the  initial  state.  It  may  be 
asked,  for  instance,  what  is  the  present  distribu 
tion  of  the  minor  planets  ?  We  know  that  from 
all  time  they  have  obeyed  the  laws  of  Kepler, 
but  we  do  not  know  what  was  their  initial  dis 
tribution.  In  the  kinetic  theory  of  gases  we 
assume  that  the  gaseous  molecules  follow  recti 
linear  paths  and  obey  the  laws  of  impact  and 
elastic  bodies;  yet  as  we  know  nothing  of  their 
initial  velocities,  we  know  nothing  of  their  present 
velocities.  The  calculus  of  probabilities  alone 
enables  us  to  predict  the  mean  phenomena  which 
will  result  from  a  combination  of  these  velocities. 
This  is  the  second  degree  of  ignorance.  Finally 
it  is  possible,  that  not  only  the  initial  conditions 
but  the  laws  themselves  are  unknown.  We  then 
reach  the  third  degree  of  ignorance,  and  in  general 
we  can  no  longer  affirm  anything  at  all  as  to  the 
probability  of  a  phenomenon.  It  often  happens 
that  instead  of  trying  to  discover  an  event  by 
means  of  a  more  or  less  imperfect  knowledge  of 
the  law,  the  events  may  be  known,  and  we  want 
to  find  the  law ;  or  that,  instead  of  deducing 
effects  from  causes,  we  wish  to  deduce  the  causes 


THE    CALCULUS    OF    PROBABILITIES.  IQI 

from  the  effects.  Now,  these  problems  are  classified 
as  probability  of  causes,  and  are  the  most  interesting 
of  all  from  their  scientific  applications.  I  play  at 
ecarte  with  a  gentleman  whom  I  know  to  be  per 
fectly  honest.  What  is  the  chance  that  he  turns 
up  the  king  ?  It  is  -J-.  This  is  a  problem  of  the 
probability  of  effects.  I  play  with  a  gentleman 
whom  I  do  not  know.  He  has  dealt  ten  times, 
and  he  has  turned  the  king  up  six  times.  What 
is  the  chance  that  he  is  a  sharper  ?  This  is  a 
problem  in  the  probability  of  causes.  It  may  be 
said  that  it  is  the  essential  problem  of  the  experi 
mental  method.  I  have  observed  n  values  of  x 
and  the  corresponding  values  of  y.  I  have  found 
that  the  ratio  of  the  latter  to  the  former  is  prac 
tically  constant.  There  is  the  event ;  what  is 
the  cause  ?  Is  it  probable  that  there  is  a  general 
law  according  to  which  y  would  be  proportional 
to  x,  and  that  small  divergencies  are  due  to  errors 
of  observation  ?  This  is  the  type  of  question  that 
we  are  ever  asking,  and  which  we  unconsciously 
solve  whenever  we  are  engaged  in  scientific  work. 
I  am  now  going  to  pass  in  review  these  different 
categories  of  problems  by  discussing  in  succession 
what  I  have  called  subjective  and  objective  prob 
ability. 

II.  Probability  in  Mathematics.  —  The  impossi 
bility  of  squaring  the  circle  was  shown  in  1885,  but 
before  that  date  all  geometers  considered  this  im 
possibility  as  so  " probable"  that  the  Academic  des 
Sciences  rejected  without  examination  the,  alas ! 


IQ2  SCIENCE   AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

too  numerous  memoirs  on  this  subject  that  a 
few  unhappy  madmen  sent  in  every  year.  Was 
the  Academic  wrong  ?  Evidently  not,  and  it 
knew  perfectly  well  that  by  acting  in  this 
manner  it  did  not  run  the  least  risk  of  stifling 
a  discovery  of  moment.  The  Academic  could 
not  have  proved  that  it  was  right,  but  it  knew 
quite  well  that  its  instinct  did  not  deceive  it. 
If  you  had  asked  the  Academicians,  they  would 
have  answered:  "We  have  compared  the  prob 
ability  that  an  unknown  scientist  should  have 
found  out  what  has  been  vainly  sought  for  so 
long,  with  the  probability  that  there  is  one  mad 
man  the  more  on  the  earth,  and  the  latter  has 
appeared  to  us  the  greater."  These  are  very 
good  reasons,  but  there  is  nothing  mathematical 
about  them;  they  are  purely  psychological.  If 
you  had  pressed  them  further,  they  would  have 
added:  "  Why  do  you  expect  a  particular  value  of 
a  transcendental  function  to  be  an  algebraical 
number;  if  ^  be  the  root  of  an  algebraical  equa 
tion,  why  do  you  expect  this  root  to  be  a  period  of 
the  function  sin  2x,  and  why  is  it  not  the  same 
with  the  other  roots  of  the  same  equation?"  To 
sum  up,  they  would  have  invoked  the  principle  of 
sufficient  reason  in  its  vaguest  form.  Yet  what 
information  could  they  draw  from  it  ?  At  most  a 
rule  of  conduct  for  the  employment  of  their  time, 
which  would  be  more  usefully  spent  at  their 
ordinary  work  than  in  reading  a  lucubration 
that  inspired  in  them  a  legitimate  distrust.  But 


THE    CALCULUS    OF    PROBABILITIES.  IQ3 

what  I  called  above  objective  probability  has 
nothing  in  common  with  this  first  problem.  It  is 
otherwise  with  the  second.  Let  us  consider  the 
first  10,000  logarithms  that  we  find  in  a  table. 
Among  these  10,000  logarithms  I  take  one  at 
random.  What  is  the  probability  that  its  third 
decimal  is  an  even  number  ?  You  will  say  with 
out  any  hesitation  that  the  probability  is  J,  and  in 
fact  if  you  pick  out  in  a  table  the  third  decimals 
in  these  10,000  numbers  you  will  find  nearly  as 
many  even  digits  as  odd.  Or,  if  you  prefer  it,  let 
us  write  10,000  numbers  corresponding  to  our 
10,000  logarithms,  writing  down  for  each  of  these 
numbers  4- 1  if  the  third  decimal  of  the  correspond 
ing  logarithm  is  even,  and  -  i  if  odd;  and  then 
let  us  take  the  mean  of  these  10,000  numbers.  I 
do  not  hesitate  to  say  that  the  mean  of  these 
10,000  units  is  probably  zero,  and  if  I  were  to 
calculate  it  practically,  I  would  verify  that  it  is 
extremely  small.  But  this  verification  is  needless. 
I  might  have  rigorously  proved  that  this  mean  is 
smaller  than  0.003.  To  prove  this  result  I  should 
have  had  to  make  a  rather  long  calculation  for 
which  there  is  no  room  here,  and  for  which  I 
may  refer  the  reader  to  an  article  that  I  pub 
lished  in  the  Revue  generate  des  Sciences,  April 
I5th,  1899.  The  only  point  to  which  I  wish  to 
draw  attention  is  the  following.  In  this  calcula 
tion  I  had  occasion  to  rest  my  case  on  only  two 
facts — namely,  that  the  first  and  second  derivatives 
of  the  logarithm  remain,  in  the  interval  considered, 

13 


194  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

between  certain  limits.  Hence  our  first  conclusion 
is  that  the  property  is  not  only  true  of  the 
logarithm  but  of  any  continuous  function  what 
ever,  since  the  derivatives  of  every  continuous 
function  are  limited.  If  I  was  certain  beforehand 
of  the  result,  it  is  because  I  have  often  observed 
analogous  facts  for  other  continuous  functions;  and 
next,  it  is  because  I  went  through  in  my  mind  in 
a  more  or  less  unconscious  and  imperfect  manner 
the  reasoning  which  led  me  to  the  preceding  in 
equalities,  just  as  a  skilled  calculator  before  finish 
ing  his  multiplication  takes  into  account  what  it 
ought  to  come  to  approximately.  And  besides, 
since  what  I  call  my  intuition  was  only  an  incom 
plete  summary  of  a  piece  of  true  reasoning,  it  is 
clear  that  observation  has  confirmed  my  predic 
tions,  and  that  the  objective  and  subjective  proba 
bilities  are  in  agreement.  As  a  third  example  I  shall 
choose  the  following: — The  number  u  is  taken  at 
random  and  n  is  a  given  very  large  integer.  What 
is  the  mean  value  of  sin  mi  ?  This  problem  has 
no  meaning  by  itself.  To  give  it  one,  a  convention 
is  required — namely,  we  agree  that  the  probability 
for  the  number  u  to  lie  between  a  and  a  +  da  is 
<j>(a)da;  that  it  is  therefore  proportional  to  the 
infinitely  small  interval  da,  and  is  equal  to  this 
multiplied  by  a  function  </>(/i),  only  depending 
on  a.  As  for  this  function  I  choose  it  arbitrarily, 
but  I  must  assume  it  to  be  continuous.  The  value 
of  sin  nu  remaining  the  same  when  u  increases  by 
2  TT,  I  may  without  loss  of  generality  assume  that 


THE    CALCULUS    OF    PROBABILITIES.  195 

u  lies  between  o  and  2  TT,  and  I  shall  thus  be 
led  to  suppose  that  <f>(a)  is  a  periodic  function 
whose  period  is  2  TT.  The  mean  value  that  we 
seek  is  readily  expressed  by  a  simple  integral, 
and  it  is  easy  to  show  that  this  integral  is  smaller 

than  —^,  MK  being  the  maximum  value  of  the 

Kth  derivative  of  (f>(u).  We  see  then  that  if  the 
Kth  derivative  is  finite,  our  mean  value  will 
tend  towards  zero  when  n  increases  indefinitely, 

and    that    more    rapidly    than      -— .      The    mean 
r       j  w>-i 

value  of  sin  nu  when  n  is  very  large  is  therefore 
zero.  To  define  this  value  I  required  a  conven 
tion,  but  the  result  remains  the  same  whatever 
that  convention  may  be.  I  have  imposed  upon 
myself  but  slight  restrictions  when  I  assumed  that 
the  function  (j>(a)  is  continuous  and  periodic,  and 
these  hypotheses  are  so  natural  that  we  may  ask 
ourselves  how  they  can  be  escaped.  Examination 
of  the  three  preceding  examples,  so  different  in  all 
respects,  has  already  given  us  a  glimpse  on  the 
one  hand  of  the  role  of  what  philosophers  call  the 
principle  of  sufficient  reason,  and  on  the  other  hand 
of  the  importance  of  the  fact  that  certain  pro 
perties  are  common  to  all  continuous  functions. 
The  study  of  probability  in  the  physical  sciences 
will  lead  us  to  the  same  result. 

III.  Probability  in  the  Physical  Sciences. — We 
now  come  to  the  problems  which  are  connected 
with  what  I  have  called  the  second  degree  of 


ig6  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

ignorance — namely,  those  in  which  we  know  the 
law  but  do  not  know  the  initial  state  of  the 
system.  I  could  multiply  examples,  but  I  shall 
take  only  one.  What  is  the  probable  present 
distribution  of  the  minor  planets  on  the  zodiac  ? 
We  know  they  obey  the  laws  of  Kepler.  We  may 
even,  without  changing  the  nature  of  the  problem, 
suppose  that  their  orbits  are  circular  and  situated 
in  the  same  plane,  a  plane  which  we  are  given. 
On  the  other  hand,  we  know  absolutely  nothing 
about  their  initial  distribution.  However,  we  do 
not  hesitate  to  affirm  that  this  distribution  is  now 
nearly  uniform.  Why?  Let  b  be  the  longitude 
of  a  minor  planet  in  the  initial  epoch — that  is  to 
say,  the  epoch  zero.  Let  a  be  its  mean  motion. 
Its  longitude  at  the  present  time — i.e.,  at  the  time 
/  will  be  at  +  b.  To  say  that  the  present  distribu 
tion  is  uniform  is  to  say  that  the  mean  value  of 
the  sines  and  cosines  of  multiples  of  at  +  b  is  zero. 
Why  do  we  assert  this  ?  Let  us  represent  our 
minor  planet  by  a  point  in  a  plane — namely,  the 
point  whose  co-ordinates  are  a  and  b.  All  these 
representative  points  will  be  contained  in  a  certain 
region  of  the  plane,  but  as  they  are  very  numerous 
this  region  will  appear  dotted  with  points.  We 
know  nothing  else  about  the  distribution  of  the 
points.  Now  what  do  we  do  when  we  apply  the 
calculus  of  probabilities  to  such  a  question  as 
this  ?  What  is  the  probability  that  one  or  more 
representative  points  may  be  found  in  a  certain 
portion  of  the  plane  ?  In  our  ignorance  we  are 


THE    CALCULUS   OF   PROBABILITIES.  IQ7 

compelled  to  make  an  arbitrary  hypothesis.  To 
explain  the  nature  of  this  hypothesis  I  may  be 
allowed  to  use,  instead  of  a  mathematical  formula, 
a  crude  but  concrete  image.  Let  us  suppose 
that  over  the  surface  of  our  plane  has  been 
spread  imaginary  matter,  the  density  of  which  is 
variable,  but  varies  continuously.  We  shall  then 
agree  to  say  that  the  probable  number  of  repre 
sentative  points  to  be  found  on  a  certain  portion 
of  the  plane  is  proportional  to  the  quantity  of 
this  imaginary  matter  which  is  found  there.  If 
there  are,  then,  two  regions  of  the  plane  of  the 
same  extent,  the  probabilities  that  a  representative 
point  of  one  of  our  minor  planets  is  in  one  or 
other  of  these  regions  will  be  as  the  mean  densities 
of  the  imaginary  matter  in  one  or  other  of  the 
regions.  Here  then  are  two  distributions,  one 
real,  in  which  the  representative  points  are  very 
numerous,  very  close  together,  but  discrete  like  the 
molecules  of  matter  in  the  atomic  hypothesis;  the 
other  remote  from  reality,  in  which  our  representa 
tive  points  are  replaced  by  imaginary  continuous 
matter.  We  know  that  the  latter  cannot  be  real, 
but  we  are  forced  to  adopt  it  through  our  ignorance. 
If,  again,  we  had  some  idea  of  the  real  distribution 
of  the  representative  points,  we  could  arrange  it  so 
that  in  a  region  of  some  extent  the  density  of  this 
imaginary  continuous  matter  may  be  nearly  pro 
portional  to  the  number  of  representative  points, 
or,  if  it  is  preferred,  to  the  number  of  atoms  which 
are  contained  in  that  region.  Even  that  is  im- 


ig8  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

possible,  and  our  ignorance  is  so  great  that  we  are 
forced  to  choose  arbitrarily  the  function  which 
defines  the  density  of  our  imaginary  matter.  We 
shall  be  compelled  to  adopt  a  hypothesis  from 
which  we  can  hardly  get  away ;  we  shall  sup 
pose  that  this  function  is  continuous.  That  is 
sufficient,  as  we  shall  see,  to  enable  us  to  reach  our 
conclusion. 

What  is  at  the  instant  t  the  probable  distribu 
tion  of  the  minor  planets — or  rather,  what  is  the 
mean  value  of  the  sine  of  the  longitude  at  the 
moment  t — i.e.,  of  sin  (at  +  b)?  We  made  at  the 
outset  an  arbitrary  convention,  but  if  we  adopt  it, 
this  probable  value  is  entirely  defined.  Let  us 
decompose  the  plane  into  elements  of  surface. 
Consider  the  value  of  sin  (at  +  b)  at  the  centre  of 
each  of  these  elements.  Multiply  this  value  by  the 
surface  of  the  element  and  by  the  corresponding 
density  of  the  imaginary  matter.  Let  us  then  take 
the  sum  for  all  the  elements  of  the  plane.  This 
sum,  by  definition,  will  be  the  probable  mean 
value  we  seek,  which  will  thus  be  expressed  by  a 
double  integral.  It  may  be  thought  at  first  that 
this  mean  value  depends  on  the  choice  of  the 
function  <£  which  defines  the  density  of  the  imagin 
ary  matter,  and  as  this  function  </>  is  arbitrary,  we 
can,  according  to  the  arbitrary  choice  which  we 
make,  obtain  a  certain  mean  value.  But  this  is 
not  the  case.  A  simple  calculation  shows  us  that 
our  double  integral  decreases  very  rapidly  as  t 
increases.  Thus,  I  cannot  tell  what  hypothesis  to 


THE    CALCULUS    OF    PROBABILITIES. 

make  as  to  the  probability  of  this  or  that  initial 
distribution,  but  when  once  the  hypothesis  is 
made  the  result  will  be  the  same,  and  this  gets 
me  out  of  my  difficulty.  Whatever  the  function 
</>  may  be,  the  mean  value  tends  towards  zero 
as  t  increases,  and  as  the  minor  planets  have 
certainly  accomplished  a  very  large  number  of 
revolutions,  I  may  assert  that  this  mean  value  is 
very  small.  I  may  give  to  </>  any  value  I  choose, 
with  one  restriction :  this  function  must  be  con 
tinuous;  and,  in  fact,  from  the  point  of  view  of 
subjective  probability,  the  choice  of  a  discontinuous 
function  would  have  been  unreasonable.  What 
reason  could  I  have,  for  instance,  for  supposing 
that  the  initial  longitude  might  be  exactly  o°,  but 
that  it  could  not  lie  between  o°  and  i°  ? 

The  difficulty  reappears  if  we  look  at  it  from  the 
point  of  view  of  objective  probability;  if  we  pass 
from  our  imaginary  distribution  in  which  the  sup 
posititious  matter  was  assumed  to  be  continuous, 
to  the  real  distribution  in  which  our  representative 
points  are  formed  as  discrete  atoms.  The  mean 
value  of  sin  (at  +  b)  will  be  represented  quite 
simply  by 

\    £    sin  (at  +  b), 

n  being  the  number  of  minor  planets.  Instead  of 
a  double  integral  referring  to  a  continuous 
function,  we  shall  have  a  sum  of  discrete  terms. 
However,  no  one  will  seriously  doubt  that  this 
mean  value  is  practically  very  small.  Our  repre- 


200  SCIENCE   AND   HYPOTHESIS. 

sentative  points  being  very  close  together,  our 
discrete  sum  will  in  general  differ  very  little  from 
an  integral.  An  integral  is  the  limit  towards 
which  a  sum  of  terms  tends  when  the  number  of 
these  terms  is  indefinitely  increased.  If  the  terms 
are  very  numerous,  the  sum  will  differ  very  little 
from  its  limit — that  is  to  say,  from  the  integral, 
and  what  I  said  of  the  latter  will  still  be  true  of 
the  sum  itself.  But  there  are  exceptions.  If,  for 

instance,  for  all  the  minor  planets  b  =  -  -at,  the 
longitude  of  all  the  planets  at  the  time  t  would  be 
— ,  and  the  mean  value  in  question  would  be 

evidently  unity.  For  this  to  be  the  case  at  the 
time  o,  the  minor  planets  must  have  all  been 
lying  on  a  kind  of  spiral  of  peculiar  form,  with 
its  spires  very  close  together.  All  will  admit  that 
such  an  initial  distribution  is  extremely  im 
probable  (and  even  if  it  were  realised,  the  distribu 
tion  would  not  be  uniform  at  the  present  time — for 
example,  on  the  ist  January  1900 ;  but  it  would 
become  so  a  few  years  later).  Why,  then,  do  we 
think  this  initial  distribution  improbable  ?  This 
must  be  explained,  for  if  we  are  wrong  in  rejecting 
as  improbable  this  absurd  hypothesis,  our  inquiry 
breaks  down,  and  we  can  no  longer  affirm  any 
thing  on  the  subject  of  the  probability  of  this  or 
that  present  distribution.  Once  more  we  shall 
invoke  the  principle  of  sufficient  reason,  to  which 
we  must  always  recur.  We  might  admit  that  at 
the  beginning  the  planets  were  distributed  almost 


THE    CALCULUS   OF   PROBABILITIES.  201 

in  a  straight  line.  We  might  admit  that  they 
were  irregularly  distributed.  But  it  seems  to  us 
that  there  is  no  sufficient  reason  for  the  unknown 
cause  that  gave  them  birth  to  have  acted  along  a 
curve  so  regular  and  yet  so  complicated,  which 
would  appear  to  have  been  expressly  chosen  so 
that  the  distribution  at  the  present  day  would  not 
be  uniform. 

IV.  Rouge  ct  Noir. — The  questions  raised  by 
games  of  chance,  such  as  roulette,  are,  funda 
mentally,  quite  analogous  to  those  we  have  just 
treated.  For  example,  a  wheel  is  divided  into  thirty- 
seven  equal  compartments,  alternately  red  and 
black.  A  ball  is  spun  round  the  wheel,  and  after 
having  moved  round  a  number  of  times,  it  stops  in 
front  of  one  of  these  sub-divisions.  The  probability 
that  the  division  is  red  is  obviously  ^.  The  needle 
describes  an  angle  0,  including  several  complete 
revolutions.  I  do  not  know  what  is  the  prob 
ability  that  the  ball  is  spun  with  such  a  force  that 
this  angle  should  lie  between  0  and  &  +  (!&,  but  I 
can  make  a  convention.  I  can  suppose  that  this 
probability  is  <j>(6)dQ.  As  for  the  function  </>(#),  I 
can  choose  it  in  an  entirely  arbitrary  manner.  I 
have  nothing  to  guide  me  in  my  choice,  but  I  am 
naturally  induced  to  suppose  the  function  to  be 
continuous.  Let  e  be  a  length  (measured  on  the 
circumference  of  the  circle  of  radius  unity)  of  each 
red  and  black  compartment.  We  have  to  calcu 
late  the  integral  of  ^(0)dB,  extending  it  on  the  one 
hand  to  all  the  red,  and  on  the  other  hand  to  all  • 


202  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

the  black  compartments,  and  to  compare  the 
results.  Consider  an  interval  2  e  comprising  two 
consecutive  red  and  black  compartments.  Let 
M  and  in  be  the  maximum  and  minimum  values  of 
the  function  </>(#)  in  this  interval.  The  integral 
extended  to  the  red  compartments  will  be  smaller 
than  Z  Me;  extended  to  the  black  it  will  be  greater 
than  Z  inc.  The  difference  will  therefore  be 
smaller  than  21  (M  -  m)  e .  But  if  the  function  4>  is 
supposed  continuous,  and  if  on  the  other  hand  the 
interval  c  is  very  small  with  respect  to  the  total 
angle  described  by  the  needle,  the  difference  M  -m 
will  be  very  small.  The  difference  of  the  two 
integrals  will  be  therefore  very  small,  and  the 
probability  will  be  very  nearly  J.  We  see  that 
without  knowing  anything  of  the  function  <f>  we 
must  act  as  if  the  probability  were  J.  And  on 
the  other  hand  it  explains  why,  from  the 
objective  point  of  view,  if  I  watch  a  certain 
number  of  coups,  observation  will  give  me  almost 
as  many  black  coups  as  red.  All  the  players 
know  this  objective  law;  but  it  leads  them  into  a 
remarkable  error,  which  has  often  been  exposed, 
but  into  which  they  are  always  falling.  When 
the  red  has  won,  for  example,  six  times  running, 
they  bet  on  black,  thinking  that  they  are  playing 
an  absolutely  safe  game,  because  they  say  it  is 
a  very  rare  thing  for  the  red  to  win  seven  times 
running.  In  reality  their  probability  of  winning 
is  still  ^.  Observation  shows,  it  is  true,  that 
the  series  of  seven  consecutive  reds  is  very  rare, 


THE    CALCULUS   OF    PROBABILITIES.  203 

but  series  of  six  reds  followed  by  a  black  are 
also  very  rare.  They  have  noticed  the  rarity  of 
the  series  of  seven  reds;  if  they  have  not  remarked 
the  rarity  of  six  reds  and  a  black,  it  is  only 
because  such  series  strike  the  attention  less. 

V.  The  Probability  of  Causes.- — We  now  come  to 
the  problems  of  the  probability  of  causes,  the 
most  important  from  the  point  of  view  of 
scientific  applications.  Two  stars,  for  instance, 
are  very  close  together  on  the  celestial  sphere.  Is 
this  apparent  contiguity  a  mere  effect  of  chance  ? 
Are  these  stars,  although  almost  on  the  same 
visual  ray,  situated  at  very  different  distances 
from  the  earth,  and  therefore  very  far  indeed  from 
one  another  ?  or  does  the  apparent  correspond 
to  a  real  contiguity  ?  This  is  a  problem  on  the 
probability  of  causes. 

First  of  all,  I  recall  that  at  the  outset  of  all 
problems  of  probability  of  effects  that  have 
occupied  our  attention  up  to  now,  we  have  had 
to  use  a  convention  which  was  more  or  less 
justified;  and  if  in  most  cases  the  result  was  to 
a  certain  extent  independent  of  this  convention, 
it  was  only  the  condition  of  certain  hypotheses 
which  enabled  us  a  priori  to  reject  discontinuous 
functions,  'for  example,  or  certain  absurd  con 
ventions.  We  shall  again  find  something 
analogous  to  this  when  we  deal  with  the  prob 
ability  of  causes.  An  effect  may  be  produced 
by  the  cause  a  or  by  the  cause  b.  The  effect 
has  just  been  observed.  We  ask  the  probability 


204  SCIENCE   AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

that  it  is  due  to  the  cause  a.  This  is  an  a 
posteriori  probability  of  cause.  But  I  could  not 
calculate  it,  if  a  convention  more  or  less  justified 
did  not  tell  me  in  advance  what  is  the  a  priori 
probability  for  the  cause  a  to  come  into  play — 
I  mean  the  probability  of  this  event  to  some  one 
who  had  not  observed  the  effect.  To  make  my 
meaning  clearer,  I  go  back  to  the  game  of  ecarte 
mentioned  before.  My  adversary  deals  for  the 
first  time  and  turns  up  a  king.  What  is  the 
probability  that  he  is  a  sharper  ?  The  formulae 
ordinarily  taught  give  -J,  a  result  which  is 
obviously  rather  surprising.  If  we  look  at  it 
closer,  we  see  that  the  conclusion  is  arrived  at 
as  if,  before  sitting  down  at  the  table,  I  had 
considered  that  there  was  one  chance  in  two 
that  my  adversary  was  not  honest.  An  absurd 
hypothesis,  because  in  that  case  I  should  certainly 
not  have  played  with  him ;  and  this  explains  the 
absurdity  of  the  conclusion.  The  function  on 
the  a  priori  probability  was  unjustified,  and  that 
is  why  the  conclusion  of  the  a  posteriori  probability 
led  me  into  an  inadmissible  result.  The  import 
ance  of  this  preliminary  convention  is  obvious. 
I  shall  even  add  that  if  none  were  made,  the 
problem  of  the  a  posteriori  probability  would  have 
no  meaning.  It  -must  be  always  made  either 
explicitly  or  tacitly. 

Let  us  pass  on  to  an  example  of  a  more 
scientific  character.  I  require  to  determine  an 
experimental  law;  this  law,  when  discovered,  can 


THE    CALCULUS    OF    PROBABILITIES.  205 

be  represented  by  a  curve.  I  make  a  certain 
number  of  isolated  observations,  each  of  which 
may  be  represented  by  a  point.  When  I  have 
obtained  these  different  points,  I  draw  a  curve 
between  them  as  carefully  as  possible,  giving 
my  curve  a  regular  form,  avoiding  sharp  angles, 
accentuated  inflexions,  and  any  sudden  variation 
of  the  radius  of  curvature.  This  curve  will  repre 
sent  to  me  the  probable  law,  and  not  only  will 
it  give  me  the  values  of  the  functions  intermediary 
to  those  which  have  been  observed,  but  it  also 
gives  me  the  observed  values  more  accurately 
than  direct  observation  does;  that  is  why  I  make 
the  curve  pass  near  the  points  and  not  through 
the  points  themselves. 

Here,  then,  is  a  problem  in  the  probability  of 
causes.  The  effects  are  the  measurements  I  have 
recorded;  they  depend  on  the  combination  of  twro 
causes — the  true  law  of  the  phenomenon  and  errors 
of  observation.  Knowing  the  effects,  we  have  to 
find  the  probability  that  the  phenomenon  shall 
obey  this  law  or  that,  and  that  the  observations 
have  been  accompanied  by  this  or  that  error. 
The  most  probable  law,  therefore,  corresponds  to 
the  curve  we  have  traced,  and  the  most  probable 
error  is  represented  by  the  distance  of  the  cor 
responding  point  from  that  curve.  But  the 
problem  has  no  meaning  if  before  the  observa 
tions  I  had  an  a  priori  idea  of  the  probability  of 
this  law  or  that,  or  of  the  chances  of  error  to 
which  I  am  exposed.  If  my  instruments  are 


206  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

good  (and  I  knew  whether  this  is  so  or  not  before 
beginning  the  observations),  I  shall  not  draw  the 
curve  far  from  the  points  which  represent  the 
rough  measurements.  If  they  are  inferior,  I  may 
draw  it  a  little  farther  from  the  points,  so  that  I 
may  get  a  less  sinuous  curve;  much  will  be  sacri 
ficed  to  regularity. 

Why,  then,  do  I  draw  a  curve  without  sinu 
osities  ?  Because  I  consider  a  priori  a  law 
represented  by  a  continuous  function  (or  function 
the  derivatives  of  which  to  a  high  order  are  small), 
as  more  probable  than  a  law  not  satisfying  those 
conditions.  But  for  this  conviction  the  problem 
would  have  no  meaning ;  interpolation  would  be 
impossible;  no  law  could  be  deduced  from  a 
finite  number  of  observations ;  science  would 
cease  to  exist. 

Fifty  years  ago  physicists  considered,  other 
things  being  equal,  a  simple  law  as  more  probable 
than  a  complicated  law.  This  principle  was  even 
invoked  in  favour  of  Mariotte's  law  as  against 
that  of  Regnault.  But  this  belief  is  now 
repudiated ;  and  yet,  how  many  times  are  we 
compelled  to  act  as  though  we  still  held  it! 
However  that  may  be,  what  remains  of  this 
tendency  is  the  belief  in  continuity,  and  as  we 
have  just  seen,  if  the  belief  in  continuity  were 
to  disappear,  experimental  science  would  become 
impossible. 

VI.  The  Theory  of  Errors. — We  are  thus  brought 
to  consider  the  theory  of  errors  which  is  directly 


THE    CALCULUS    OF    PROBABILITIES.  207 

connected  with  the  problem  of  the  probability 
of  causes.  Here  again  we  find  effects — to  wit, 
a  certain  number  of  irreconcilable  observations, 
and  we  try  to  find  the  causes  which  are,  on  the 
one  hand,  the  true  value  of  the  quantity  to  be 
measured,  and,  on  the  other,  the  error  made  in 
each  isolated  observation.  We  must  calculate 
the  probable  a  posteriori  value  of  each  error,  and 
therefore  the  probable  value  of  the  quantity  to  be 
measured.  But,  as  I  have  just  explained,  we 
cannot  undertake  this  calculation  unless  we  admit 
a  priori — i.e.,  before  any  observations  are  made — 
that  there  is  a  law  of  the  probability  of  errors. 
Is  there  a  law  of  errors  ?  The  law  to  which 
all  calculators  assent  is  Gauss's  law,  that  is 
represented  by  a  certain  transcendental  curve 
known  as  the  "  bell." 

But  it  is  first  of  all  necessary  to  recall 
the  classic  distinction  between  systematic  and 
accidental  errors.  If  the  metre  with  which  we 
measure  a  length  is  too  long,  the  number  we  get 
will  be  too  small,  and  it  will  be  no  use  to  measure 
several  times — that  is  a  systematic  error.  If  we 
measure  with  an  accurate  metre,  we  may  make  a 
mistake,  and  find  the  length  sometimes  too  large 
and  sometimes  too  small,  and  when  we  take  the 
mean  of  a  large  number  of  measurements, 
the  error  will  tend  to  grow  small.  These  are 
accidental  errors. 

It  is  clear  that  systematic  errors  do  not  satisfy 
Gauss's  law,  but  do  accidental  errors  satisfy  it  ? 


208  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

Numerous  proofs  have  been  attempted,  almost  all 
of  them  crude  paralogisms.  But  starting  from 
the  following  hypotheses  we  may  prove  Gauss's 
law :  the  error  is  the  result  of  a  very  large  number 
of  partial  and  independent  errors ;  each  partial 
error  is  very  small  and  obeys  any  law  of  prob 
ability  whatever,  provided  the  probability  of  a 
positive  error  is  the  same  as  that  of  an  equal 
negative  error.  It  is  clear  that  these  conditions 
will  be  often,  but  not  always,  fulfilled,  and  we 
may  reserve  the  name  of  accidental  for  errors 
which  satisfy  them. 

We  see  that  the  method  of  least  squares  is  not 
legitimate  in  every  case ;  in  general,  physicists 
are  more  distrustful  of  it  than  astronomers.  This 
is  no  doubt  because  the  latter,  apart  from  the 
systematic  errors  to  which  they  and  the  physicists 
are  subject  alike,  have  to  contend  with  an 
extremely  important  source  of  error  which  is 
entirely  accidental — I  mean  atmospheric  undula 
tions.  So  it  is  very  curious  to  hear  a  discussion 
between  a  physicist  and  an  astronomer  about  a 
method  of  observation.  The  physicist,  persuaded 
that  one  good  measurement  is  wrorth  more  than 
many  bad  ones,  is  pre-eminently  concerned  with 
the  elimination  by  means  of  every  precaution  of 
the  final  systematic  errors;  the  astronomer  retorts : 
"  But  you  can  only  observe  a  small  number  of  stars, 
and  accidental  errors  will  not  disappear." 

What  conclusion  must  we  draw7  ?  Must  we 
continue  to  use  the  method  of  least  squares  ? 


THE    CALCULUS    OF    PROBABILITIES.  20Q 

We  must  distinguish.  We  have  eliminated  all 
the  systematic  errors  of  which  we  have  any 
suspicion ;  we  are  quite  certain  that  there  are 
others  still,  but  we  cannot  detect  them ;  and  yet 
we  must  make  up  our  minds  and  adopt  a  definitive 
value  which  will  be  regarded  as  the  probable 
value ;  and  for  that  purpose  it  is  clear  that  the 
best  thing  we  can  do  is  to  apply  Gauss's  law. 
We  have  only  applied  a  practical  rule  referring 
to  subjective  probability.  And  there  is  no  more 
to  be  said. 

Yet  we  want  to  go  farther  and  say  that  not 
only  the  probable  value  is  so  much,  but  that  the 
probable  error  in  the  result  is  so  much.  This 
is  absolutely  invalid :  it  would  be  true  only  if 
we  were  sure  that  all  the  systematic  errors 
were  eliminated,  and  of  that  we  know  absolutely 
nothing.  We  have  two  series  of  observations;  by 
applying  the  law  of  least  squares  we  find  that  the 
probable  error  in  the  first  series  is  twice  as  small 
as  in  the  second.  The  second  series  may,  how 
ever,  be  more  accurate  than  the  first,  because  the 
first  is  perhaps  affected  by  a  large  systematic 
error.  All  that  we  can  say  is,  that  the  first  series 
is  probably  better  than  the  second  because  its 
accidental  error  is  smaller,  and  that  we  have  no 
reason  for  affirming  that  the  systematic  error  is 
greater  for  one  of  the  series  than  for  the  other, 
our  ignorance  on  this  point  being  absolute. 

VII.  Conclusions. — In  the  preceding  lines  I  have 
set  several  problems,  and  have  given  no  solution. 

14 


2IO  SCIENCE   AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

I  do  not  regret  this,  for  perhaps  they  will  invite 
the  reader  to  reflect  on  these  delicate  questions. 

However  that  may  be,  there  are  certain  points 
which  seem  to  be  well  established.  To  undertake 
the  calculation  of  any  probability,  and  even  for 
that  calculation  to  have  any  meaning  at  all,  we 
must  admit,  as  a  point  of  departure,  an  hypothesis 
or  convention  which  has  always  something 
arbitrary  about  it.  In  the  choice  of  this  con 
vention  we  can  be  guided  only  by  the  principle 
of  sufficient  reason.  Unfortunately,  this  principle 
is  very  vague  and  very  elastic,  and  in  the  cursory 
examination  we  have  just  made  we  have  seen  it 
assume  different  forms.  The  form  under  which 
we  meet  it  most  often  is  the  belief  in  continuity, 
a  belief  which  it  would  be  difficult  to  justify  by 
apodeictic  reasoning,  but  without  which  all  science 
would  be  impossible.  Finally,  the  problems  to 
which  the  calculus  of  probabilities  may  be  applied 
with  profit  are  those  in  which  the  result  is  inde 
pendent  of  the  hypothesis  made  at  the  outset, 
provided  only  that  this  hypothesis  satisfies  the 
condition  of  continuity. 


CHAPTER  XII.1 

OPTICS    AND    ELECTRICITY. 

FresneVs  Theory. — The  best  example  that  can  be 
chosen  is  the  theory  of  light  and  its  relations 
to  the  theory  of  electricity.  It  is  owing  to  Fresnel 
that  the  science  of  optics  is  more  advanced  than 
any  other  branch  of  physics.  The  theory  called  the 
theory  of  undulations  forms  a  complete  whole, 
which  is  satisfying  to  the  mind ;  but  we  must 
not  ask  from  it  what  it  cannot  give  us.  The 
object  of  mathematical  theories  is  not  to  reveal 
to  us  the  real  nature  of  things;  that  would  be 
an  unreasonable  claim.  Their  only  object  is  to 
co-ordinate  the  physical  laws  with  which  physical 
experiment  makes  us  acquainted,  the  enunciation 
of  which,  without  the  aid  of  mathematics,  we 
should  be  unable  to  effect.  Whether  the  ether 
exists  or  not  matters  little — let  us  leave  that  to 
the  metaphysicians;  what  is  essential  for  us  is,  that 
everything  happens  as  if  it  existed,  and  that  this 
hypothesis  is  found  to  be  suitable  for  the  explana 
tion  of  phenomena.  After  all,  have  we  any  other 

1  This  chapter  is  mainly  taken  from  the  prefaces  of  two  of  my 
books^—  Theorie  Mathematique  de  la  lumiere  (Paris:  Naud,  1889), 
and  Electricite  et  Optique  (Paris:  Naud,  1901). 


212  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

reason  for  believing  in  the  existence  of  material 
objects?  That,  too,  is  only  a  convenient  hypothesis ; 
only,  it  will  never  cease  to  be  so,  while  some  day, 
no  doubt,  the  ether  will  be  thrown  aside  as  useless. 

But  at  the  present  moment  the  laws  of  optics, 
and  the  equations  which  translate  them  into  the 
language  of  analysis,  hold  good — at  least  as  a  first 
approximation.  It  will  therefore  be  always  useful 
to  study  a  theory  which  brings  these  equations 
into  connection. 

The  undulatory  theory  is  based  on  a  molecular 
hypothesis ;  this  is  an  advantage  to  those  who 
think  they  can  discover  the  cause  under  the  law. 
But  others  find  in  it  a  reason  for  distrust ;  and 
this  distrust  seems  to  me  as  unfounded  as  the 
illusions  of  the  former.  These  hypotheses  play 
but  a  secondary  role.  They  may  be  sacrificed, 
and  the  sole  reason  why  this  is  not  generally  done 
is,  that  it  would  involve  a  certain  loss  of  lucidity 
in  the  explanation.  In  fact,  if  we  look  at  it  a 
little  closer  we  shall  see  that  we  borrow  from 
molecular  hypotheses  but  two  things — the  principle 
of  the  conservation  of  energy,  and  the  linear  form 
of  the  equations,  which  is  the  general  law  of  small 
movements  as  of  all  small  variations.  This  ex 
plains  why  most  of  the  conclusions  of  Fresnel 
remain  unchanged  when  we  adopt  the  electro 
magnetic  theory  of  light. 

Maxwell's  Theory. — We  all  know  that  it  was 
Maxwell  who  connected  by  a  slender  tie  two 
branches  of  physics — optics  and  electricity — until 


OPTICS    AND    ELECTRICITY.  213 

then  unsuspected  of  having  anything  in  common. 
Thus  blended  in  a  larger  aggregate,  in  a  higher 
harmony,  Fresnel's  theory  of  optics  did  not  perish. 
Parts  of  it  are  yet  alive,  and  their  mutual  relations 
are  still  the  same.  Only,  the  language  which  we 
use  to  express  them  has  changed ;  and,  on  the 
other  hand,  Maxwell  has  revealed  to  us  other 
relations,  hitherto  unsuspected,  between  the 
different  branches  of  optics  and  the  domain  of 
electricity. 

The  first  time  a  French  reader  opens  Maxwell's 
book,  his  admiration  is  tempered  with  a  feeling  of 
uneasiness,  and  often  of  distrust. 

It  is  only  after  prolonged  study,  and  at  the  cost 
of  much  effort,  that  this  feeling  disappears.  Some 
minds  of  high  calibre  never  lose  this  feeling.  Why 
is  it  so  difficult  for  the  ideas  of  this  English 
scientist  to  become  acclimatised  among  us?  No 
doubt  the  education  received  by  most  enlightened 
Frenchmen  predisposes  them  to  appreciate  pre 
cision  and  logic  more  than  any  other  qualities. 
In  this  respect  the  old  theories  of  mathematical 
physics  gave  us  complete  satisfaction.  All  our 
masters,  from  Laplace  to  Cauchy,  proceeded  along 
the  same  lines.  Starting  with  clearly  enunciated 
hypotheses,  they  deduced  from  them  all  their 
consequences  with  mathematical  rigour,  and  then 
compared  them  with  experiment.  It  seemed  to 
be  their  aim  to  give  to  each  of  the  branches 
of  physics  the  same  precision  as  to  celestial 
mechanics. 


214  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

A  mind  accustomed  to  admire  such  models  is 
not  easily  satisfied  with  a  theory.  Not  only  will 
it  not  tolerate  the  least  appearance  of  contradic 
tion,  but  it  will  expect  the  different  parts  to  be 
logically  connected  with  one  another,  and  will 
require  the  number  of  hypotheses  to  be  reduced 
to  a  minimum. 

This  is  not  all ;  there  will  be  other  demands 
which  appear  to  me  to  be  less  reasonable.  Behind 
the  matter  of  which  our  senses  are  aware,  and 
which  is  made  known  to  us  by  experiment,  such 
a  thinker  will  expect  to  see  another  kind  of  matter 
—the  only  true  matter  in  its  opinion — which  will 
no  longer  have  anything  but  purely  geometrical 
qualities,  and  the  atoms  of  which  will  be  mathe 
matical  points  subject  to  the  laws  of  dynamics 
alone.  And  yet  he  will  try  to  represent  to 
himself,  by  an  unconscious  contradiction,  these 
invisible  and  colourless  atoms,  and  therefore 
to  bring  them  as  close  as  possible  to  ordinary 
matter. 

Then  only  will  he  be  thoroughly  satisfied,  and 
he  will  then  imagine  that  he  has  penetrated  the 
secret  of  the  universe.  Even  if  the  satisfaction  is 
fallacious,  it  is  none  the  less  difficult  to  give  it  up. 
Thus,  on  opening  the  pages  of  Maxwell,  a  French 
man  expects  to  find  a  theoretical  whole,  as  logical 
and  as  precise  as  the  physical  optics  that  is  founded 
on  the  hypothesis  of  the  ether.  He  is  thus  pre 
paring  for  himself  a  disappointment  which  I 
should  like  the  reader  to  avoid ;  so  I  will  warn 


OPTICS   AND    ELECTRICITY.  215 

him  at  once  of  what  he  will  find  and  what  he  will 
not  find  in  Maxwell. 

Maxwell  does  not  give  a  mechanical  explanation 
of  electricity  and  magnetism  ;  he  confines  himself 
to  showing  that  such  an  explanation  is  possible, 
He  shows  that  the  phenomena  of  optics  are  only 
a  particular  case  of  electro-magnetic  phenomena. 
From  the  whole  theory  of  electricity  a  theory  of 
light  can  be  immediately  deduced.  Unfortunately 
the  converse  is  not  true ;  it  is  not  always  easy  to 
find  a  complete. explanation  of  electrical  pheno 
mena.  In  particular  it  is  not  easy  if  we  take 
as  our  starting-point  Fresnel's  theory;  to  do  so, 
no  doubt,  would  be  impossible;  but  none  the  less 
we  must  ask  ourselves  if  we  are  compelled  to 
surrender  admirable  results  which  we  thought  we 
had  definitively  acquired.  That  seems  a  step 
backwards,  and  many  sound  intellects  will  not 
willingly  allow  of  this. 

Should  the  reader  consent  to  set  some  bounds 
to  his  hopes,  he  will  still  come  across  other 
difficulties.  The  English  scientist  does  not  try 
to  erect  a  unique,  definitive,  and  well-arranged 
building;  he  seems  to  raise  rather  a  large  number 
of  provisional  and  independent  constructions, 
between  which  communication  is  difficult  and 
sometimes  impossible.  Take,  for  instance,  the 
chapter  in  which  electrostatic  attractions  are 
explained  by  the  pressures  and  tensions  of  the 
dielectric  medium.  This  chapter  might  be  sup 
pressed  without  the  rest  of  the  book  being 


2l6  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

thereby  less  clear  or  less  complete,  and  yet 
it  contains  a  theory  which  is  self-sufficient,  and 
which  can  be  understood  without  reading  a 
word  of  what  precedes  or  follows.  But  it  is 
not  only  independent  of  the  rest  of  the  book ;  it 
is  difficult  to  reconcile  it  with  the  fundamental 
ideas  of  the  volume.  Maxwell  does  not  even 
attempt  to  reconcile  it;  he  merely  says:  "I  have 
not  been  able  to  make  the  next  step — namely,  to 
account  by  mechanical  considerations  for  these 
stresses  in  the  dielectric." 

This  example  will  be  sufficient  to  show  wrhat 
I  mean ;  I  could  quote  many  others.  Thus,  who 
would  suspect  on  reading  the  pages  devoted  to 
magnetic  rotatory  polarisation  that  there  is  an 
identity  between  optical  and  magnetic  pheno 
mena  ? 

We  must  not  flatter  ourselves  that  we  have 
avoided  every  contradiction,  but  we  ought  to 
make  up  our  minds.  Two  contradictory  theories, 
provided  that  they  are  kept  from  overlapping,  and 
that  we  do  not  look  to  find  in  them  the  explana 
tion  of  things,  may,  in  fact,  be  very  useful  instru 
ments  of  research ;  and  perhaps  the  reading  of 
Maxwell  would  be  less  suggestive  if  he  had  not 
opened  up  to  us  so  many  new  and  divergent  ways. 
But  the  fundamental  idea  is  masked,  as  it  were. 
So  far  is  this  the  case,  that  in  most  works  that  are 
popularised,  this  idea  is  the  only  point  which  is 
left  completely  untouched.  To  show  the  import 
ance  of  this,  I  think  I  ought  to  explain  in  what  this 


OPTICS    AND    ELECTRICITY.  217 

fundamental  idea  consists ;    but  for  that  purpose 
a  short  digression  is  necessary. 

The  Mechanical  Explanation  of  Physical  Phenomena. 
—In  every  physical  phenomenon  there  is  a  certain 
number  of  parameters  which  are  reached  directly 
by  experiment,  and  which  can  be  measured.  I 
shall  call  them  the  parameters  q.  Observation 
next  teaches  us  the  laws  of  the  variations  of  these 
parameters,  and  these  laws  can  be  generally  stated 
in  the  form  of  differential  equations  which  connect 
together  the  parameters  q  and  time.  What  can 
be  done  to  give  a  mechanical  interpretation  to 
such  a  phenomenon  ?  We  may  endeavour  to 
explain  it,  either  by  the  movements  of  ordinary 
matter,  or  by  those  of  one  or  more  hypothetical 
fluids.  These  fluids  will  be  considered  as  formed 
of  a  very  large  number  of  isolated  molecules  m. 
When  may  we  say  that  we  have  a  complete 
mechanical  explanation  of  the  phenomenon?  It 
will  be,  on  the  one  hand,  when  we  know  the 
differential  equations  which  are  satisfied  by  the 
co-ordinates  of  these  hypothetical  molecules  /;/, 
equations  which  must,  in  addition,  conform  to  the 
laws  of  dynamics;  and,  on  the  other  hand,  when  we 
know  the  relations  which  define  the  co-ordinates 
of  the  molecules  m  as  functions  of  the  parameters 
q,  attainable  by  experiment.  These  equations,  as 
I  have  said,  should  conform  to  the  principles  of 
dynamics,  and,  in  particular,  to  the  principle  of 
the  conservation  of  energy,  and  to  that  of  least 
action. 


2l8  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

The  first  of  these  two  principles  teaches  us  that 
the  total  energy  is  constant,  and  may  be  divided 
into  two  parts : 

(i)  Kinetic  energy,  or  vis  viva,  which  depends 
on  the  masses  of  the  hypothetical  molecules  m, 
and  on  their  velocities.  This  I  shall  call  T.  (2) 
The  potential  energy  which  depends  only  on  the 
co-ordinates  of  these  molecules,  and  this  I  shall 
call  U.  It  is  the  sum  of  the  energies  T  and  U  that 
is  constant. 

Now  what  are  we  taught  by  the  principle  of 
least  action  ?  It  teaches  us  that  to  pass  from  the 
initial  position  occupied  at  the  instant  to  to 
the  final  position  occupied  at  the  instant  tlf  the 
system  must  describe  such  a  path  that  in  the 
interval  of  time  between  the  instant  to  and  tv 
the  mean  value  of  the  action — i.e.,  the  difference 
between  the  two  energies  T  and  U,  must  be  as 
small  as  possible.  The  first  of  these  two  principles 
is,  moreover,  a  consequence  of  the  second.  If  we 
know  the  functions  T  and  U,  this  second  principle 
is  sufficient  to  determine  the  equations  of  motion. 

Among  the  paths  which  enable  us  to  pass  from 
one  position  to  another,  there  is  clearly  one  for 
which  the  mean  value  of  the  action  is  smaller  than 
for  all  the  others.  In  addition,  there  is  only^such 
path ;  and  it  follows  from  this,  that  the  principle 
of  least  action  is  sufficient  to  determine  the  path 
followed,  and  therefore  the  equations  of  motion. 
We  thus  obtain  what  are  called  the  equations  of 
Lagrange.  In  these  equations  the  independent 


OPTICS    AND    ELECTRICITY.  2IQ 

variables  are  the  co-ordinates  of  the  hypothetical 
molecules  m;  but  I  now  assume  that  we  take  for 
the  variables  the  parameters  q,  which  are  directly 
accessible  to  experiment. 

The  two  parts  of  the  energy  should  then  be 
expressed  as  a  function  of  the  parameters  q  and 
their  derivatives ;  it  is  clear  that  it  is  under  this 
form  that  they  will  appear  to  the  experimenter. 
The  latter  will  naturally  endeavour  to  define 
kinetic  and  potential  energy  by  the  aid  of 
quantities  he  can  directly  observe.1  If  this  be 
granted,  the  system  will  always  proceed  from  one 
position  to  another  by  such  a  path  that  the  mean 
value  of  the  action  is  a  minimum.  It  matters 
little  that  T  and  U  are  now  expressed  by  the  aid 
of  the  parameters  q  and  their  derivatives ;  it 
matters  little  that  it  is  also  by  the  aid  of  these 
parameters  that  we  define  the  initial  and  fina 
positions;  the  principle  of  least  action  will  always 
remain  true. 

Now  here  again,  of  the  whole  of  the  paths  which 
lead  from  one  position  to  another,  there  is  one  and 
only  one  for  which  the  mean  action  is  a  minimum. 
The  principle  of  least  action  is  therefore  sufficient 
for  the  determination  of  the  differential  equations 
which  define  the  variations  of  the  parameters  q. 
The  equations  thus  obtained  are  another  form  of 
Lagrange's  equations. 

1  We  may  add  that  U  will  depend  only  on  the  q  parameters,  that 
T  will  depend  on  them  and  their  derivatives  with  respect  to  time, 
and  will  be  a  homogeneous  polynomial  of  the  second  degree  with 
respect  to  these  derivatives. 


22O  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

To  form  these  equations  we  need  not  know  the 
relations  which  connect  the  parameters  q  with  the 
co-ordinates  of  the  hypothetical  molecules,  nor  the 
masses  of  the  molecules,  nor  the  expression  of  U 
as  a  function  of  the  co-ordinates  of  these  molecules. 
All  we  need  know  is  the  expression  of  U  as  a 
function  of  the  parameters  q,  and  that  of  T  as  a 
function  of  the  parameters  q  and  their  derivatives 
— i.e.,  the  expressions  of  the  kinetic  and  potential 
energy  in  terms  of  experimental  data. 

One  of  two  things  must  now  happen.  Either  for 
a  convenient  choice  of  T  and  U  the  Lagrangian 
equations,  constructed  as  we  have  indicated,  will 
be  identical  with  the  differential  equations  deduced 
from  experiment,  or  there  will  be  no  functions  T 
and  U  for  which  this  identity  takes  place.  In  the 
latter  case  it  is  clear  that  no  mechanical  explana 
tion  is  possible.  The  necessary  condition  for  a 
mechanical  explanation  to  be  possible  is  therefore 
this :  that  we  may  choose  the  functions  T  and  U  so 
as  to  satisfy  the  principle  of  least  action,  and  of  the 
conservation  of  energy.  Besides,  this  condition  is 
sufficient.  Suppose,  in  fact,  that  we  have  found  a 
function  U  of  the  parameters  q,  which  represents 
one  of  the  parts  of  energy,  and  that  the  part  of  the 
energy  which  we  represent  by  T  is  a  function  of 
the  parameters  q  and  their  derivatives;  that  it 
is  a  polynomial  of  the  second  degree  with  respect 
to  its  derivatives,  and  finally  that  the  Lagrangian 
equations  formed  by  the  aid  of  these  two  functions 
T  and  U  are  in  conformity  with  the  data  of  the 


OPTICS    AND    ELECTRICITY.  221 

experiment.  How  can  we  deduce  from  this  a 
mechanical  explanation  ?  U  must  be  regarded  as 
the  potential  energy  of  a  system  of  which  T  is  the 
kinetic  energy.  There  is  no  difficulty  as  far  as  U 
is  concerned,  but  can  T  be  regarded  as  the  vis  viva 
of  a  material  system  ? 

It  is  easily  shown  that  this  is  always  possible, 
and  in  an  unlimited  number  of  ways.  I  will  be 
content  with  referring  the  reader  to  the  pages  of 
the  preface  of  my  £lectricite  et  Optiqne  for  further 
details.  Thus,  if  the  principle  of  least  action 
cannot  be  satisfied,  no  mechanical  explanation  is 
possible;  if  it  can  be  satisfied,  there  is  not  only  one 
explanation,  but  an  unlimited  number,  whence  it 
follows  that  since  there  is  one  there  must  be  an 
unlimited  number. 

One  more  remark.  Among  the  quantities  that 
may  be  reached  by  experiment  directly  we  shall 
consider  some  as  the  co-ordinates  of  our  hypo 
thetical  molecules,  some  will  be  our  parameters  </, 
and  the  rest  will  be  regarded  as  dependent  not 
only  on  the  co-ordinates  but  on  the  velocities — or 
what  comes  to  the  same  thing,  we  look  on  them  as 
derivatives  of  the  parameters  q,  or  as  combinations 
of  these  parameters  and  their  derivatives. 

Here  then  a  question  occurs:  among  all  these 
quantities  measured  experimentally  which  shall  we 
choose  to  represent  the  parameters  q  ?  and  which 
shall  we  prefer  to  regard  as  the  derivatives  of  these 
parameters  ?  This  choice  remains  arbitrary  to  a 
large  extent,  but  a  mechanical  explanation  will  be 


222  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

possible  if  it  is  done  so  as  to  satisfy  the  principle  of 
least  action. 

Next,  Maxwell  asks  :  Can  this  choice  and  that  of 
the  two  energies  T  and  U  be  made  so  that  electric 
phenomena  will  satisfy  this  principle  ?  Experiment 
shows  us  that  the  energy  of  an  electro-magnetic 
iield  decomposes  into  electro-static  and  electro- 
dynamic  energy.  Maxwell  recognised  that  if  we 
regard  the  former  as  the  potential  energy  U,  and 
the  latter  as  the  kinetic  energy  T,  and  that  if  on 
the  other  hand  we  take  the  electro-static  charges 
of  the  conductors  as  the  parameters  q,  and  the  in 
tensity  of  the  currents  as  derivatives  of  other 
parameters  (/—under  these  conditions,  Maxwell 
has  recognised  that  electric  phenomena  satisfies  the 
principle  of  least  action.  He  was  then  certain  of 
a  mechanical  explanation.  If  he  had  expounded 
this  theory  at  the  beginning  of  his  first  volume, 
instead  of  relegating  it  to  a  corner  of  the  second,  it 
would  not  have  escaped  the  attention  of  most 
readers.  If  therefore  a  phenomenon  allows  of  a 
complete  mechanical  explanation,  it  allows  of  an 
unlimited  number  of  others,  which  will  equally  take 
into  account  all  the  particulars  revealed  by  experi 
ment.  And  this  is  confirmed  by  the  history  of 
every  branch  of  physics.  In  Optics,  for  instance, 
Fresnel  believed  vibration  to  be  perpendicular  to 
the  plane  of  polarisation;  Neumann  holds  that  it  is 
parallel  to  that  plane.  For  a  long  time  an  experi- 
mcntum  crucis  was  sought  for,  which  would  enable 
us  to  decide  between  these  two  theories,  but  in 


OPTICS    AND    ELECTRICITY.  223 

vain.  In  the  same  way,  without  going  out  of  the 
domain  of  electricity,  we  find  that  the  theory  of 
two  fluids  and  the  single  fluid  theory  equally 
account  in  a  satisfactory  manner  for  all  the  laws 
of  electro-statics.  All  these  facts  are  easily  ex 
plained,  thanks  to  the  properties  of  the  Lagrange 
equations. 

It  is  easy  now  to  understand  Maxwell's  funda 
mental  idea.  To  demonstrate  the  possibility  of  a 
mechanical  explanation  of  electricity  we  need  not 
trouble  to  find  the  explanation  itself;  we  need  only 
know  the  expression  of  the  two  functions  T  and  U, 
which  are  the  two  parts  of  energy,  and  to  form  with 
these  two  functions  Lagrange's  equations,  and 
then  to  compare  these  equations  with  the  experi 
mental  laws. 

How  shall  we  choose  from  all  the  possible 
explanations  one  in  which  the  help  of  experiment 
will  be  wanting  ?  The  day  will  perhaps  come 
when  physicists  will  no  longer  concern  themselves 
with  questions  which  are  inaccessible  to  positive 
methods,  and  will  leave  them  to  the  metaphy 
sicians.  That  day  has  not  yet  come;  man  does  not 
so  easily  resign  himself  to  remaining  for  ever  ignor 
ant  of  the  causes  of  things.  Our  choice  cannot  be 
therefore  any  longer  guided  by  considerations  in 
which  personal  appreciation  plays  too  large  a  part. 
There  are,  however,  solutions  which  all  will  reject 
because  of  their  fantastic  nature,  and  others  which 
all  will  prefer  because  of  their  simplicity.  As 
far  as  magnetism  and  electricity  are  concerned, 


224  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

Maxwell  abstained  from  making  any  choice.  It  is 
not  that  he  has  a  systematic  contempt  for  all  that 
positive  methods  cannot  reach,  as  may  be  seen 
from  the  time  he  has  devoted  to  the  kinetic  theory 
of  gases.  I  may  add  that  if  in  his  magnum  opus  he 
develops  no  complete  explanation,  he  has  attempted 
one  in  an  article  in  the  Philosophical  Magazine. 
The  strangeness  and  the  complexity  of  the 
hypotheses  he  found  himself  compelled  to  make, 
led  him  afterwards  to  withdraw  it. 

The  same  spirit  is  found  throughout  his  whole 
work.  He  throws  into  relief  the  essential — i.e., 
what  is  common  to  all  theories;  everything  that 
suits  only  a  particular  theory  is  passed  over  almost 
in  silence.  The  reader  therefore  finds  himself  in 
the  presence  of  form  nearly  devoid  of  matter, 
which  at  first  he  is  tempted  to  take  as  a  fugitive 
and  unassailable  phantom.  But  the  efforts  he  is 
thus  compelled  to  make  force  him  to  think,  and 
eventually  he  sees  that  there  is  often  something 
rather  artificial  in  the  theoretical  "aggregates" 
which  he  once  admired. 


CHAPTER    XIII. 

ELECTRO-DYNAMICS. 

THE  history  of  electro-dynamics  is  very  instructive 
from  our  point  of  view.  The  title  of  Ampere's 
immortal  work  is,  Thcorie  dcs  phenomenes  electro- 
dynamiqucs,  uniqueinent  fondee  sur  experience.  He 
therefore  imagined  that  he  had  made  no  hypotheses; 
but  as  we  shall  not  be  long  in  recognising,  he  was 
mistaken ;  only,  of  these  hypotheses  he  was  quite 
unaware.  On  the  other  hand,  his  successors  see 
them  clearly  enough,  because  their  attention  is 
attracted  by  the  weak  points  in  Ampere's  solution. 
They  made  fresh  hypotheses,  but  this  time 
deliberately.  How  many  times  they  had  to  change 
them  before  they  reached  the  classic  system,  which 
is  perhaps  even  now  not  quite  definitive,  we  shall 
see. 

I.  Ampere's  Theory. — In  Ampere's  experimental 
study  of  the  mutual  action  of  currents,  he  has 
operated,  and  he  could  operate  only,  with  closed 
currents.  This  was  not  because  he  denied  the 
existence  or  possibility  of  open  currents.  If  two 
conductors  are  positively  and  negatively  charged 
and  brought  into  communication  by  a  wire,  a 
current  is  set  up  which  passes  from  one  to  the 

15 


226  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

other  until  the  two  potentials  are  equal.  Accord 
ing  to  the  ideas  of  Ampere's  time,  this  was 
considered  to  be  an  open  current ;  the  current  was 
known  to  pass  from  the  first  conductor  to  the 
second,  but  they  did  not  know  it  returned  from  the 
second  to  the  first.  All  currents  of  this  kind  were 
therefore  considered  by  Ampere  to  be  open- 
currents — for  instance,  the  currents  of  discharge 
of  a  condenser;  he  was  unable  to  experiment  on 
them,  their  duration  being  too  short.  Another 
kind  of  open  current  may  be  imagined.  Suppose 
we  have  two  conductors  A  and  B  connected  by  a 
wire  AMB.  Small  conducting  masses  in  motion 
are  first  of  all  placed  in  contact  with  the  conductor 
B,  receive  an  electric  charge,  and  leaving  B  are 
set  in  motion  along  a  path  BNA,  carrying  their 
charge  with  them.  On  coming  into  contact  with  A 
they  lose  their  charge,  which  then  returns  to  B 
along  the  wire  AMB.  Now  here  we  have,  in  a 
sense,  a  closed  circuit,  since  the  electricity  describes 
the  closed  circuit  BNAMB;  but  the  two  parts  of 
the  current  are  quite  different.  In  the  wire  AMB 
the  electricity  is  displaced  through  a  fixed  conductor 
like  a  voltaic  current,  overcoming  an  ohmic  resist 
ance  and  developing  heat;  we  say  that  it  is 
displaced  by  conduction.  In  the  part  BNA  the 
electricity  is  carried  by  a  moving  conductor,  and  is 
said  to  be  displaced  by  convection.  If  therefore  the 
convection  current  is  considered  to  be  perfectly 
analogous  to  the  conduction  current,  the  circuit 
BNAMB  is  closed;  if  on  the  contrary  the  convec- 


ELECTRO-DYNAMICS.  227 

tion  current  is  not  a  "  true  current,"  and,  for 
instance,  does  not  act  on  the  magnet,  there  is  only 
the  conduction  current  AMB,  which  is  open.  For 
example,  if  we  connect  by  a  wire  the  poles  of  a 
Holtz  machine,  the  charged  rotating  disc  transfers 
the  electricity  by  convection  from  one  pole  to  the 
other,  and  it  returns  to  the  first  pole  by  conduction 
through  the  wire.  But  currents  of  this  kind  are 
very  difficult  to  produce  with  appreciable  intensity; 
in  fact,  with  the  means  at  Ampere's  disposal  we 
may  almost  say  it  was  impossible. 

To  sum  up,  Ampere  could  conceive  of  the  exist 
ence  of  two  kinds  of  open  currents,  but  he  could 
experiment  on  neither,  because  they  were  not 
strong  enough,  or  because  their  duration  was  too 
short.  Experiment  therefore  could  only  show  him 
the  action  of  a  closed  current  on  a  closed  current — 
or  more  accurately,  the  action  of  a  closed  current 
on  a  portion  of  current,  because  a  current  can  be 
made  to  describe  a  closed  circuit,  of  which  part  may 
be  in  motion  and  the  other  part  fixed.  The  displace 
ments  of  the  moving  part  may  be  studied  under  the 
action  of  another  closed  current.  On  the  other 
hand,  Ampere  had  no  means  of  studying  the  action 
of  an  open  current  either  on  a  closed  or  on  another 
open  current. 

i.  The  Case  of  Closed  Currents. — In  the  case  of 
the  mutual  action  of  two  closed  currents,  ex 
periment  revealed  to  Ampere  remarkably  simple 
laws.  The  following  will  be  useful  to  us  in  the 
sequel : — 


228  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

(1)  If  the  intensity  of  the  currents  is  kept  constant, 
and  if  the  two  circuits,  after  having  undergone  any 
displacements  and  deformations  whatever,  return 
finally   to    their   initial   positions,   the   total   work 
done  by  the  electro-dynamical  actions  is  zero.     In 
other  words,  there  is  an  electro-dynamical  potential 
of  the  two  circuits  proportional  to  the  product  of 
their  intensities,  and  depending  on  the  form  and 
relative  positions  of  the  circuits ;  the  work  done 
by  the  electro-dynamical   actions  is  equal  to  the 
change  of  this  potential. 

(2)  The  action  of  a  closed  solenoid  is  zero. 

(3)  The  action  of  a  circuit  C  on  another  voltaic 
circuit  C'  depends  only  on  the  "  magnetic  field  " 
developed    by  the   circuit    C.      At  each   point   in 
space  we  can,   in   fact,   define  in   magnitude  and 
direction  a  certain  force  called  "  magnetic  force," 
which  enjoys  the  following  properties:— 

(a)  The  force  exercised  by  C  on  a  magnetic 
pole  is  applied  to  that  pole,  and  is  equal  to  the 
magnetic  force  multiplied  by  the  magnetic  mass 
of  the  pole. 

(6)  A  very  short  magnetic  needle  tends  to  take 
the  direction  of  the  magnetic  force,  and  the  couple 
to  which  it  tends  to  reduce  is  proportional  to  the 
product  of  the  magnetic  force,  the  magnetic 
moment  of  the  needle,  and  the  sine  of  the  dip 
of  the  needle. 

(c)  If  the  circuit  C'  is  displaced,  the  amount  of 
the  work  done  by  the  electro-dynamic  action  of 
C  on  C'  will  be  equal  to  the  increment  of  "  flow 


ELECTRO-DYNAMICS.  22Q 

of  magnetic    force "    which    passes    through    the 
circuit. 

2.  Action  of  a  Closed  Current  on  a  Portion  of 
Current. — Ampere  being  unable  to  produce  the 
open  current  properly  so  called,  had  only  one 
way  of  studying  the  action  of  a  closed  current 
on  a  portion  of  current.  This  was  by  operating 
on  a  circuit  C  composed  of  two  parts,  one  mov 
able  and  the  other  fixed.  The  movable  part  was, 
for  instance,  a  movable  wire  a/3,  the  ends  a  and  ft 
of  which  could  slide  along  a  fixed  wire.  In  one  of 
the  positions  of  the  movable  wire  the  end  a  rested 
on  the  point  A,  and  the  end  ft  on  the  point  B  of 
the  fixed  wire.  The  current  ran  from  a  to  ft — i.e., 
from  A  to  B  along  the  movable  wire,  and  then 
from  B  to  A  along  the  fixed  wire.  This  current 
was  therefore  closed. 

In  the  second  position,  the  movable  wire 
having  slipped,  the  points  a  and  ft  were  respect 
ively  at  A'  and  B'  on  the  fixed  wire.  The  current 
ran  from  a  to  ft — i.e.,  from  A'  to  B'  on  the  mov 
able  wire,  and  returned  from  B'  to  B,  and 
then  from  B  to  A,  and  then  from  A  to  A' — all  on 
the  fixed  wire.  This  current  was  also  closed. 
If  a  similar  circuit  be  exposed  to  the  action  of  a 
closed  current  C,  the  movable  part  will  be  dis 
placed  just  as  if  it  were  acted  on  by  a  force. 
Ampere  admits  that  the  force,  apparently  acting  on 
the  movable  part  A  B,  representing  the  action  of 
C  on  the  portion  aft  of  the  current,  remains  the 
same  whether  an  open  current  runs  through  a/3, 


230  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

stopping  at  a  and  /3,  or  whether  a  closed  current 
runs  first  to  ft  and  then  returns  to  a  through  the 
fixed  portion  of  the  circuit.  This  hypothesis 
seemed  natural  enough,  and  Ampere  innocently 
assumed  it;  nevertheless  the  hypothesis  is  not  a 
necessity,  for  we  shall  presently  see  that  Helmholtz 
rejected  it.  However  that  may  be,  it  enabled 
Ampere,  although  he  had  never  produced  an  open 
current,  to  lay  down  the  laws  of  the  action  of  a 
closed  current  on  an  open  current,  or  even  on  an 
element  of  current.  They  are  simple: 

(1)  The  force  acting  on  an  element  of  current 
is  applied  to  that  element ;    it    is   normal   to   the 
element    and    to    the    magnetic    force,    and   pro 
portional  to  that  component  of  the  magnetic  force 
which  is  normal  to  the  element. 

(2)  The    action    of    a    closed    solenoid    on    an 
element    of  current    is    zero.       But    the    electro- 
dynamic  potential  has  disappeared — i.e.,  when   a 
closed  and  an  open  current  of  constant  intensities 
return    to   their   initial   positions,   the    total    work 
done  is  not  zero. 

3.  Continuous  Rotations. — The  most  remarkable 
electro-dynamical  experiments  are  those  in  which 
continuous  rotations  are  produced,  and  which  are 
called  unipolar  induction  experiments.  A  magnet 
may  turn  about  its  axis ;  a  current  passes  first 
through  a  fixed  wire  and  then  enters  the  magnet 
by  the  pole  N,  for  instance,  passes  through 
half  the  magnet,  and  emerges  by  a  sliding  con 
tact  and  re-enters  the  fixed  wire.  The  magnet 


ELECTRO-DYNAMICS.  231 

then  begins  to  rotate  continuously.  This  is 
Faraday's  experiment.  How  is  it  possible  ?  If  it 
were  a  question  of  two  circuits  of  invariable  form, 
C  fixed  and  C'  movable  about  an  axis,  the  latter 
would  never  take  up  a  position  of  continuous 
rotation ;  in  fact,  there  is  an  electro-dynamical 
potential ;  there  must  therefore  be  a  position  of 
equilibrium  when  the  potential  is  a  maximum. 
Continuous  rotations  are  therefore  possible  only 
when  the  circuit  C'  is  composed  of  two  parts — 
one  fixed,  and  the  other  movable  about  an  axis, 
as  in  the  case  of  Faraday's  experiment.  Here 
again  it  is  convenient  to  draw  a  distinction.  The 
passage  from  the  fixed  to  the  movable  part,  or 
rice  versa,  may  take  place  either  by  simple  contact, 
the  same  point  of  the  movable  part  remaining 
constantly  in  contact  with  the  same  point  of  the 
fixed  part,  or  by  sliding  contact,  the  same  point  of 
the  movable  part  coming  successively  into  con 
tact  with  the  different  points  of  the  fixed  part. 

It  is  only  in  the  second  case  that  there  can 
be  continuous  rotation.  This  is  what  then 
happens : — the  system  tends  to  take  up  a  position 
of  equilibrium  ;  but,  when  at  the  point  of  reaching 
that  position,  the  sliding  contact  puts  the  moving 
part  in  contact  with  a  fresh  point  in  the  fixed 
part ;  it  changes  the  connexions  and  therefore  the 
conditions  of  equilibrium,  so  that  as  the  position 
of  equilibrium  is  ever  eluding,  so  to  speak,  the 
system  which  is  trying  to  reach  it,  rotation  may 
take  place  indefinitely. 


232  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

Ampere  admits  that  the  action  of  the  circuit  on 
the  movable  part  of  C'  is  the  same  as  if  the  fixed 
part  of  C'  did  not  exist,  and  therefore  as  if  the 
current  passing  through  the  movable  part  were 
an  open  current.  He  concluded  that  the  action  of 
a  closed  on  an  open  current,  or  vice  versa,  that  of 
an  open  current  on  a  fixed  current,  may  give  rise 
to  continuous  rotation.  But  this  conclusion 
depends  on  the  hypothesis  which  I  have  enunci 
ated,  and  to  which,  as  I  said  above,  Helmholtz 
declined  to  subscribe. 

4.  Mutual  Action  of  Two  Open  Currents. — As  far 
as  the  mutual  action  of  two  open  currents,  and  in 
particular  that  of  two  elements  of  current,  is 
concerned,  all  experiment  breaks  down.  Ampere 
falls  back  on  hypothesis.  He  assumes:  (i)  that 
the  mutual  action  of  two  elements  reduces  to  a 
force  acting  along  their  join ;  (2)  that  the  action 
of  two  closed  currents  is  the  resultant  of  the 
mutual  actions  of  their  different  elements,  which 
are  the  same  as  if  these  elements  were  isolated. 

The  remarkable  thing  is  that  here  again  Ampere 
makes  two  hypotheses  without  being  aware  of  it. 
However  that  may  be,  these  two  hypotheses, 
together  with  the  experiments  on  closed  currents, 
suffice  to  determine  completely  the  law  of  mutual 
action  of  two  elements.  But  then,  most  of  the 
simple  laws  we  have  met  in  the  case  of  closed 
currents  are  no  longer  true.  In  the  first  place, 
there  is  no  electro-dynamical  potential ;  nor"  was 
there  any,  as  we  have  seen,  in  the  case  of  a  closed 


ELECTRO-DYNAMICS.  233 

current  acting  on  an  open  current.  Next,  there 
is,  properly  speaking,  no  magnetic  force ;  and  we 
have  above  denned  this  force  in  three  different 
ways:  (i)  By  the  action  on  a  magnetic  pole; 
(2)  by  the  director  couple  which  orientates  the 
magnetic  needle;  (3)  by  the  action  on  an  element 
of  current. 

In  the  case  with  which  we  are  immediately 
concerned,  not  only  are  these  three  definitions  not 
in  harmony,  but  each  has  lost  its  meaning  :— 

(1)  A  magnetic  pole  is  no  longer  acted  on  by  a 
unique  force  applied  to  that  pole.     We  have  seen, 
in  fact,  the  action  of  an  element  of  current  on  a 
pole  is  not  applied  to  the  pole  but  to  the  element ; 
it  may,  moreover,  be  replaced  by  a  force  applied  to 
the  pole  and  by  a  couple. 

(2)  The   couple    which    acts   on    the    magnetic 
needle  is  no  longer  a  simple  director  couple,  for  its 
moment  with  respect  to  the  axis  of  the  needle  is 
not  zero.     It  decomposes  into  a  director  couple, 
properly   so   called,   and  a   supplementary  couple 
which  tends  to  produce  the  continuous  rotation  of 
which  we  have  spoken  above. 

(3)  Finally,  the  force  acting  on  an  element  of 
a    current    is    not    normal    to    that    element.     In 
other    words,   the    unity   of  the   magnetic  force   has 
disappeared. 

Let  us  see  in  what  this  unity  consists.  Two 
systems  which  exercise  the  same  action  on  a  mag 
netic  pole  will  also  exercise  the  same  action  on  an 
indefinitely  small  magnetic  needle,  or  on  an  element 

15* 


234  SCIENCE   AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

of  current  placed  at  the  point  in  space  at  which  the 
pole  is.  Well,  this  is  true  if  the  two  systems  only 
contain  closed  currents,  and  according  to  Ampere 
it  would  not  be  true  if  the  systems  contained  open 
currents.  It  is  sufficient  to  remark,  for  instance, 
that  if  a  magnetic  pole  is  placed  at  A  and  an 
element  at  B,  the  direction  of  the  element  being 
in  AB  produced,  this  element,  which  will  exercise 
no  action  on  the  pole,  will  exercise  an  action 
either  on  a  magnetic  needle  placed  at  A,  or  on 
an  element  of  current  at  A. 

5.  Induction. — We  know  that  the  discovery  of 
electro-dynamical  induction  followed  not  long  after 
the  immortal  work  of  Ampere.  As  long  as  it  is 
only  a  question  of  closed  currents  there  is  no 
difficulty,  and  Helmholtz  has  even  remarked  that 
the  principle  of  the  conservation  of  energy  is 
sufficient  for  us  to  deduce  the  laws  of  induction 
from  the  electro-dynamical  laws  of  Ampere.  But 
on  the  condition,  as  Bertrand  has  shown, — that 
we  make  a  certain  number  of  hypotheses. 

The  same  principle  again  enables  this  deduction 
to  be  made  in  the  case  of  open  currents,  although 
the  result  cannot  be  tested  by  experiment,  since 
such  currents  cannot  be  produced. 

If  we  wish  to  compare  this  method  of  analysis 
with  Ampere's  theorem  on  open  currents,  we  get 
results  which  are  calculated  to  surprise  us.  In 
the  first  place,  induction  cannot  be  deduced  from 
the  variation  of  the  magnetic  field  by  the  well- 
known  formula  of  scientists  and  practical  men; 


ELECTRO-DYNAMICS.  235 

in  fact,  as  I  have  said,  properly  speaking,  there 
is  no  magnetic  field.  But  further,  if  a  circuit  C 
is  subjected  to  the  induction  of  a  variable  voltaic 
system  S,  and  if  this  system  S  be  displaced  and 
deformed  in  any  way  whatever,  so  that  the 
intensity  of  the  currents  of  this  system  varies 
according  to  any  law  whatever,  then  so  long 
as  after  these  variations  the  system  eventually 
returns  to  its  initial  position,  it  seems  natural 
to  suppose  that  the  mean  electro-motive  force 
induced  in  the  current  C  is  zero.  This  is  true  if 
the  circuit  C  is  closed,  and  if  the  system  S  only 
contains  closed  currents.  It  is  no  longer  true  if 
we  accept  the  theory  of  Ampere,  since  there  would 
be  open  currents.  So  that  not  only  will  induction 
no  longer  be  the  variation  of  the  flow  of  magnetic 
force  in  any  of  the  usual  senses  of  the  word,  but 
it  cannot  be  represented  by  the  variation  of  that 
force  whatever  it  may  be. 

II.  Helmholtz's  Theory. — I  have  dwelt  upon  the 
consequences  of  Ampere's  theory  and  on  his 
method  of  explaining  the  action  of  open  currents. 
It  is  difficult  to  disregard  the  paradoxical  and 
artificial  character  of  the  propositions  to  which 
we  are  thus  led.  We  feel  bound  to  think  "  it 
cannot  be  so."  We  may  imagine  then  that 
Helmholtz  has  been  led  to  look  for  something 
else.  He  rejects  the  fundamental  hypothesis  of 
Ampere — namely,  that  the  mutual  action  of  two 
elements  of  current  reduces  to  a  force  along  their 
join.  He  admits  that  an  clement  of  current  is  not 


236  SCIENCE    AND   HYPOTHESIS. 

acted  upon  by  a  single  force  but  by  a  force  and  a 
couple,  and  this  is  what  gave  rise  to  the  cele 
brated  polemic  between  Bertrand  and  Helmholtz. 
Helmholtz  replaces  Ampere's  hypothesis  by  the 
following : — Two  elements  of  current  always 
admit  of  an  electro-dynamic  potential,  depending 
solely  upon  their  position  and  orientation;  and  the 
work  of  the  forces  that  they  exercise  one  on  the 
other  is  equal  to  the  variation  of  this  potential. 
Thus  Helmholtz  can  no  more  do  without 
hypothesis  than  Ampere,  but  at  least  he  does 
not  do  so  without  explicitly  announcing  it.  In 
the  case  of  closed  currents,  which  alone  are 
accessible  to  experiment,  the  two  theories  agree; 
in  all  other  cases  they  differ.  In  the  first  place, 
contrary  to  what  Ampere  supposed,  the  force 
\vhich  seems  to  act  on  the  movable  portion  of 
a  closed  current  is  not  the  same  as  that  acting 
on  the  movable  portion  if  it  were  isolated  and 
if  it  constituted  an  open  current.  Let  us  return 
to  the  circuit  C',  of  which  we  spoke  above,  and 
which  was  formed  of  a  movable  wire  sliding  on 
a  fixed  wire.  In  the  only  experiment  that  can  be 
made  the  movable  portion  a/3  is  not  isolated,  but  is 
part  of  a  closed  circuit.  When  it  passes  from 
AB  to  A'B',  the  total  electro-dynamic  potential 
varies  for  two  reasons.  First,  it  has  a  slight  incre 
ment  because  the  potential  of  A'B'  with  respect 
to  the  circuit  C  is  not  the  same  as  that  of  AB; 
secondly,  it  has  a  second  increment  because  it 
must  be  increased  by  the  potentials  of  the  elements 


ELECTRO-DYNAMICS,  237 

A  A'  and  B'B  with  respect  to  C.  It  is  this  double 
increment  which  represents  the  work  of  the  force 
acting  upon  the  portion  AB.  If,  on  the  contrary, 
a/3  be  isolated,  the  potential  would  only  have  the 
first  increment,  and  this  first  increment  alone 
would  measure  the  work  of  the  force  acting  on 
AB.  In  the  second  place,  there  could  be  no 
continuous  rotation  without  sliding  contact,  and 
in  fact,  that,  as  we  have  seen  in  the  case  of  closed 
currents,  is  an  immediate  consequence  of  the 
existence  of  an  electro-dynamic  potential.  In 
Faraday's  experiment,  if  the  magnet  is  fixed, 
and  if  the  part  of  the  current  external  to  the 
magnet  runs  along  a  movable  wire,  that  movable 
wire  may  undergo  continuous  rotation.  But  it 
does  not  mean  that,  if  the  contacts  of  the  weir 
with  the  magnet  were  suppressed,  and  an  open 
current  were  to  run  along  the  wire,  the  wire 
would  still  have  a  movement  of  continuous  rota 
tion.  I  have  just  said,  in  fact,  that  an  isolated 
element  is  not  acted  on  in  the  same  way  as  a 
movable  element  making  part  of  a  closed  circuit. 
But  there  is  another  difference.  The  action  of  a 
solenoid  on  a  closed  current  is  zero  according  to 
experiment  and  according  to  the  two  theories. 
Its  action  on  an  open  current  would  be  zero 
according  to  Ampere,  and  it  would  not  be 
zero  according  to  Helmholtz.  From  this  follows 
an  important  consequence.  We  have  given  above 
three  definitions  of  the  magnetic  force.  The  third 
has  no  meaning  here,  since  an  element  of  current 


238  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

is  no  longer  acted  upon  by  a  single  force.  Nor 
has  the  first  any  meaning.  What,  in  fact,  is  a 
magnetic  pole  ?  It  is  the  extremity  of  an 
indefinite  linear  magnet.  This  magnet  may  be 
replaced  by  an  indefinite  solenoid.  For  the 
definition  of  magnetic  force  to  have  any  mean 
ing,  the  action  exercised  by  an  open  current  on 
an  indefinite  solenoid  would  only  depend  on  the 
position  of  the  extremity  of  that  solenoid — i.e., 
that  the  action  of  a  closed  solenoid  is  zero.  Now 
we  have  just  seen  that  this  is  not  the  case.  On 
the  other  hand,  there  is  nothing  to  prevent  us 
from  adopting  the  second  definition  which  is 
founded  on  the  measurement  of  the  director 
couple  which  tends  to  orientate  the  magnetic 
needle ;  but,  if  it  is  adopted,  neither  the  effects 
of  induction  nor  electro-dynamic  effects  will 
depend  solely  on  the  distribution  of  the  lines 
of  force  in  this  magnetic  field. 

III.  Difficulties  raised  by  these  Theories. — Helm- 
holtz's  theory  is  an  advance  on  that  of  Ampere; 
it  is  necessary,  however,  that  every  difficulty 
should  be  removed.  In  both,  the  name  "  magnetic 
field  "  has  no  meaning,  or,  if  we  give  it  one  by  a 
more  or  less  artificial  convention,  the  ordinary 
laws  so  familiar  to  electricians  no  longer  apply; 
and  it  is  thus  that  the  electro-motive  force  induced 
in  a  wire  is  no  longer  measured  by  the  number 
of  lines  of  force  met  by  that  wire.  And  our 
objections  do  not  proceed  only  from  the  fact  that 
it  is  difficult  to  give  up  deeply-rooted  habits  of 


ELECTRO-DYNAMICS.  239 

language  and  thought.  There  is  something  more. 
If  we  do  not  believe  in  actions  at  a  distance, 
electro-dynamic  phenomena  must  be  explained  by 
a  modification  of  the  medium.  And  this  medium 
is  precisely  what  we  call  "magnetic  field,''  and 
then  the  electro-magnetic  effects  should  only 
depend  on  that  field.  All  these  difficulties  arise 
from  the  hypothesis  of  open  currents. 

IV.  Maxwell's  Theory.— Such  were  the  difficulties 
raised  by  the  current  theories,  when  Maxwell  with 
a  stroke  of  the  pen  caused  them  to  vanish.  To 
his  mind,  in  fact,  all  currents  are  closed  currents. 
Maxwell  admits  that  if  in  a  dielectric,  the  electric 
field  happens  to  vary,  this  dielectric  becomes  the 
seat  of  a  particular  phenomenon  acting  on  the 
galvanometer  like  a  current  and  called  the  current 
of  displacement.  If,  then,  two  conductors  bearing 
positive  and  negative  charges  are  placed  in  con 
nection  by  means  of  a  wire,  during  the  discharge 
there  is  an  open  current  of  conduction  in  that 
wire;  but  there  are  produced  at  the  same  time  in 
the  surrounding  dielectric  currents  of  displace 
ment  which  close  this  current  of  conduction.  We 
know  that  Maxwell's  theory  leads  to  the  explana 
tion  of  optical  phenomena  which  would  be  due  to 
extremely  rapid  electrical  oscillations.  At  that 
period  such  a  conception  was  only  a  daring  hypo 
thesis  which  could  be  supported  by  no  experiment; 
but  after  twenty  years  Maxwell's  ideas  received  the 
confirmation  of  experiment.  Hertz  succeeded  in 
producing  systems  of  electric  oscillations  which 


240  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

reproduce  all  the  properties  of  light,  and  only 
differ  by  the  length  of  their  wave — that  is  to  say, 
as  violet  differs  from  red.  In  some  measure  he 
made  a  synthesis  of  light.  It  might  be  said  that 
Hertz  has  not  directly  proved  Maxwell's  funda 
mental  idea  of  the  action  of  the  current  of 
displacement  on  the  galvanometer.  That  is  true 
in  a  sense.  What  he  has  shown  directly  is  that 
electro-magnetic  induction  is  not  instantaneously 
propagated,  as  was  supposed,  but  its  speed  is  the 
speed  of  light.  Yet,  to  suppose  there  is  no  current 
of  displacement,  and  that  induction  is  with  the 
speed  of  light ;  or,  rather,  to  suppose  that  the 
currents  of  displacement  produce  inductive  effects, 
and  that  the  induction  takes  place  instantaneously 
— comes  to  the  same  thing.  This  cannot  be  seen  at 
the  first  glance,  but  it  is  proved  by  an  analysis 
of  which  I  must  not  even  think  of  giving  even  a 
summary  here. 

V.  Rowland's  Experiment. — But,  as  I  have  said 
above,  there  are  two  kinds  of  open  conduction 
currents.  There  are  first  the  currents  of  discharge 
of  a  condenser,  or  of  any  conductor  whatever. 
There  are  also  cases  in  which  the  electric  charges 
describe  a  closed  contour,  being  displaced  by  con 
duction  in  one  part  of  the  circuit  and  by  convec 
tion  in  the  other  part.  The  question  might  be 
regarded  as  solved  for  open  currents  of  the  first 
kind;  they  were  closed  by  currents  of  displace 
ment.  For  open  currents  of  the  second  kind  the 
solution  appeared  still  more  simple. 


ELECTRO-DYNAMICS.  241 

It  seemed  that  if  the  current  were  closed  it 
could  only  be  by  the  current  of  convection  itself. 
For  that  purpose  it  was  sufficient  to  admit  that  a 
"  convection  current  " — i.e.,  a  charged  conductor  in 
motion— could  act  on  the  galvanometer.  But  ex 
perimental  confirmation  was  lacking.  It  appeared 
difficult,  in  fact,  to  obtain  a  sufficient  intensity 
even  by  increasing  as  much  as  possible  the  charge 
and  the  velocity  of  the  conductors.  Rowland,  an 
extremely  skilful  experimentalist,  was  the  first  to 
triumph,  or  to  seem  to  triumph,  over  these  diffi 
culties.  A  disc  received  a  strong  electrostatic 
charge  and  a  very  high  speed  of  rotation.  An 
astatic  magnetic  system  placed  beside  the  disc 
underwent  deviations.  The  experiment  was  made 
twice  by  Rowland,  once  in  Berlin  and  once  at  Balti 
more.  It  was  afterwards  repeated  by  Himstedt. 
These  physicists  even  believed  that  they  could 
announce  that  they  had  succeeded  in  making 
quantitative  measurements.  For  twenty  years 
Rowland's  law  was  admitted  without  objection 
by  all  physicists,  and,  indeed,  everything  seemed 
to  confirm  it.  The  spark  certainly  does  produce  a 
magnetic  effect,  and  does  it  not  seem  extremely 
likely  that  the  spark  discharged  is  due  to  particles 
taken  from  one  of  the  electrodes  and  transferred 
to  the  other  electrode  with  their  charge  ?  Is  not 
the  very  spectrum  of  the  spark,  in  which  we 
recognise  the  lines  of  the  metal  of  the  electrode, 
a  proof  of  it  ?  The  spark  would  then  be  a  real 
current  of  induction. 


2_[2  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

On  the  other  hand,  it  is  also  admitted  that  in 
an  electrolyte  the  electricity  is  carried  by  the  ions 
in  motion.  The  current  in  an  electrolyte  would 
therefore  also  be  a  current  of  convection;  but  it 
acts  on  the  magnetic  needle.  And  in  the  same 
way  for  cathodic  rays;  Crooks  attributed  these 
rays  to  very  subtle  matter  charged  with  negative 
electricity  am!  moving  with  very  high  velocity. 
He  looked  upon  them,  in  other  words,  as  currents 
of  convection.  *  Now,  these  cathodic  rays  are 
deviated  by  the  magnet.  In  virtue  of  the 
principle  of  action  and  re-action,  they  should  in 
their  turn  deviate  the  magnetic  needle.  It  is 
true  that  Hertz  believed  he  had  proved  that  the 
cathodic  rays  do  not  carry  negative  electricity,  and 
that  they  do  not  act  on  the  magnetic  needle;  but 
Hertz  was  wrong.  First  of  all,  Perrin  succeeded 
in  collecting  the  electricity  carried  by  these  rays — 
electricity  of  which  Hertz  denied  the  existence;  the 
German  scientist  appears  to  have  been  deceived 
by  the  effects  due  to  the  action  of  the  X-rays, 
which  were  not  yet  discovered.  Afterwards,  and 
quite  recently,  the  action  of  the  cathodic  rays  on 
the  magnetic  needle  has  been  brought  to  light. 
Thus  all  these  phenomena  looked  upon  as  currents 
of  convection,  electric  sparks,  electrolytic  currents, 
cathodic  rays,  act  in  the  same  manner  on  the 
galvanometer  and  in  conformity  to  Rowland's 
law. 

VI.  Loventz's  Theory. — We  need  not  go  much 
further.  According  to  Lorentz's  theory,  currents 


ELECTRO-DYNAMICS.  243 

of  conduction  would  themselves  be  true  convection 
currents.  Electricity  would  remain  indissolubly 
connected  with  certain  -  material  particles  called 
electrons.  The  circulation  of  these  electrons 
through  bodies  would  produce  voltaic  currents, 
and  what  would  .distinguish  conductors  from 
insulators  would  be  that  the  one  could  be  traversed 
by  these  electrons,  while  the  others  would  check 
the  movement  of  the  electrons.  Lorentz's  theory 
is  very  attractive.  It  gives  a  very  simple  explana 
tion  of  certain  phenomena,  which  the  earlier 
theories — even  Maxwell's  in  its  primitive  form- 
could  only  deal  with  in  an  unsatisfactory  manner; 
for  example,  the  aberration  of  light,  the  partial 
impulse  of  luminous  waves,  magnetic  polarisation, 
and  Zeeman's  experiment. 

A  few  objections  still  remained.  The  pheno 
mena  of  an  electric  system  seemed  to  depend  on 
the  absolute  velocity  of  translation  of  the  centre 
of  gravity  of  this  system,  which  is  contrary  to 
the  idea  that  we  have  of  the  relativity  of  space. 
Supported  by  M.  Cremieu,  M.  Lippman  has  pre 
sented  this  objection  in  a  very  striking  form. 
Imagine  two  charged  conductors  with  the  same 
velocity  of  translation.  They  are  relatively  at 
rest.  However,  each  of  them  being  equivalent 
to  a  current  of  convection,  they  ought  to  attract 
one  another,  and  by  measuring  this  attraction 
we  could  measure  their  absolute  velocity. 
"No!"  replied  the  partisans  of  Lorentz.  "What 
we  could  measure  in  that  way  is  not  their 


244  SCIENCE    AND    HYPOTHESIS. 

absolute  velocity,  but  their  relative  velocity  with 
respect  to  the  ether,  so  that  the  principle  of  rela 
tivity  is  safe."  Whatever  there  may  be  in  these 
objections,  the  edifice  of  electro-dynamics  seemed, 
at  any  rate  in  its  broad  lines,  definitively  con 
structed.  Everything  was  presented  under  the 
most  satisfactory  aspect.  The  theories  of  Ampere 
and  Helmholtz,  which  were  made  for  the  open 
currents  that  no  longer  existed,  seem  to  have  no 
more  than  purely  historic  interest,  and  the  in 
extricable  complications  to  which  these  theories 
led  have  been  almost  forgotten.  This  quiescence 
has  been  recently  disturbed  by  the  experiments  of 
M.  Cremieu,  which  have  contradicted,  or  at  least 
have  seemed  to  contradict,  the  results  formerly 
obtained  by  Rowland.  Numerous  investigators 
have  endeavoured  to  solve  the  question,  and  fresh 
experiments  have  been  undertaken.  What  result 
will  they  give  ?  I  shall  take  care  not  to  risk  a 
prophecy  which  might  be  falsified  between  the 
day  this  book  is  ready  for  the  press  and  the  day  on 
which  it  is  placed  before  the  public. 


THE    END. 


THE   WALTER   SCOTT    PUBLISHING    CO.,    LIMITED,    FliLLING'ON-TYKE, 


The  Makers  of  British  Art 

A    NEW   SERIES    OF  MONOGRAPHS    OF 
BRITISH    PAINTERS. 

Each  volume  illustrated  with  Twenty  Full-page  Reproductions 
and  a  Photogravure  Portrait. 

Square  Crown  Svo,  Cloth,  Gilt  Top,  Deckled  Edges,  ^s.  6d.  net. 
VOLUMES    READY. 

LANDSEER,  SIR  EDWIN.     By  JAMES  A.  MANSON. 
REYNOLDS,  SIR  JOSHUA.    By  ELSA  D'ESTERRE-KEELING. 

TURNER,  J.   M.  W.      By  ROBERT  CHIGNELL,  Author  of 
"The  Life  and  Paintings  of  Vicat  Cole,  R.A." 

ROMNEYt  GEORGE.     By  SIR  HERBERT  MAXWELL,  Bart, 
F.R.S.,  M.P. 

"  Likely  to  remain  the  hest  account  of  the  painter's  life." — Athauenni. 

WILKIE,  SIR  DAVID.     By  Professor  BAYNE. 
CONSTABLE,  JOHN.     By  the  EARL  OF  PLYMOUTH. 
RAEBURN,  SIR  HENRY.     By  EDWARD  PINNINGTON. 
GAINSBOROUGH,  THOMAS.     By  A.  E.  FLETCHER. 
HOGARTH,  WILLIAM.     By  Prof.  G.  BALDWIN  BROWN. 
MOORE,   HENRY.     By  FRANK  J.  MACLEAN. 
LEIGHTON,  LORD.     By  EDGCUMBE  STALEY. 
MORLAND,  GEORGE.     By  D.  II.  WILSON,  M.A.,  LL.M. 
V/ILSON,  RICHARD.     By  BEAUMONT  FLETCHER, 
MILLAIS,  SIR  JOHN  EVERETT,     By  J.  EADIE  REID. 

THE  WALTER  SCOTT  PUBLISHING  COMPANY,  LIMITED, 
LONDON  AND  FRLLING-ON-TYNE. 


The  Scott  Library. 

Maroon  Cloth,  Gilt.     Price  1s.  net  per  Volume, 

May  also  be  had  in  the  following  Bindings :— Half-Morocco,  gilt  top, 
antique  ;  Red  Roan,  gilt  edges,  etc. 


VOLUMES  ALREADY  ISSUED— 


ARISTOTLE'S  ETHICS 
ATHENIAN  ORACLE,  THE 
AUGUSTINE'S   CONFESSIONS 
BACON'S  ESSAYS 
BALZAC'S  SHORTER  STORIES 
BRONTE'S  JANE  EYRE 
BROWNE'S  RELIGIO  MEDICI, 

ETC. 

BURNS'S  LETTERS 
BYRON'S  LETTERS 
CARLETON,  TALES  FROM 
C  A  R  L  Y  L  E '  S        MISCEL 
LANEOUS  ESSAYS 
C  A  R  L  Y  L  E  '  S       SARTOR 

RICSARTUS 

CHESTERFIELD'S  LETTERS 
C1CEUO,  ORATIONS  OF 
COLERIDGE,  PROSE  OF 
CUNNINGHAM'S  GREAT 

ENGLISH    PAINTERS 
DARWIN'S  CORAL-REEFS 
DAVIS,       THOMAS,       PROSE 

WRITINGS  OF 
DEFOE'S    CAPTAIN    SINGLE- 

TON 

DK  MUSSET'S  COMEDIES 
DE       QUINCEY'S       CONFES 
SIONS 

DE  QUINCEY'S  ESSAYS 
DESCARTES'  DISCOURSE  ON 

METHOD 

DICKENS'S     MASTER     HUM 
PHREY'S  CLOCK,  ETC. 
EARLY  REVIEWS  OF  GREAT 

WRITERS 

ELIZABETHAN  ENGLAND 
KLLIS'S  NEW  SPIRIT 
EMERSON,      SELECT     WRIT 
INGS  OF 

ENGLISH  FAIRY  AND  FOLK 
TALES 


ENGLISH  PROSE  (Manndevffle 

to  Thackeray) 

EPICTETUS,  TEACHING  OF 
FERRIS'S    GREAT    MUSICAL 

COMPOSERS 

PROISSART,  PASSAGES  FROJ< 
FRO  UDE'S  NEMESIS  OF  FAITH 
GOETHE'S  MAXIMS,  ETC. 
GOGOL'S      INSPECTOR. 

GENERAL 
GOLDSMITH'S      VICAR      OF 

WAKEFIELD 
G  0  S  S  E '  S       NORTHERN 

STUDIES 

HAZLITT,  WILLIAM,  E3SAY3" 
HEINE     IN     ART     AND 

LETTERS 

HEINE,  IIEINRICH,  PROSE 
HEINE'S    ITALIAN    TRAVEL 

SKETCHES 
HELPS'S    ESSAYS    AND 

APHORISMS 

HERBERT'S,     LORD,     AUTO 
BIOGRAPHY 
HOLMES'  AUTOCRAT  OF  TII3 

LJREAKF  AST-TABLE 
HOLMES'      POET     AT      THE 

BREAKFAST-TABLE 
HOLMES'      PROFESSOR      AT 

T I J  E  BREAK FAST-TA  BLE 
HUME'S  ESSAYS 
HUNT,  LEIGH,  ESSAYS  BY 
IBSEN'S  PILLARS  OF  SOCIETY 
IRISH  FAIRY  AND  FOLKTALES 
JERROLD,  DOUGLAS,  PAPERS 
JOHNSON'S,  DR,,  ESSAYS 
KALIDASl'S  SAKUNTALA 
LAMB'S  ESSAYS  OF  ELIA 
LAMB'S  PLAYS  AND  DRAMA 
TIC  ESSAYS 


THE  WALTER  SCOTT  PUBLISHING  COMPANY,  LIMITED, 
LONDON  AND  FELLING-ON-TYNB. 


THE  SCOTT 

LANPOR'S  IMAGINARY  CON 
VERSATIONS 

LANDOR'S  PENTAMERON,  &c. 

LANDOR'S  PERICLES  AND 
ASPASIA 

LEOPARDFS  THOUGHTS  AND 
PI  ALOGUES 

LESSING'S  LAOCOON,  AND 
OTEIELl  WRITINGS 

LKSSING'S  NATHAN  THE 
WISE 

LEWES'S,  G.  H.,  PRINCIPLES 
OF  SUCCESS  IN  L1TERA- 
TURE 

I/lNGFELLOW'S  PROSE 

LOWELL'S  ESSAYS  ON  ENG 
LISH  POETS 

LOWELL'S   BIGLOW  PAPERS 

LOWELL'S  MY  STUDY 
WINDOWS 

MAETERLINCK,  PLAYS  OF 

MALORY'S  KING  ARTHUR 

MALORY'S  MARVELLOUS  AD 
VENTURES 

MARCUS  AURELIUS,  MEDI 
TATIONS  OF 

MAZZJNI'S  ESSAYS-POLITI 
CAL,  ETC. 

MILL'S  LIBERTY 

MILTON,  PROSE  OF 

MiTFORD'S  OUR  VILLAGE 

MONTAIGNE,  ESSAYS  OF 

MORE'S  UTOPIA  AND 
EDWARD  V. 

MORRIS'S  VOLSUNGS  AND 
NIBLUNGS 

NEWMAN'S  SELECT  ESSAYS 

NEWMAN'S  UNIVERSITY 
SKETCHES 

OXFORD  MOVEMENT,  THE 

PASCAL,  BLAISE,  SELECT 
THOUGHTS  OF 

PETRONTUS  (TtUMALCHIO'S 
BANQUET) 

PLATO,  SELECTIONS  FROM 

PLATO'S  REPUBLIC 

PLUTARCH'S  LIVES 

PLINY'S  LETTERS— SERIES  I. 

PLINY'S  LETTERS— SERIES II. 

POE'S  TALES  AND  ESSAYS 

POLITICAL  ECONOMY  SELEC 
TIONS 

POLITICAL  ORATIONS 


REFLECTIONS  ON  THE  REVO 
LUTION  IN  FRANCE 

RE  NAN'S  LIFE  OF  JESUS 

RENAN'S  ANTICHRIST 

RENAN'S  MARCUS  AURELI  US 

RENAN'S  POETRY  OF  CELTIC 
RACES.  ETC 

REYNOLDS'S,    SIR    JOSHUA, 
DISCOURSES 

RYDBERG'S  S1NGOALLA 

SADI:     GULISTAN;     OR 
FLOWER  GARDEN 

SAINTE-BEUVE,   ESSAYS    OF 

SCHILLER'S    MAID    OF    OR 
LEANS 

SCHILLER'S  WfLLIAM  TELL 

SCHOPENHAUER 

SCOTS  ESSAYISTS 

SENANCOUR'S  OUERMANN 

SENECA'S    MORALS,     SELEC 
TIONS  FROM 

SHELLEY'S      ESSAYS      AND 
LETTERS 

SHERIDAN'S  PLAYS 

SMITH,  SYDNEY,  PAPE1IS  BY 

S PENCE'S   ANECDOTES    AND 
OBSERVATIONS 

STEELE   AND   ADDIS  ON, 
PAPERS  OF 

SWIFT'S  PROSE  WRITINGS 

TACITUS,  THE  ANNALS  OF 

THACKERAY'S  BARRY  LYN 
DON 

THOREAU'S     EPSAYS,     AND 
OTHER  WRITINGS 

THOREAU'S  WALDEN 

THOREAU'S  WEEK  ON  THE 
CONCORD 

TOLSTOY'S  WHAT  IS  ART  ? 

VASARI'S  LIVES  OF  ITALIAN 
PAINTERS 

WALTON'S     COMPLETE 
ANGLER 

WALTON'S  LIVES 

WHITE'S  NATURAL  HISTORY 
OF  SELBORNE 

WHITMAN'S       DEMOCRATIC 
VISTAS 

WHITMAN'S  SPECIMEN  DAYS 

WOLLSTONECRAFT'S  RIG  1  ITS 
OF  WOMAN 

WORDSWORTH'S  PROSS 


THE  WALTER  SCOTT  PUBLISHING  COMPANV,  LIMITED, 
LONDON  AND  FELLING-ON-TYNK. 


The    Canterbury    Poets. 

Cloth,  Cut  and  Uncut  Edges,  is.;  Red  Roan,  Gilt  Edges,  2s.  6d.; 
Pad.  Morocco,  Gilt  Edges,  55. 

A  Superior  Edition  Bound  in  Art  Linen ,  with  Photogravure  Frontispiece,  2s. 


1  CHRISTIAN  YEAR 

2  COLERIDGE 

3  LONGFELLOW 

4  CAMPBELL 

5  SHELLEY 

6  WORDSVvORTU 

7  BLAKE 

8  WHITTIER 

9  FOE 

10  CHATTERTON 

11  BURNS.     Son-5 

12  BURNS.     Poems 

13  MAR  LOW  IS 

14  KEATS 

15  HERBERT 

16  HUGO 

17  COWPER, 

18  SHAKESPEARE'S  POEMS,  etc. 

19  EMKRSON 

20  SONNETS    OF    THE    NINE 

TEENTH  CENTURY 

21  WHITMAN 

22  SCOTT.     Lady  of  the  Lal<e,  etc. 

23  SCOTT.     Marmion,  etc. 

24  PRAED 


25  HOGG 

26  GOLDSMITI! 

27  LOVE  LETTERS,  etc. 

28  SPENSER 

29  CHILDREN  OF  THE  POET3 

30  JONSON 

31  BYRON.     Miscellaneous 

32  BYRON.   Don  Juan 

33  THE  SONNETS  OF  EUROPE 

34  RAMSAY 

35  DOBELL 

36  POPE 

37  I1EIXS 

j3  BEAUMONT  &  FLETCHER 
39  BOWLES,  LAMB,  etc. 
.jo  SEA  MUSIC 

41  EARLY  ENGLISH  POETRY 

42  I1KRRICK 

43  BALLADES  AND  RONDEAUS 

44  IRISH  MINSTRELSY 

45  MILTON'S  PARADISE  LOST 

46  JACOBITE  BALLADS 

47  DAYS  OF  THE  YEAR 

48  AUSTRALIAN  BALLADS 

49  MOORE 


THE  WALTER  SCOTT  PUBLISHING  CO.,  LTD., 
LONDON   AND   FELUNG-ON-TYNE 


The  Canterbury  Poets 


—continued. 


50  BORDER  BALLADS 

51  SONG-TIDE 

52  ODES  OF  HORACE 
5.3  OSSIAN 

54  FAIRY  MUSIC 

55  SOUTIIEY 

56  CHAUCER 

57  GOLDEN  TREASURY 

58  POEMS  OF  WILD  LIFE 

59  PARADISE  REGAINED 

60  CRABBE 

61  DORA  GREENWELL 

62  FAUST 

63  AMERICAN  SONNETS 

64  LANDOR'S  POEMS 

65  GREEK  ANTHOLOGY 

66  HUNT  AND  HOOD 

67  HUMOROUS  POEMS 

68  LYTTON'S  PLAYS 

69  GREAT  ODES 

70  MEREDITH'S  POEMS 

71  IMITATION  OF  CHRIST 

72  NAVAL  SONGS 

73  PAINTER  POETS 

74  WOMEN  POETS 

75  LOVE  LYRICS 

76  AMERICAN    HUMOROUS 

VERSE 

77  SCOTTISH  MINOR  POETS 

78  CAVALIER  LYRISTS 


So  SONGS  OF  BERANGER 

81  RODEN  NOEL'S  POEMS 

82  SONGS  OF  FREEDOM 

83  CANADIAN  POEMS 

84  SCOTTISH  VERSE 

85  POEMS  OF  NATURE 
S6  CRADLE  SONGS 

87  BALLADS  OF  SPORT 
8S  MATTHEW  ARNOLD 

89  CLOUGH'S  BOTHIE 

90  BROWNING'S  POEMS 

Pippa  Passes,  etc.     Vol.  I. 

91  BROWNING'S  POEMS 

A  Blot  in  the  'Scutcheon,  etc. 
Vol.  2. 

92  BROWNING'S  POEMS 

Dramatic  Lyrics.     Vol.  3. 

03  MACKAY'S    LOVER'S    Mlb- 

SAL 

04  HENRY  KIRKE  WHITE 

95  LYRA  NICOTIANA 

96  AURORA  LEIGH 

97  TENNYSON'S  POEMS 

In  Meinoriam,  etc. 

98  TENNYSON'S  POEMS 

The  Princess,  etc. 

99  WAR  SONGS 

100  THOMSON 

101  ALEXANDER  SMITH 

102  EUGENE  LEE-HAMILTON 

103  PAUL  VERLAINE 

104  BAUDELAIRE 

105  NEW  ZEALAND  VERSE 

1 06  CONTEMPORARY  GERMAN 

POETRY 

107  CONTEMPORARY  BELGIAN 

POETRY 


79  GERMAN  BALLADS 

THE  WALTER  SCOTT  PUBLISHING  COMPANY,  LIMITED, 
LONDON  AND  FELLING-ON-TYNE. 


1/5 

HZ 
ZO 

SE 


Great   Writers. 


A  NEW  SERIES  OF  CRITICAL  BIOGRAPHIES. 

EDITED  BY  ERIC  ROBERTSON  AND  FRANK  T.  MARZIALS.  £  3 

A  Complete  Bibliography  to  each  Volume,  by  J.  P.  ANDERSON,  British  *^  g 

Museum,  London.  •— ' 

0,^ 

Cloth,  Uncut  Edges,  Gilt  Top.    Price  if.  6J.  Ba 

VOL  UMES  A  LREA  D  Y  ISS  UED.  8  |j 
LIFE  OF  LONGFELLOW.     By  Professor  ERIC  S.  ROBERTSON. 

LIFE  OF  COLERIDGE.     By  HALL  CAINE.  SO* 

LIFE  OF  DICKENS.     By  FRANK  T.  MARZIALS.  g  -3 

LIFE  OF  DANTE  GABRIEL  ROSSETTI.     By  J.  KNIGHT.  =  „ 

LIFE  OF  SAMUEL  JOHNSON.     By  Colonel  F.  GRANT.  o  M 
LIFE  OF  DARWIN.     By  G.  T.  BKTTANY. 

LIFE  OF  CHARLOTTE  BRONTE.     By  A.  BIRRELL.  £  3 

LIFE  OF  THOMAS  CARLYLK.     By  R.  GARNETT,  LL.D.  £  1~ 

LIFE  OF  ADAM  SMITH.     By  R.  B.  HALDANB,  M.P.  -5  * 

LIFE  OF  KEATS.     By  W.  M.  ROSSETTI.  ..,  ft 

LIFE  OF  SHELLEY.     By  WILLIAM  SHARP.  o  ~ 

LIFE  OF  SMOLLETT.     By  DAVID  HANNAY.  -  3, 
LIFE  OF  GOLDSMITH.     By  AUSTIN  DOUSON. 

LIFE  OF  SCOTT.     By  Professor  YONGE.  $  c 

LIFE  OF  BURNS.     By  Professor  BLACKIE.  _g 

LIFE  OF  VICTOR  HUGO.     By  FRANK  T.  MARZIALS.  2>    \ 

LIFE  OF  EMERSON.     By  RICHARD  GARNETT,  LL.D.  ^  J, 
LIFE  OF  GOETHE.     By  [AMFS  SIME. 

LIFE  OF  CONGREVE.    By  EDMUND  GOSSE.  ^  « 

LIFE  OF  BUNYAN.     By  Canon  VENABLES.  ^3 

LIFE  OF  CRABBE.     By  T.  E.  KEBBEL.  S  g 

LIFE  OF  HEINE.     By  WILLIAM  SHARP.  £ 

LIFE  OF  MILL.     By  \V.  L.  COURTNEY.  PL,  -^ 

LIFE  OF  SCHILLER.     By  HENRY  W.  NEVINSOW.  ^  'Z 
LIFE  OF  CAPTAIN  MARRYAT.     By  DAVID  HANNAY, 

LIFE  OF  LESSING.     By  T.  W.  ROLLESTON.  >  W 

LIFE  OF  MILTON.     By  R.  GARNETT,  LL.D.  ffl  « 

LIFE  OF  BALZAC.     By  FREDERICK  WEDMORK.  P-i  -g 

LIFE  OF  GEORGE  ELIOT.     By  OSCAR  BROWNING.  <  u     « 

LIFE  OF  JANE  AUS'lEN.     By  GOLDWIN  SMITH.  K  o  3 

LIFE  OF  BROWNING.     By  WILLIAM  SHARP.  O  ^  "3 

LIFE  OF  BYRON.     By  Hon.  RODEN  NOEL.  O  r   S 

LIFE  OF  HAWTHORNE.     By  MONCURE  D.  CONWAY.  3  £  .tJ 
LIFE  OF  SCHOPENHAUER.     By  Professor  WALLACE. 

LIFE  OF  SHERIDAN.     By  LLOYD  SANDERS.  C  O   5 
LIFE  OF  THACKERAY.      By  HERMAN  MERIVALE  and  FRANK  T.         P5  fc  'S 

MARZIALS.  o^!  « 

LIFE  OF  CERVANTES.    By  H.  E.  WATTS.  3  «•  C 

LIFE  OF  VOLTAIRE.     By  FRANCIS  ESPTNASSE.  a 

LIFE  OF  LEIGH  HUNT.     By  COSMO  MONKHOUSB.  ^    •  « 

LIFE  OF  WHITTIER.     By  W.  J    LINTON.  g        g< 
LIFE  OF  RENAN.     By  FRANCIS  EPPINASSB.  ,5 -g 

LIFE  OF  THOREAU.     By  H.  «?.  SALT.  ^^   3 

LIFE  OF  RUSKIN.     By  ASHMOKE  WINGATB.  H 


* 


LIBRARY  EDITION  OF  'GREAT  WRITERS,'  Demy  8vo,  25.  6<L  ,* 

THE  WALTER  SCOTT  PUBLISHING  COMPANY,  LIMITED, 


LONDON   AND  FELLING-ON-TYNE. 


3/6  vps    Ibsen's  Works.    3/6  %l 

(Blue  and  Gold  Binding.} 

EDITED  AND  TRANSLATED  BY  WILLIAM  ARCHER, 
Dramatic  Critic  of  "The  World." 

Complete  Works  in  Six  Volumes.     Three  Plays  to  a  Volume. 

VOL.  I.— "THE  LEAGUE  OF  YOUTH,"  "THE  PILLARS 
OF  SOCIETY,"  and  "A  DOLL'S  HOUSE." 

With  Portrait  of  the  Author,  and  Biographical  Introduction  by 
WILLIAM  ARCHER. 

VOL.  II.— "GHOSTS,"  "AN  ENEMY  OF  THE  PEOPLE," 
and  "THE  WILD  DUCK." 

With  an  Introductory  Note  by  WILLIAM  ARCHER. 

VOL.      III.— "LADY     INGER     OF     OSTRAT,"     "THE 

VIKINGS  AT  HELGELAND,"  and  "  THE 

PRETENDERS." 

With  an  Introductory  Note  by  WILLIAM  ARCHER. 

VOL.    IV.— "EMPEROR    AND    GALILEAN."     (Csesar's 

Apostasy  and  The  Emperor  Julian.) 
With  an  Introductory  Note  by  WILLIAM  ARCHER. 

VOL.    V.— "ROSMERSHOLM,"    "THE     LADY    FROM 
THE  SEA,"  and  "  HEDDA  GABLER." 

Translated  by  WILLIAM  ARCHER.     With  an  Introductory  Note. 

VOL.  VI.-—"  PEER  GYNT."     A  Dramatic  Poem. 
Translated  by  WILLIAM  ARCHER. 

THE  WALTER  SCOTT  PUBLISHING  COMPANY,  LIMITED, 
LONDON  AND  FELLING-ON-TYNE. 


COMPACT  AND  PRACTICAL. 

In  Limp  Cloth;  for  the  Pocket.      Price  One  Shilling. 

The    European 

Conversation    Books. 

FRENCH  ITALIAN 

SPANISH  GERMAN 

NORWEGIAN. 

CONTENTS. 

Hints  to  Travellers — Everyday  Expressions — Arriving  at 
and  Leaving  a  Railway  Station — Custom  House  Enquiries — 
In  a  Train — At  a  Buffet  and  Restaurant — At  an  Hotel— Pay 
ing  an  Hotel  Bill— Enquiries  in  a  Toiun—On  board  Ship — 
Embarking  and  Disembarking — Excursion  by  Carriage — 
Enquiries  as  to  Diligences — Enquiries  as  to  Boats — Engag 
ing  Apartments — Washing  List  and  Days  of  Week — 
Restaurant  Vocabulary — Telegrams  and  Letters,  etc.,  etc. 

The  contents  of  these  little  handbooks  are  so  arranged  as  to 
permit  direct  and  immediate  reference.  All  dialogues  or  enquiries  not 
considered  absolutely  essential  have  been  purposely  excluded,  nothing 
being  introduced  which  might  confuse  the  traveller  rather  than  assist 
him.  A  few  hints  are  given  in  the  introduction  which  will  be  found 
valuable  to  those  unaccustomed  to  foreign  travel. 

THE  WALTER  SCOTT  PUBLISHING  CO.,  LTD., 
LONDON  AND   FELLING-ON-TYNE. 


Famous   American   Authors. 

"NEW   ENGLAND    LIBRARY." 
Gravure  Edition. 

PRINTED  ON  ANTIQUE  PAPER.     2s.  6d.  PER  VOL. 
Each  Volume  with  a  Frontispiece  in  Photogravure. 

By   NATHANIEL   HAWTHORNE. 

THE  SCARLET  LETTER. 

THE  HOUSE  OF  THE  SEVEN  GABLES. 

THE  BLITHEDALE  ROMANCE. 

TANGLEWOOD  TALES. 

TWICE-TOLD  TALES. 

A  WONDER-BOOK  FOR  GIRLS  AND  BOYS. 

OUR  OLD  HOME. 

MOSSES  FROM  AN  OLD  MANSE. 

THE  SNOW  IMAGE. 

TRUE  STORIES  FROM  HISTORY  AND  BIOGRAPHY. 

THE  NEW  ADAM  AND  EVE. 

LEGENDS  OF  THE  PROVINCE  HOUSE. 

By   OLIVER   WENDELL   HOLMES. 

THE  AUTOCRAT  OF  THE  BREAKFAST-TABLE. 
THE  PROFESSOR  AT  THE  BREAKFAST-TABLE. 
THE  POET  AT  THE  BREAKFAST-TABLE. 
ELSIE  VENNER. 

By   HENRY  THOREAU. 

ESSAYS  AND  OTHER  WRITINGS. 
WALDEN;   OR,  LIFE  IN  THE  WOODS. 
A  WEEK  ON  THE  CONCORD. 

THE  WALTER  SCOTT  PUBLISHING  COMPANY,  LIMITED, 

LONDON   AND    FELLING-ON-TYNE. 


Every-Day   Help  Series 

of  Useful  Handbooks. 
Price  6d.  each,  or  in  Roan  Binding,  Price  Is. 

Contributors—].  LANGDON  DOWN,  M.D.,  F.R.C.P.;  HENRY 
POWER,  M.B.,  F.R.C.S.;  J.  MORTIMER-GRANVILLE,  M.D. ; 
J.  CRICHTON  BROWNE,  M.D.,  LL.D. ;  ROBERT  FARQUHARSON, 
M.D.,  Edin.;  W.  S.  GREENFIELD,  M.D.,  F.R.C.P.;  and  others. 

1.  How  to  Do  Business.     A  Guide  to  Success  in  Life. 

2.  HOW  to  Behave.     Manual  of  Etiquette  and  Personal  Habits. 

3.  HOW    to    Write.      A    Manual    of    Composition   and    Letter 

Writing. 

4.  HOW  to  Debate.     With  Hints  on  Public  Speaking. 

5-   Don't :  Directions  for  avoiding  Common  Errors  of  Speech. 

6.  The  Parental  Don't :  Warnings  to  Parents. 

7.  Why  Smoke  and  Drink.    By  James  Parton. 

8.  Elocution.     By  T.   R.  W.   Pearson,  M.A.,  of  St.  Catharine's 

College,    Cambridge,    and    F.    W.    Waithman,    Lecturers    on 

Elocution. 

9.  The  Secret  of  a  Clear  Head. 

10.  Common  Mind  Troubles. 

11.  The  'Secret  of  a  Good  Memory. 

12.  Youth:  Its  Care  and  Culture. 

13.  The  Heart  and  its  Function. 

14.  Personal  Appearances  in  Health  and  Disease. 

15.  The  House  and  its  Surroundings. 

16.  Alcohol:  Its  Use  and  Abuse. 
17-  Exercise  and  Training. 

18.  Baths  and  Bathing. 

19.  Health  in  Schools. 

20.  The  Skin  and  its  Troubles. 

21.  How  to  make  the  Best  of  Life. 

22.  Nerves  and  Nerve-Troubles. 

23.  The  Sight,  and  How  to  Preserve  it. 

24.  Premature  Death  :    Its  Promotion  and  Prevention. 

25.  Change,  as  a  Mental  Restorative. 

26.  The  Gentle  Art  of  Nursing  the  Sick. 

27-  The  Care  of  Infants  and  Young  Children. 
23.  Invalid  Feeding,  with  Hints  on  Diet. 

29.  E very-day  Aliments,  and  How  to  Treat  Them. 

30.  Thrifty  Housekeeping. 

31.  Home  Cooking. 

32.  Flowers  and  Flower  Culture. 

33.  Sleep  and  Sleeplessness. 

34.  The  Story  of  Life. 

35.  Household  Nursing. 

36.  The  Ear,  and  Ear  Troubles. 

THE   WALTER  SCOTT   PUBLISHING   CO.,    LTD., 
LONDON  AND   FELLING-ON-TYNE. 


The  Music  Story  Series. 

A    SERIES    OF  LITERARY-MUSICAL    MONOGRAPHS. 

Edited  by  FREDERICK  J.   CROWEST, 

Author  of  "The  Great  Tone  Poets,"  etc.,  etc. 

Illustrated  with  Photogravure  and  Collotype  Portraits,  Half-tone  and  Line 
Pictures,  Facsimiles,  etc. 

Square  Crown  8vo,  Cloth,  3s.   6d.  net. 
VOLUMES   NOW  READY. 

THE  STORY  OF  ORATORIO,  By  ANNIE  W.  PATTER 
SON,  B.A.,  Mus.  Doc. 

THE  STORY  OF  NOTATION,  By  C,  F.  ABDY  WILLIAMS, 
M.A.,  Mus.  Bac. 

THE  STORY  OF  THE  ORGAN,  By  C.  F.  ABDY 
WILLIAMS,  M.A.,  Author  of  "Bach"  and  "Handel"  ("Master 
Musicians'  Series"). 

THE  STORY  OF  CHAMBER  MUSIC,  By  N.  KILBURN, 
Mus.  BAG.  (Cantab.). 

THE  STORY  OF  THE  VIOLIN.  By  PAUL  STOEVING, 
Professor  of  the  Violin,  Guildhall  School  of  Music,  London. 

THE  STORY  OF  THE  HARP,  By  WILLIAM  H.  GRATTAN 
FLOOD,  Author  of  "  History  of  Irish  Music." 

THE  STORY  OF  ORGAN  MUSIC.  By  C.  F.  ABDY 
WILLIAMS,  M.A.,  Mus.  Bac. 

THE  STORY  OF  ENGLISH  MUSIC  (1604-1904):  being  the 
Worshipful  Company  of  Musicians'  Lectures. 

THE   STORY  OF  MINSTRELSY.     By  EDMONDSTOUNE 

DUNCAN. 

THE  STORY  OF  MUSICAL  FORM,  By  CLARENCE 
LUCAS. 

LATEST    ADDITIONS. 

THE  STORY  OF  OPERA,  By  E.  MARKHAM  LEE,  Mui 
Doc. 

THE  STORY  OF  THE  CAROL,  By  EDMONDSTOUNE 
DUNCAN. 

THE  WALTER  SCOTT  PUBLISHING  COMPANY,  LIMITED, 
LONDON  AND  FELLING-ON-TYNE. 


Musicians'  Wit,   Humour,  and 
Anecdote : 

BEING    ON  DITS  OF   COMPOSERS,   SINGERS,   AND 
INSTRUMENTALISTS    OF   ALL   TIMES. 

By   FREDERICK  J,  CROWEST, 

Author  of  "The  Great  Tone  Poets,"  "The  Story  of  British  Music," 
Editor  of  "The  Master  Musicians"  Series,  etc.,  etc. 

Profusely  Illustrated  with  Quaint  Drawings  by 
J.   P.   DONNE. 

Crown  Svo,   Cloth,  Richly  Gilt,  Price  3/6. 

"It  is  one  of  those  delightful  medleys  of  anecdote  of  all  times}  seasons, 
and  persons,  in  every  page  of  which  there  is  a  new  specimen  of  humour, 
strange  adventure,  and  quaint  saying." — T.  P.  O'CONNOR  in  T.P.'s 

Weekly. 

"A  remarkable  collection  of  good  stories  which  must  have  taken  years 
of  perseverance  to  get  together." — Morning  Leader. 

"A  book  which  should  prove  acceptable  to  two  large  sections  of  the 
public —those  who  are  interested  in  musicians  and  those  who  have  an 
adequate  sense  of  the  comic." — Globe. 


Tolstoy:    His  Life  and  Works. 

By  JOHN   C.    KENWORTHY, 
AN  INTIMATE  FRIEND  OF  THE  GREAT  RUSSIAN  WRITER. 

Crown  Sue,  256  pages,  Richly  Bound,  containing  Portraits, 
Facsimile  Letter,    Views,  etc. 

PRICE    SIX    SHILLINGS. 

THE  WALTER  SCOTT  PUBLISHING  COMPANY,  LIMITED, 
LONDON  AND  FELLING-ON-TYNK. 


The  Emerald  Library. 

Crown  8vo,  Gilt  Top,  Half  Bound  in  Dark  Green  Ribbed 
Cloth,  with  Light  Green  Cloth  Sides,  2s.  each. 


Barnaby  Rudge 
Old  Curiosity  Shop 

Caudle's  Lectures 
Jack  Hinton 

Tho  Days  of  Bruce 
The  Vale  of  Cedars 

Pickwick  Papers 

Bret  llarte 

Hunchback  of  Notre 

Nicholas  Nickleby 

Ingoldsby  Legends 

Vashti                [Dame 

Oliver  Twist 

Handy  Andy 

The  Caxtons 

Martin  <  'huzzlewit 

Lewis  Armulel 

Harold,  Last  of  the 

Sketches  by  Buz 
Olive 

Guy  Mannering 

Rob  Roy 

Saxon  Kings 
Toilers  of  the  Sea 

The  Ogilvies 

Fortunes  of  Nigel 

What  Can  She  Do? 

Ivanhoe 

Man  in  the  Iron  .Mask 

New  Border  Tales 

Kenilworth 

Great  Composers 

Frank  Fairlegh 

Jacob  Faithful 

Louise  de  la  Valliere 

Zanoni 

Peter  .simple 

Great  Painters 

Macaria 

Paul  Clifford 

Rory  O  More 

Inez 

Eugene  Aram 

Arabian  Nights 

Conduct  and  Duty 

Ernest  Maltravers 

Swiss  Family  Robinson 

Windsor  Castle 

Alice  ;  or,  The  Mys 

Andersen's  Fairy  Tales 

Hard  Times 

teries 

Three  Musketeers 

Tower  of  London 

Rienzi 

Twenty  Years  After 

John  Halifax,  Gentle- 

Pelham 

Vicomte  de  Bragelonne 

Westward  Ho  1    [man 

The  Last  Days  of 

Monte  Cristo—  Dantes 

Lavengro 

Pompeii 

,,  Revenge  of  Dautes 

It  is  Never  Too  Late 

The  Scottish  Chiefs 

The  Newcomes 

to  Mend 

Wilson's  Tales 

Life  of  Robert  Moffat 

Two  Years  Ago 

The  Fair  God 

Life  of  Gladstone 

In  His  Steps 

Miss  Beresford's 

Cranford 

Crucifixion  of  Phillip 

Mystery 

North  and  South 

Strong 

A  Mountain  Daisy 

Life  of  Gen.  Gordon 

His  Brother's  Keeper 

Hazel;  or,  Perilpoint 

Lincoln  and  Garfleld 

Robert  Hardy's  Seven 

Lighthouse 

Great  Modern  Women 

Days,   and  Malcora 

Vicar  of  Wakefleld 

Henry  Esmond 

Kirk  (in  1  vol.) 

Prince  of  the  House 

Alton  Locke 

Richard  Bruce 

of  David 

Life  of  Livingstone 

The  Twentieth  Door 

Wide,  Wide  World 

Life  of  Grace  Darling 

House  of  the    Seven 

Village  Tales 

White's  Selborne 

Gables 

Ben-Bur 

Tales  of  the  Covenanters 

Elsie  Venner 

Uncle  Tom's  Cabin 

Barriers  Burned  Away 

The  Romany  Rye 

Robinson  Crusoe 

Opening  a  ChestnutBurr 

Little  Dorrit 

The,  White  Slave 

Pendennls 

The  Scarlet  Letter 

Charles  O'Malley 
Midshipman  Easy 

David  Copperfield 
Luck  of  Barry  Lyndon 

Mary  Barton 
Home  Influence 

Bride  of  Lammermoor 

St.  Elmo 

The  Mother's  Recom 

Heart  of  Midlothian 

Son  of  Porthos 

pense 

Last  of  the  Barons 

Stanley  and  Africa 

Tennyson's  Poems 

Old  Mortality 
Tom  Cringle's  Log 

Life  of  Wesley 
Life  of  Spurgeon 

Harry  Covcrdale's 
Courtship 

Cruise  of  the  Midge 

For  Lust  of  Gold 

The  Bible  in  Spain 

Colleen  Uawri 

Wooing  of  Webster 

Handbook  of  House 

Valentine  Vox 

At  the  Mercy  of  Ti 

keeping 

Night  and  Morning 

berius 

The  Dead  Secret 

Bunyan 

Countess  of  Rudolstadt 

Queen  Victoria 

Foxe's  Book  of  Mar 

Consuelo 

Martin  Rattler 

tyrs 

Two  Years  before  the 

Ungava 

Mansfield  Park 

Mast 

The  Coral  Island 

Last  of  the  Mohicans 

Fair  Maid  of  Perth 

Adam  Bede 

Poor  Jack 

Peveril  of  the  Peak 

The  Young  Fur-Traders 

The  Lamplighter 

Shirley 

The  Virginians 

Jane  Kyre 

Queechy 

A  Tale  of  Two  Cities 

Pillar  of  Fire 

Naomi;  or,  the  Last 

Scenes  of  Clerical  Life 

Throne  of  David 

Days  of  Jerusalem 

The  Mill  on  the  l-'lo-s 

Doinbey  and  Son 

Little  Women  and 

Danesbury  Ifo.ise 

Vanity  Fair 

Good  Wives 

A  Life  for  a  Life 

In  f  el  ice 

Ilypatia 

Christmas  Books 

Beulah 

Villette 

Tom  Brown'sSchooldaya 

Harry  Lorrequer 

Ruth 

Grimm's  Fairy  Tales 

Essays  of  Klia 

Agatha's  Husband 

East  Lynne           [Stress 

Sheridan's  Plays 

Head  of  the  Family 

Through     Storm     and 

Waverley 

Old  Helmet 

The  Channings 

Quentin  Durward 

Bleak  House 

Old  St.  Paul's    [Hearth 

Talisman 

Cecil  Dreeme 

The    Cloister    and    Lha 

From  Jest  to  Earnest 

Melbourne  House 

Mrs.  Ilalliburton's 

Knight  of  19th  Century 

Wuthering  Heights 

Troubles. 

Crown  8vo,  about  350  pp.  each,  Cloth  Cover,  2/6  per  vol. ; 
Half- Polished  Morocco,  Gilt  Top,  53. 

Count   Tolstoy's   Works. 

The  following  Volumes  are  already  issued — 


AND     OTHER 


A   RUSSIAN   PROPRIETOR. 
THE  COSSACKS. 
IVAN      ILYITCH, 

STORIES. 
MY   RELIGION. 
LIFE. 

MY  CONFESSION. 
CHILDHOOD,    BOYHOOD, 

YOUTH. 
THE   PHYSIOLOGY  OF   WAR. 


WHAT  TO   DO? 

THE   LONG   EXILE,   ETC. 

SEVASTOPOL. 

THE   KREUTZER   SONATA,  AND 

FAMILY  HAPPINESS. 
THE     KINGDOM      OF      GOD     IS 

WITHIN   YOU. 
WORK    WHILE    YE    HAVE    THE 

LIGHT. 

THE  GOSPEL  IN   BRIEF. 
Uniform  with  the  above — 
IMPRESSIONS  OF  RUSSIA.     By  Dr.  GEORG  BRANDES. 

In  the  "World's  Great  Novels"  Series. 

Large  Crown  8vo,  Cloth,  Gilt  Top,  Illustrated,  Price  3/6  per  vol. 
WAR   AND    PEACE.      (2  vols.) 

ANNA  KARENINA.     Also  cheap  edition,  2/-  net. 

l/~  Booklets  by  Count  Tolstoy. 

Bound  in  White  Grained  Boards,  with  Gilt  Lettering. 


WHERE   LOVE   IS,   THERE   GOD 

IS    ALSO. 

THE  TWO   PILGRIMS. 
WHAT   MEN   LIVE   BY. 


THE  GODSON. 

IF    YOU    NEGLECT    THE    FIRE, 

YOU   DON'T  PUT   IT   OUT. 
WHAT  SHALL  IT  PROFIT  A  MAN? 


2/-  Booklets  by  Count  Tolstoy. 

NEW   EDITIONS,   REVISED. 

Small  I2mo,  Cloth,  with  Embossed  Design  on  Cover,  each  containing 

Two  Stories  by  Count  Tolstoy,  and  Two  Drawings  by 

H.  R.  Millar.     In  Box,  Price  2s.  each. 


Volume  I.  contains — 

WHERE   LOVE   IS,   THERE   GOD 

IS   ALSO. 
THE   GODSON. 

Volume  II.  contains — 

WHAT  MEN   LIVE   BY. 

WHAT     SHALL     IT     PROFIT     A 

MAN  ? 


Volume  III.  contains  — 

THE  TWO   PILGRIMS. 
IF    YOU    NEGLECT    THE    FIRE, 
YOU   DON'T  PUT   IT   OUT. 

Volume  IV.  contains — 

MASTER  AND   MAN. 

Volume  V.  contains — 

TOLSTOY'S   PARABLES. 


THE  WALTER  SCOTT  PUBLISHING  COMPANY,  LIMITED, 
LONDON  AND  FELLING-ON-TYNE. 


•"  '  .     J  U  L    U 


Poincare,   Henri 

Science  and   hypothesis 


PLEASE  DO  NOT  REMOVE 
CARDS  OR  SLIPS  FROM  THIS  POCKET 

UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO  LIBRARY